tm 08780b-10

TM 08780B-10

U.S. MARINE CORPS TECHNICAL MANUAL

OPERATORS MANUAL

FOR TRUCK, 8 X 8

LOGISTICS VEHICLE SYSTEM

(DIESEL)

CONSISTING OF

POWER UNIT, FRONT,

4 X 4 MK48(NSN 2320-01-177-5167)

4 X 4 MK48A1 (NSN 2320-01-417-3180)

TRAILER, POWERED,

CONTAINER HAULER,

4 X 4 MK14 (NSN 2320-01-176-0469)

4 X 4 MK14A1 (NSN 2320-01-417-5294)

TRAILER, POWERED,

WRECKER/RECOVERY

4 X 4 MK15 (NSN 2320-01-176-6928)

4 X 4 MK15A1 (NSN 2320-01-417-8144)

TRAILER, POWERED,

FIFTH WHEEL, SEMI-TRAILER ADAPTER

4 X 4 MK16 (NSN 2320-01-176-0487)

4 X 4 MK16A1 (NSN 2320-01-417-5293)

TRAILER, POWERED,

DROPSIDE, CARGO W/CRANE

4 X 4 MK17 (NSN 2320-01-176-0468)

4 X 4 MK17A1 (NSN 2320-01-417-5296)

OSHKOSH TRUCK CORPORATION

DAAE07-83-C-H418

DAAE07-95-C-X057

THIS PUBLICATION IS REQUIRED FOR OFFICIAL USE OR FOR

ADMINISTRATIVE OR OPERATIONAL PURPOSES, DISTRIBUTION IS LIMITED

TO U.S GOVERNMENT AGENCIES ONLY. OTHER REQUESTS FOR THIS

DOCUMENT MUST BE REFERRED TO: COMMANDANT OF THE MARINE

CORPS (ARD), WASHINGTON. D.C. 20380-0001

MAY 2004

PCN 180 002326 00

Change 1

incorporated.

TM 08780B-10

1/(2 blank)

DEPARTMENT OF THE NAVY

Headquarters, U. S. Marine Corps

Washington, DC 20380-0001

28 May 2004

1. This Technical Manual (TM 08780B-10), authenticated for Marine Corps use

and effective upon receipt, provides operation instructions for the Logistics

Vehicle System (LVS) series of vehicles, consisting of the Front Power Unit

MK48/48A1, Trailer, Powered, Container Hauler MK14/14A1, Trailer,

Powered, Wrecker/Recovery MK15/15A1, Trailer, Powered, Fifth Wheel, Semi-

Trailer Adapter MK16/16A1 and Trailer, Powered, Dropside, Cargo with Crane

MK17/17A1.

2. Submit notice of discrepancies or suggested changes on a NAVMC 10772.

The NAVMC may be submitted via the Internet using website:

https://pubs.ala.usmc.mil/front.htm, scrolling down to the NAVMC 10772

Tracking Program and following instructions provided. It may also be

submitted by electronic mail to [email protected], or

by mailing paper copy of NAVMC 10772 in an envelope addressed to:

Commander, Marine Corps Systems Command, Attn: Assistant Commander

Acquisition and Logistics (LOG/TP), 814 Radford Blvd, Suite 20343, Albany,

Georgia, 31704-0343.

3. TM 2320-10/11A dated December 20, 1989 is hereby superseded for Marine

Corps use.

BY DIRECTION OF THE COMMANDANT OF THE MARINE CORPS

OFFICIAL

S. I. SCHULER

Colonel, USMC

Program Manager, Motor Transport (PMM151)

Marine Corps Systems Command

DISTRIBUTION: PCN 180 002326 00

https://pubs.ala.usmc.mil/front.htm

mailto:[email protected]

1/(2 blank)

DEPARTMENT OF THE NAVY

Headquarters, U.S. Marine Corps

Washington, DC 20380-0001

TM 08780B-10

Change 1

PCN 180 002326 01

30 September 2010

Encl: (1) Replacement Pages

(2) New Insert Pages

1. Purpose. To transmit new and replacement pages to TM 08780B-10, Operators Manual for

Truck, 8 X 8 Logistics Vehicle System, dated May 2004.

2. Action. Remove present pages listed below and replace with corresponding pages contained

in the enclosures. Significant changes contained in the replacement pages of this change are

denoted by a vertical bar in the left-hand margin. Changes to figures are denoted by a pointing

hand indicating the location of the change.

REMOVE PAGES INSERT PAGES

Cover Page Cover Page

A/(B blank) A/(B blank)

iii - iv iii - iv

2-395.1 – 2-395.32

B-31 – B-34 B-31 – B-34

3. Filing Instructions. This change transmittal page will be filed immediately following the

signature page of the manual.

BY DIRECTION OF THE COMMANDANT OF THE MARINE CORPS

OFFICIAL

MICHAEL W. EVERLY

Program Manager, Motor Transportation (PMM 151)

Marine Corps Systems Command

DISTRIBUTION: PCN 180 002326 01

mike.mimms

PM MT Signature

TM 08780B-10

A/(B blank)

INSERT LATEST CHANGED PAGES. DESTROY SUPERSEDED PAGES.

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

NOTE: The portion of the text affected

by the changes is indicated by a vertical

line in the outer margin of the page.

Changes to illustrations are indicated

by miniature pointing hands. Changes

to wiring diagrams are indicated by

shaded areas.

Dates of issue for original and changed pages

are:

Original. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 May 2004

Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 Sep 2010

TOTAL NUMBER OF PAGES IN THIS PUBLICATION IS 913 CONSISTING OF THE

FOLLOWING:

Page No. Change No. Page No. Change No.

Title 1

Blank 0

1 0

2 blank 0

A - B blank 1

i-ii 0

iii 1

iv - xx blank 0

1-1 - 1-34 0

2-1 - 2-395 0

2-395-1 - 2-395-31 1

2-396 – 2-642 blank 0

3-1 - 3-74 0

A-1 - A-2 blank 0

B-1 - B-31 0

B-32 - B-34 1

B-35 - B-56 0

C-1 - C-2 blank 0

D-1 - D-6 blank 0

E-1 - E-36 blank 0

Index-1 - Index-6 blank 0

*ZERO IN THIS COLUMN INDICATES AN ORIGINAL PAGE

RECORD OF CHANGES

CHANGE

NO.

DATE TITLE OR BRIEF

DESCRIPTION

ENTERED

BY

TM 08780B-10

i

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page

How to Use This Manual ............................................................ xvii

CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION ............................................ 1-1

Section I General Information ................................. 1-1

1-1 Scope ...................................................... 1-1

1-2 Maintenance Forms and Records ............. 1-1

1-3 Report of Maintenance and

Unsatisfactory Equipment (QDR'S) ......... 1-1

1-4 Warranty Information .............................. 1-1

1-5 Reference Information ............................. 1-2

Section II. Equipment Description ............................ 1-3

1-6 General Description ................................. 1-3

1-7 MK48/48A1//14/14A1 Container

Hauler Vehicle ......................................... 1-4

1-8 MK48/48A1//15/15A1

Wrecker/Recovery Vehicle ...................... 1-6

1-9 MK48/48A1/16/16A1 Fifth Wheel

Semi-Trailer Adapter Vehicle .................. 1-9

1-10 MK48/48A1/17/17A1 Drop Side

Cargo w/Crane Vehicle .......................... 1-11

1-11 Difference Between Models .................. 1-14

1-12 Equipment Data ..................................... 1-15

Section III. Technical Principles of Operation ......... 1-29

1-13 Introduction ............................................ 1-29

1-14 Air System ............................................. 1-29

1-15 Electrical System ................................... 1-30

1-16 Hydraulic System ................................... 1-31

1-17 Steering System ..................................... 1-32

1-18 Drive Line System ................................. 1-33

TM 08780B-10

ii

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)

Page

CHAPTER 2 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS ...................... 2-1

Section I. Description and Use of Operator's

Controls, Indicators, and Features ........... 2-1

2-1 MK48/48A1 Front Power Unit ................ 2-1

2-2 MK14/14A1 Container Hauler

Trailer .................................................... 2-21

2-3 MK15/15A1 Wrecker/Recovery

Trailer .................................................... 2-24

2-4 MK16/16A1 Fifth Wheel

Semi-Trailer Adapter ............................. 2-40

2-5 MK17/17A1 Drop Side Cargo

w/Crane Trailer ...................................... 2-44

2-6 Special Purpose Kits Controls and

Indicators................................................ 2-56

Section II. Prevention Maintenance Checks

and Services (PMCS) ............................. 2-61

2-7 General ................................................... 2-61

2-8 Table Arrangement ................................ 2-61

2-9 Use of Preventive Maintenance

Checks and Services .............................. 2-61

2-10 General Maintenance Procedures .......... 2-62

2-11 Fluid Leakage......................................... 2-63

2-12 Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance

Checks and Service Tables .................... 2-64

Section III. Operation Under Normal Conditions ... 2-170

2-13 MK48 Operation .................................. 2-170

2-14 Operation of Vehicle Lights................. 2-192

2-15 Power Unit and Trailer Separation ...... 2-196

2-16 MK15 Crane Operation........................ 2-213

2-17 MK15A1 Material Handling (MHC)

Crane Operation ................................... 2-248

TM 08780B-10

Change 1 iii


Page

2-18 MK15/15A1 A-Frame Lift and Tow

Operations…………………………… 2-273

2-19 Lift Towing the 7-Ton Truck by the

LVS Wrecker ....................................... 2-382

2-19.1 Lift Towing the LVSR MKR 18 by the

LVS Wrecker .................................... 2-395.1

2-20 MK15/MK15A1 Winch Operation ...... 2-427

2-21 MK15 Auxiliary Hydraulics for

Tool Usage ........................................... 2-448

2-22 MK15 Auxiliary Hydraulics for

Additional Crane Usage ....................... 2-458

2-23 MK16/MK16A1 Fifth Wheel

Operation.............................................. 2-468

2-24 MK16 Winch Operation ...................... 2-478

2-25 MK17 Crane Operation........................ 2-485

2-26 MK17A1 Material Handling (MHC)

Crane Operation ................................... 2-516

2-27 MK17/17A1 Cargo Side Panel

Operation.............................................. 2-541

2-28 MK17/17A1 Cargo Cover Kit ............. 2-550

2-29 ISO/ANSI Container Loading

Procedures ............................................ 2-568

2-30 Cargo Tie Down Rings and Ratchet

Straps.................................................... 2-582

2-31 Run Flat and Sand Tire Kits................. 2-586

2-32 Rear Body Tow Unit Operation ........... 2-588

2-33 Extended and Standard Pintle

Operation.............................................. 2-599

2-34 Machine Gun Platform and Hatch

Operation.............................................. 2-608

2-35 M870/M870A1 Trailer Kit Operation . 2-613

Section IV. Operation Under Unusual Conditions .. 2-615

2-36 Introduction .......................................... 2-615

2-37 Operating In Extreme Cold Weather ... 2-615

TM 08780B-10

iv


Page

2-38 Operating In Hot Weather .................... 2-618

2-39 Operating In Rough Or Unusual

Terrain .................................................. 2-621

2-40 Fording Operations .............................. 2-626

2-41 Emergency Operating Procedures…… 2-628

2-42 Front Flat Towing Procedures ............. 2-642

2-43 Flat Towing the 7-Ton Truck by

the LVS ................................................ 2-663

CHAPTER 3 MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS

Section I. Lubrication Instructions ........................... 3-1

3-1 Lubrication ............................................... 3-1

Section II. Troubleshooting Procedures .................... 3-1

3-2 Introduction .............................................. 3-1

Section III. Maintenance Procedures ........................ 3-38

3-3 Introduction ............................................ 3-38

3-4 Tire Inflation .......................................... 3-38

3-5 Draining Air Reservoirs ......................... 3-45

3-6 Cleaning the Vehicle .............................. 3-46

3-7 Purging Air From Hydraulic Jack .......... 3-47

3-8 Changing Wheel and Tire Assembly ..... 3-48

3-9 Fuel Tank Strainer Service..................... 3-63

3-10 Battery Service ....................................... 3-65

3-11 Battery Service (MK48A1 Series

Vehicles Only) ....................................... 3-69

3-12 Fifth Wheel and Fifth Wheel Ramp

Service.................................................... 3-73

Appendix A References ........................................................... A-1

Appendix B Components of End Item and Basic Issue

Lists ......................................................................B-1

Appendix C Additional Authorization List ..............................C-1

Appendix D Expendable/Durable Supplies List ...................... D-1

TM 08780B-10

v


Page

Appendix E Stowage and Sign Guide ...................................... E-1

Index .................................................................... INDEX-1

TM 08780B-10

vi

LIST OF TABLES

Table Page

1-1 Differnce Between Models ................................ 1-14

1-2 Performance Data............................................... 1-15

1-3 Vehicle Dimensions ........................................... 1-16

1-4 Chassis Dimensions ........................................... 1-16

1-5 Curb Weight ....................................................... 1-17

1-6 Maximum Payload ............................................. 1-17

1-7 Shipping Dimensions ......................................... 1-18

1-8 Capacities ........................................................... 1-19

1-9 Specifications ..................................................... 1-20

1-10 Specifications ..................................................... 1-23

1-11 Specifications ..................................................... 1-24

1-12 Specifications ..................................................... 1-26

1-13 Specifications ..................................................... 1-28

2-1 Operator/Crew Preventative Maintenance

Checks and Services (All Vehicles) ................... 2-66


Checks and Services (MK15 Wrecker/

Recovery) ......................................................... 2-118


Checks and Services (MK15A1 Wrecker/

Recovery) ......................................................... 2-127


Checks and Services (M16 Fifty Wheel

Semi Trailer Adapter) ...................................... 2-140


Checks and Services (MK17 Dropside

Cargo w/Crane) ................................................ 2-148


Checks and Services MK17A1 Dropside

Cargo w/Crane ................................................. 2-155

2-7 Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance

Checks and Services (Special Purpose Kits) ... 2-167

2-8 Transmission Shift Ranges .............................. 2-181

2-9 LVS GPM Flow Ranges .................................. 2-420

TM 08780B-10

vii

LIST OF TABLES

Table Page

2-10 LVS ISO/ANSI Container Load

Combinations ................................................... 2-539

3-1 System Index ........................................................ 3-1

3-2 Troubleshooting ................................................... 3-3

3-3 Unsafe Inflation Pressures ................................. 3-41

3-4 Unsafe Inflation Pressures ................................. 3-57

TM 08780B-10

viii

WARNING

CARBON MONOXIDE (EXHAUST GAS) CAN KILL YOU.

Carbon monoxide is without color and smell, but it can kill you.

Breathing air with carbon monoxide produces symptoms of

headache, dizziness, loss of muscular control, a sleepy feeling, and

coma. Brain damage or death can result from heavy exposure.

Carbon monoxide occurs in exhaust fumes of fuel-burning heaters

and internal combustion engines. Carbon monoxide can become

dangerously concentrated under conditions of no ventilation.

Precautions must be followed to insure crew safety when the

personnel heater or engine of any vehicle is operated for any

purpose.

1. DO NOT operate personnel heater or engine of vehicle in a

closed place without proper ventilation.

2. DO NOT drive any vehicle with inspection plates, cover

plates, or engine compartment covers removed unless necessary

for maintenance purposes.

3. BE ALERT at all times during vehicle operation for

exhaust odors and exposure symptoms. If either are present,

IMMEDIATELY VENTILATE personnel compartments. If

symptoms persist, remove affected crew to fresh air and keep

warm. DO NOT PERMIT PHYSICAL EXERCISE. If necessary,

give artificial respiration and get immediate medical attention.

THE BEST DEFENSE AGAINST CARBON MONOXIDE

POISONING IS GOOD VENTILATION

WARNING

Front and rear frames pivot. Stay clear of tires and center hinge

area while engine is running.

TM 08780B-10

ix

WARNING SUMMARY

The following is a list of warnings that appear in this manual. LVS

operators must become familiar with all warnings. Severe injury

and death can be avoided by operator's who understand the vehicle

and are alert to possible dangers.

Failure to use seatbelt can result in serious injury in case of

accident. Always use your seatbelt when operating this vehicle.

The operator should never leave the cab without applying the

parking brake. Vehicle could roll away, causing serious personal

injury or damage to the vehicle.

All personnel must stand clear of vehicle, particularly the

articulation joint area located between the front power unit and rear

trailer, when an engine start is attempted. The operator should

visually check to see that all areas of vehicle are clear of personnel

before attempting to start engine. Failure to do so can result in

serious personal injury.

Never use parking brake for normal braking. The wheels will lock

up, causing a severe skid. This could result in serious personal

injury, death of personnel, and/or extensive equipment damage.

Do not place tools or other solid objects under the driver's seat or

on the floor at driver's feet. Keep the area clean. Such items can

roll underneath the brake pedal, preventing brake application and

serious personal injury in case of accident.

Avoid quick, jerking, winch operation. Keep personnel well away

from vehicles involved in winching operations. A snapped cable

or shifting load can cause serious personal injury.

Do not hold onto the winch cable if tension is required to guide the

cable back on the spool, the assistant will hold the clevis, not the

cable. Neither the operator nor assistant should stand within arms

length of the spool when the cable is being retrieved.

TM 08780B-10

x

WARNING SUMMARY (CONTINUED)

Cable can become frayed or contain broken wires. Wear heavy

leather-palmed gloves when handling cable. Never let moving

cable slide through hands, even when wearing gloves. Failure to

comply may result in injury to personnel.

If operating crane under power lines, do not allow vehicle to touch

high voltage connections. Death on contact may result.

Remove rings, bracelets, wristwatches, and neck chains before

working around the vehicle or other vehicles. Jewelry can catch on

equipment and cause injury, or may short across an electrical

circuit and cause severe burns or electrical shock.

Starting fluid is toxic and flammable. Do not store in cab and do

not breathe fumes. Do not puncture or burn containers. Dispose of

container properly. Serious injury could result.

Fuel is flammable and can explode. To avoid serious injury or

death, keep fuel away from open fire and keep fire extinguisher

within easy reach when working with fuel. Do not work on fuel

system when engine is hot. Fuel can be ignited by hot engine.

Smoking is prohibited while working with fuel.

During vehicle operation, exhaust pipe and muffler can become

very hot. Be careful not to touch these parts with any part of your

body. Exhaust system parts can become hot enough to cause

serious burns.

Do not reach into radiator fan area with engine running. The fan is

thermostatically controlled and may engage without warning

causing serious injuries.

Cooling system components become hot during operation. To

avoid personal injury, do not service cooling system components

until cooling system has cooled down.

TM 08780B-10

xi


Let radiator cool before removing cap. Remove radiator cap in

two steps. First, place a thick cloth over the cap and slowly rotate

cap counterclockwise to its first stop. Pause, and let pressure

escape from cooling system. Then rotate cap counterclockwise

until you can remove it. Failure to follow this procedure can result

in serious burns.

Always remove negative battery ground cables first and install

them last to avoid sparks that can cause an explosion. Failure to

follow this precaution may result in serious injury to you and other

personnel.

Be careful not to short out battery terminals. Do not smoke or use

open flame near batteries. Batteries may explode from a spark.

Battery acid is harmful to skin and eyes.

Transporting, handling, and loading of any explosives and/or

hazardous material must be done in accordance with local, state,

and federal regulations. Motor vehicle operator's responsibilities

are provided in the Motor Vehicle Drivers Handbook for

Ammunition, Explosives, and Hazardous Material NAVSEA

SWO-20-AF-ABK-010.

Do not operate hydraulic tools near electrical power sources or

electric power lines. Contact or near contact with electrical power

sources or electric power lines could cause serious injury or death

by electrocution.

When it is necessary to lift and tow a disabled vehicle, certain

precautions and procedures must be followed to prevent damage to

the vehicle or components. Failure to use standard towing

precautionary measures while lifting and towing a disabled vehicle

could result in an unsafe operating condition.

Do not attempt to move vehicle with selector valve in the

AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS position. Steering will not work.

TM 08780B-10

xii


Coupling a disabled vehicle for lifting and towing requires an

experienced operator and ground guide. Operator must back in

slowly, using extreme care. Full attention must be paid to the

ground guide. Operator and ground guide must both agree on and

understand two hand signals - one that means BACK UP

SLOWLY and one that means STOP.

Before decoupling the rear module, lower landing leg on rear

crossmember.

Do not handle winch cable unless necessary and never with bare

hands. Always wear leather gloves when handling cables. Never

allow cable to run through hands. Broken wires can cause injuries.

Do not operate winch with less than five coils of cable. Cable

clamp will not hold under direct strain.

Direct all personnel to stand clear of winch cable and load during

winching operation. A snapped cable or shifting load can be

extremely dangerous.

Do not adjust seat while vehicle is moving. The seat suspension

mechanism can cause serious injury to personnel if hands are

placed into it during adjustment procedure.

Hearing protection is required when firing machine gun.

Do not wear watches or other jewelry when servicing batteries

which could short out battery terminals. Do not smoke or use open

flame around batteries. Batteries may explode from a spark.

Battery acid is harmful to skin and eyes.

Increased effort will be required to turn steering wheel if there is a

failure of hydraulic steering system or the engine stops running.

Stop vehicle as soon as road conditions permit. Operating the

vehicle with impaired steering could result in serious injury or

death.

TM 08780B-10

xiii


Ensure area is clear on both sides of vehicle before extending

outrigger beams and jacks. Failure to comply may result in injury

to personnel or damage to equipment.

Keep hands and feet clear of outriggers during operation. Failure

to comply may result in injury to personnel.

The engine during operation will create blowing dust. Eye

protection must be worn while operating crane controls. Failure to

comply may result in injury to personnel.

Keep boom clear of all electrical lines and other obstacles while

operating crane. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to

personnel.

The crane must be operated with remote control if operator is not

able to keep load in sight at all times during operation. Failure to

comply may result in injury or death to personnel.

Ensure that area is clear of personnel before rotating boom. Boom

must be rotated slowly enough so operator has complete control of

load. If operator cannot see load during operation, operate crane

with remote control. Failure to comply may result in injury or

death to personnel.

Operator must keep control of load at all times. Attach guide lines

to load as required. Failure to comply may result in injury or death

to personnel.

Ensure that hook latch is closed and safety pin is installed before

attempting to raise load. A hook latch that is not closed and locked

in position could allow load to become disengaged from hook,

allowing load to fall. Injury or death could result.

TM 08780B-10

xiv


Use extreme care when attempting to raise load with a damaged

hook latch or safety pin. Have Organizational Maintenance repair

damaged parts as soon as mission is completed.

Ensure there are at least two wraps of cable on hoist drum at all

times. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to

personnel.

Do not disconnect cable from stowage ring until boom is raised to

a 45-degree angle. Hook assembly could fall. Failure to comply

may result in injury to personnel.

Use this procedure only in the event of an event of an extreme

emergency. Using the MANUAL OVERRIDE switch to operate

the MHC defeats the overload shutdown circuits and allows the

MHC to exceed the rated capacity. Failure to comply may result in

injury or death to personnel or damage to equipment.

While changing tires or while performing tire maintenance, stay

out of the trajectory as shown by the area indicated. Failure to

follow proper procedures may result in injury or death to

personnel.

Under some circumstances, the trajectory may deviate from its

expected path. Failure to follow proper procedures may result in

injury or death to personnel.

If the tire is under inflated or over inflated, or there is obvious or

suspected damage on the tire or wheel components, the tire must

be completely deflated (TM 08780B-20). To deflate the tire,

remove the valve core from the valve stem and stand out of the

trajectory area before the wheel is removed from the vehicle or

personal injury may result.

TM 08780B-10

xv


Never inflate a tire without checking to ensure that the flange and

lock ring are still properly seated and the lock ring is properly

seated in the lock ring groove. Ensure that the flange, lock ring

and lock ring groove are not damaged. The lock ring and flange

may blow off during inflation/deflation resulting in serious injury

or death to personnel.

Failure to comply with these procedures may result in faulty

positioning of the tire and/or rim parts, and cause the assembly to

burst with explosive force, sufficient to cause serious physical

injury or death.

When inflating tires mounted on the vehicle, all personnel must

remain out of the trajectory of the lock ring and flange, as shown

by the areas indicated. Failure to follow proper procedures may

result in serious injury or death to personnel.

If tire is under inflated or over inflated, or there is obvious or

suspected damage on the tire or wheel components, the tire must

be completely deflated by removing the valve core from the valve

stem and stand out of the trajectory area or personal injury or death

may result.

Before checking tire pressure, perform steps (1 thru 4.2) to check

tire pressure properly, or pressure readings will be inaccurate and

injury or death may result.

If the tire has been driven under inflated or over inflated, or there is

obvious or suspected damage on the tire or wheel components, the

tire must be completely deflated. To deflate the tire, remove the

valve core from the valve stem and stand out of the trajectory area

or personal injury or death may result.

When returning axle to ground, ensure personnel are out of the

trajectory as shown by the area indicated. Failure to comply may

result in serious injury or death to personnel.

TM 08780B-10

xvi


Lead-acid batteries contain sulfuric acid which can cause severe

burns. Avoid contact with skin, eyes, or clothing. Wear safety

goggles and gloves. If battery electrolyte is spilled, take

immediate action to stop its corrosive (burning) effects.

When inspecting battery, never smoke or expose battery to sparks

or flames. The gas mixture in each cell of the battery, which

escapes through holes in the vent plugs, can ignite causing an

internal explosion of battery.

When working around batteries, ALWAYS wear eye protection

(face shield), acid resistant rubber apron, and gloves.

When servicing batteries, do not wear watches, rings, or other

jewelry.

Whenever disconnecting battery cables, always disconnect

GROUND terminal first. When reconnecting, always connect

GROUND cables last.

Cribbage and/or blockage should not be used under the outrigger

pads to prevent sinking into the soil. Failure of such devices could

result in serious injury or death.

Crane operations have inherent hazards that cannot be

mechanically safeguarded. Operator and assisting personnel are

required to wear hard hats and safety shoes.

To avoid being crushed, stay clear of stabilizers while in operation.

To avoid personal injury, stay clear of stabilizer when pulling

towards rear of vehicle.

Lift and tow operations must always be conducted at a speed

which the operator determines to be safe under existing conditions.

In no event should the operator exceed 15 mph (24 kph) when

lifting and towing a disabled vehicle.

TM 08780B-10

xvii


If the tire has been run flat, or is over or under inflated when tire

pressure measured and operating terrain is compared to Table 3-3,

or if wheel/tire assembly has obvious or suspected damage, it is not

safe to adjust tire pressure. Completely deflate the tire and remove

the tire from the axle. Failure to follow these procedures may

result in serious personal injury or death.

Never mount or use damaged tires or rims.

Speed limits posted on curves reflect speeds that are considered

safe for automobiles. Heavy trucks with a high center of gravity

can roll over at these speed limits. Use caution and reduce your

speed below the posted limit before entering a curve. Failure to

comply may result in vehicle crash and injury to personnel.

TM 08780B-10

xviii

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

This single volume manual is divided into CHAPTERS,

SECTIONS, and PARAGRAPHS. For a specific Chapter, Section,

or Paragraph, refer to the TABLE OF CONTENTS (page III).

The TABLE OF CONTENTS lists the titles of each Chapter,

Section, and Paragraph and the page number where they can be

found. The TABLE OF CONTENTS also lists the Appendices and

Index for this manual.

CHAPTER 1 introduces and describes the Logistics Vehicle

System (LVS) giving General Information, Equipment

Description, and Technical Principles of Operation.

CHAPTER 2 provides Operation Instructions for the LVS in the

following sections:

• Description and Use of Operator's Controls, Indicators, and

Features

• Operation Under Normal Conditions

• Operation Under Unusual Conditions

CHAPTER 3 provides Maintenance Instructions for the LVS in the

following sections:

• Lubrication Instructions

• Troubleshooting Procedures

• Maintenance Procedures

A feature of the Troubleshooting Procedures Section is the

SYMPTOM INDEX. This index provides an easy way to find the

troubleshooting procedure needed by looking up the symptom.

APPENDICES are located at the back of this manual to provide

information on equipment, tools, and supplies needed to keep the

LVS fully operational.

TM 08780B-10

xix/(xx blank)

Before operating any part of the LVS, ALWAYS do the following:

• Read and follow all WARNINGS inside the front cover.

• Read the Equipment Description and Technical Principles

of Operation located in Chapter 1.

• Read completely through the Operating Instructions to

familiarize yourself with the equipment before using it.

TM 08780B-10

1-1

CHAPTER 1

INTRODUCTION

Section I. General Information

1-1. SCOPE. This technical manual contains instruction for

operation and operator-performed maintenance of the all-wheel

drive (8 x 8) Logistic Vehicle System (LVS) series. The LVS

series consists of four different models. They are as follows: the

MK48/14/MK48A1/14A1 Container Hauler, the MK48/15/

MK48A1/15A1 Wrecker/Recovery, the MK48/16/MK48A1/16A1

Fifth Wheel and the MK48/17/MK48A1/17A1 Dropside Cargo

with crane. All models are built on the same chassis, but are

specially equipped to perform different missions. Your manual

also includes operator instructions for special purpose kits that may

be installed on your vehicle.

1-2. MAINTENANCE FORMS AND RECORDS.

Instructions contained in TM 4700-15/1 (Equipment Record

Procedures) will be used for preparation, use and disposition of

required forms and records associated with operation and

maintenance of Marine Corps equipment.

1-3. REPORT OF MAINTENANCE AND

UNSATISFACTORY EQUIPMENT (QDR's). Report of

Maintenance and unsatisfactory equipment shall be reported on

standard form SF 368 in accordance with MCO 4855.10. Submit

to:

Commanding General

Marine Corps Logistics Base

Code 856

Albany, GA 317045000

1-4. WARRANTY INFORMATION. The LVS Series

vehicles are warranted for 15 months or 15,000 miles (24135 km),

whichever comes first. The warranty starts on the date found in

block 23, DA Form 2408-9, in the logbook. Report all defects in

TM 08780B-10

1-2

material or workmanship to your NCOIC who will take

appropriate action through your Organizational Maintenance Shop.

1-5. REFERENCE INFORMATION. This includes the

nomenclature cross reference list, a list of abbreviations and an

explanation of terms (glossary) used in this manual.

a. Nomenclature Cross Reference List

NAME OFFICIAL NOMENCLATURE

Engine Coolant Antifreeze, ethlyene glycol mixture

Cold Start System Ether quick-start system

Jacobs Brake Engine retarder

Glad Hand Quick disconnect coupling

b. Abbreviations

BII Basic Issue Items

C Celsius

CID Cubic Inch Displacement

cm centimeters

F Fahrenheit

ft foot

GCWR Gross Combination Weight Rating

GPM Gallons Per Minute

GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating -

HMMWV High Mobility Multi-Purpose Wheeled

Vehicle

hp horsepower

ISO/ANSI International Standards Organization/

American National Standards Institute

kg kilogram

km kilometers

kPa kilopascals

kph kilometer per hour

L liter

LVS Logistic Vehicle System

m meter

MHC Material Handling Crane

TM 08780B-10

1-3

mt milliton

MTVR Medium Tactical Vehicle Replacement

mm millimeter

MPH Miles Per Hour

N•m Newton meter

PMCS Preventive Maintenance Checks and

Services

psi pounds per square inch

QDR Quality Deficiency Report

rpm revolutions per minute

STE/ICE Simplified Test Equipment for Internal

Combustion Engines

VDC Volts Direct Current

Section II. Equipment Description

1-6. GENERAL DESCRIPTION. The Logistic Vehicle

System (LVS) series trucks are tactical vehicles designed for on

and off road use. The series consists of four vehicles, each of

which has a front power unit (MK48) and a rear trailer. Below is a

general description of the power unit and each trailer.

• The MK48/MK48A1 Front Power Unit, 4 X 4 contains the

entire power train components and is the primary source of

power for the four trailers.

• The MK14/MK14A1 Trailer, Container Hauler, is a flat

bed 4 X 4 powered trailer used for carrying standardized

cargo containers.

• The MK15/MK15A1 Trailer is a Wrecker/Recovery 4 X 4,

powered, fully equipped wrecker for recovery of disabled

vehicles and material handling.

• The MK16/MK16A1 Trailer, Fifth Wheel, Semi-trailer

Adapter, is a 4 X 4, powered, Fifth Wheel unit for transport

of semi-trailers and towed-type military trailers.

TM 08780B-10

1-4

• The MK17/MK17A1 Trailer, Dropside Cargo W/Crane, is

a 4 X4, powered, flat bed trailer with crane for hauling

palletized cargo.

The complete vehicle consists of the Front Power Unit

(MK48/MK48A1) coupled to any one of the four trailers

(MK14/MK14A1, MK15/MK15A1, MK16/MK16A1 and

MK17/MK17A1). When coupled, the complete unit is an 8 X 8

powered drive vehicle.

1-7. MK48/48A1/14/14A1 CONTAINER HAULER

VEHICLE

a. Purpose. The MK48/48A1/14/14A1 Container

Hauler's primary mission is to transport ISO/ANSI (International

Standards Organizational/American National Standards Institute)

containers, standardized cargo, shelters and functional modules

from beach sites to unit supply points.

b. Capabilities. The MK48/48A1/14/14A1 is capable

of:

(1) Operating in temperatures from -25° F to

+125° F (-32° C to +52° C).

(2) Fording water up to 60 inches (152.4 cm)

deep.

(3) Climbing and descending 60% grades with a

gross vehicle weight of 64,000 pounds (29,056 kg).

(4) Operating on 30% side slopes and parking

on 20% grades.

(5) Articulation and roll between front power

unit and trailer, enabling vehicle to maintain ground contact with

all eight wheels even on rough terrain.

TM 08780B-10

1-5

MK48/14

(6) Pulling an additional MK14/14A1,

MK15/15A1, MK16/16A1, or MK17/17A1, using a rear body tow

unit.

(7) Operating for maximum range of 300 miles

(482.7 km). This depends on vehicle load, type of terrain, idling

time and fuel quantity.

(8) Being airlifted by CH53E helicopter, or

transported by C-141 or C-5A type aircraft with minimal

preparation.

(9) Being transported by highway, rail, or sea.

The MK48/48A1 and the MK14/14A1 can be separated into two

units, for ease of handling.

(10) Turning within a radius of 38.5 feet (11.7 m).

(11) Carrying a payload of 12.5 tons (11.337 mt)

off road and 22.5 tons (20,407 kg) on road.

c. Features

(1) The MK48/48A1 Front Power Unit can

separate from the MK14/14A1 trailer or couple with any of the

other three trailers (MK15/15A1, MK16/16A1, or MK17/17A1).

TM 08780B-10

1-6

(2) Incorporated within the MK48/48A1

electrical system is a test connector that allows use of test

(STE/ICE) equipment. This helps maintenance personnel find

problems within the engine, electrical system, or hydraulic system.

(3) The MK48/48A1 has a hand priming pump

that allows repriming of the fuel system after it has run dry.

(4) The MK48/48A1 Front Power Unit has the

ability to turn while the trailer remains still, through the use of two

yaw steering cylinders.

(5) The MK48/48A1/14/14A1 has a steel, 20

foot (6.1 m) bed with standard ANSI/ISO container locks and

fittings.

1-8. MK48/48A1/15/15A1 WRECKER/RECOVERY

VEHICLE

a. Purpose. The MK48/48A1/15/15A1 Wrecker

Recovery Vehicle is primarily used for recovery of all LVS

vehicles. It is also capable of lifting and towing the following

vehicles: M809, M929, MTRV, M35, M36, M49, M50, and

HMMWV.

Lifting of the vehicles is accomplished by an A-Frame attached to

the rear of the vehicle. A heavy duty rear winch enables the

wrecker to free mired vehicles. The wrecker is equipped with a

Material Handling Crane (MHC), used for removing power packs,

loading equipment and standardized containers. An auxiliary

hydraulic circuit on the vehicle provides power for tools and can

also be used to supply another trailer (MK15/15A1, MK16/16A1,

or MK17/17A1) with hydraulics.


of:


+125° F (-32° C to +52° C).

TM 08780B-10

1-7


deep.



MK48/15


on 20% grades.


unit and trailer, enabling the vehicle to maintain ground contact

with all eight wheels even on rough terrain.

(6) Pulling and additional MK14/14A1,


unit.




(8) Turning within a radius of 38.5 feet

(11.7 m).

(9) Carrying a payload of 10 tons (9.07 mt).

TM 08780B-10

1-8

(10) Raising and towing an LVS vehicle or an

MTVR.

(11) Lifting 9,000 pounds (4,086 kg) with the

crane fully extended 15 feet (4.6 m).


crane extended 15 feet (4.6 m) (LVSA1 series vehicles only).

(13) Pulling 60,000 pounds (27,240 kg) with its

rear winch.

c. Features



(STE/ICE) equipment.


that allows repriming of fuel system after it has run dry.

(3) The MK48/48A1 has the ability to turn the

front power unit while the trailer remains still, through the use of

two yaw steering cylinders.

(4) The MK48/48A1/15/15A1 has a 7 foot (2.13

m) cargo bed with standard ISO/ANSI container lock fittings and

front and rear stowage areas.

(5) The MK48/48A1/15/15A1 has a remote

control unit that allows operation of the crane, A-Frame and winch

from a distance.

(6) The MK48/48A1/15/15A1 has an auxiliary

hydraulic circuit with 50 feet (15.25 m) of hose, on a reel, for

operation of power tools and for supply of hydraulics on other

trailers.

TM 08780B-10

1-9

1-9. MK48/48A1/16/16A1 FIFTH WHEEL SEMI-

TRAILER ADAPTER VEHICLE

a. Purpose. The MK48/48A1/16/16A1 Fifth Wheel is

used to transport semi-trailers with 3.5 (8.89 cm) diameter

kingpins. Its primary mission is to transport the M870A1,

M870A2, and M870A2E1 trailers. It can also transport towed type

full trailers like the M105 and M353. The winch may also be used

for recovery of other vehicles.

MK48/16

b. Capabilities. The MK4848A1/16/16A1 is capable

of:


+125° F (-32° C +15° C).


deep.

(3) Climbing and descending 60% grades.


on 20% grades.

(5) Articulation and roll between the front

power unit and its trailer, enabling the vehicle to maintain ground

contact with all eight wheels even on rough terrain.

TM 08780B-10

1-10



unit.

(7) Operating for a maximum range of 300

miles (482.7 km). This depends on vehicle load, type of terrain,

idling time and fuel quantity.

(8) Being airlifted by CH53E helicopter, or

transported by C-141 or C-5A type aircraft with minimal

preparation.

(9) Being transported by highway, rail, or sea.

The MK48/48A1 and MK16/16A1 can be separated into two units,

for ease of handling.

(10) Turning within a radius of 32.5 feet (9.9 m).

(11) Loading 46,000 pounds (20,884 kg) on the

fifth wheel.

(12) Pulling 60,000 pounds (27,240 kg) with its

winch.

c. Features

(1) The MK48/48A1 front power unit can

separate from the MK16/16A1 trailer or couple with any of the

other three trailers (MK14/14A1, MK15/15A1, or MK17/17A1).



(STE/ICE) equipment. This helps maintenance personnel find

problems within the engine, electrical system, or hydraulic system.


that allows repriming of the fuel system after it has run dry.

TM 08780B-10

1-11


ability to turn while the trailer remains still, though the use of two



control unit for the operation of the winch.

(6) The MK48/48A1/16/16A1 has a fully

oscillating fifth wheel that can be adjusted for on and off road use.

1-10. MK48/48A1/17/17A1 DROP SIDE CARGO W/CRANE

VEHICLE

a. Purpose. The MK48/48A1/17/17A1 Drop Side

Cargo W/Crane is used to transport palletized cargo and ISO/ANSI

(International Standards Organization/American National

Standards Institute) containers. The side panels of the cargo bed

can be dropped down or removed to ease ON and OFF loading.

The side panels also provide seating for troops. A Material

Handling Crane (MHC) at the rear of the vehicle is used to load

and unload equipment and cargo. The MK48/48A1/17/17A1 is

also intended to tow and position the M198 howitzer.

MK48/17

TM 08780B-10

1-12


of:


+125° F (-32° Cto +52° C).


deep.




on 20% grades.


and trailer, enabling the vehicle to maintain ground contact with all

eight wheels even on rough terrain.


MK15/15A1, MK16/16A1, or MK17/17A1 using a rear body tow

unit.




(8) Turning within a radius of 38.5 feet (11.7

m).

(9) Carrying a payload of 10 tons (9.07 mt) off

road and 20 tons (20.14 mt) on road.


crane fully extended 15 feet (4.6 m).

(11) Lifting 9,000 pounds (4,086 kg) with the crane

extended 15 feet (4.6 m) (LVSA1 series vehicles only).

TM 08780B-10

1-13

c. Features

(1) The MK48/48A1 front power unit can

separate from the MK17/17A1 trailer and couple with any of the

other three trailers (MK14/14A1, MK15/15A1 and MK16/16A1).

(2) Incorporated with the MK48/48A1 electrical

system is a test connector that allows use of test (STE/ICE)

equipment.


that allows the fuel system to be reprimed after it has run dry.


ability to turn while the trailer remains still, through the use of two



control unit that allows operation of the crane from a distance.

(6) The MK48/48A1/17/17A1 has dropside

cargo panels that ease loading and unloading and provide seating

for troops.

(7) The MK48/48A1/17/17A1 has a 16 foot

(4.88 m) cargo bed with standard ISO/ANSI container lock

fittings.

TM 08780B-10

1-14

1-11. DIFFERENCES BETWEEN MODELS. The major

equipment and functional differences between models are given in

Table 1-1. For components of the end item and basic issue items

(1311), refer to Appendix B.

Table 1-1. Differences Between Models

Equipment/

Function

MK48/

48A1/

14/14A1

MK48/

48A1/

15/15A1

MK48/

48A1/

16/16A1

MK48/

48A1/

17/17A1

Description or

Operational

Paragraph

Material handling

crane (MHC)

X X 2-16/2-25

Material handling

crane (MHC)

(LVSA1 Series

Vehicles Only)

X X 2-17/2-26

Heavy duty winch X X 2-20/2-24

Fifth wheel X 2-23

Remote controls X X X 2-16/2-21/2-25

Remote

controls(MK15A1

and MK17A1

only)

X X 2-17/2-26

ISO/ANSI

container

X X X 2-29

Rear landing leg X 2-15

Cargo body

dropside panels

X 2-27

Fold-down troop

seats

X 2-27

Cargo bed size:

238 inch

(604.5 cm)

120 inch

(304.8 cm)

190 inch

(482.6 cm)

X

X

X

2-29

2-29

2-29

Cargo cover X 2-28

Extended Pintle X 2-33

Auxiliary

Hydraulics

X 2-21/2-22

TM 08780B-10

1-15

1-12. EQUIPMENT DATA. Tables 1-2 through 1-13 list data

and specifications for all LVS models.

Table 1-2. Performance Data UNIT CAPABILITIES

ALL

ALL FORDING UP

TO 60"

ALL 45°

APPROACH

ANGLE

MK48/

48A1/

14/14A1

45°

DEPARTURE

ANGLE

MK48/

48A1/

15/15A1

48°

DEPARTURE

ANGLE

MK48/

48A1/

16/16A1

48°

DEPARTURE

ANGLE

MK48/

48A1/

17/17A1

40°

DEPARTURE

ANGLE

TM 08780B-10

1-16

Table 1-3. Vehicle Dimensions

UNIT LENGTH HEIGHT

Inches cm Inches cm

MK48

MK48A1

238.5

238.3

605.7

605.7

102

102.3

259

259

MK14

MK14A1

240

240

609.6

609.6

61

61.2

154.9

154.9

MK15

MK15A1

240

240

609.6

609.6

94

100.9

243.8

256.3

MK16

MK16A1

198

198

503

503

87

87

220.9

220.9

MK17

MK17A1

240

243.4

609.6

618.2

96

96.8

256

256

MK48/14

MK48/14A1

456

456

1158.2

1158.2

102

102.3

259

259

MK48/15

MK48/15A1

444

444.5

1127.8

1127.8

102

102.3

259

259

MK48/16

MK48/16A1

398

398.2

1010.9

1010.9

102

102.3

259

259

MK48/17

MK48/17A1

456

459.6

1158.2

1158.2

102

102.3

259

259

Width (All Units) .............................................96 Inches (243.8 cm)

Ground Clearance (All Units) ............................23 Inches (58.4 cm)

Table 1-4. Chassis Dimensions

UNIT

WHEELBASE

ANGLE OF

APPROACH

ANGLE OF

DEPARTURE

TURNING

RADIUS

MK14

MK14A1

259 Inches

(657.9 cm)

45° 46° 38.5 feet

(11.7 m)

MK15

MK15A1

259 Inches

(657.9 cm)

45° 48° 38.5 feet

(11.7 m)

MK16

MK16A1

229 Inches

(581.7 cm)

45° 67° 32.5 feet

(9.9 m)

MK17

MK17A1

259 Inches

(657.9 cm)

45° 40° 38.5 feet

(11.7 m)

TM 08780B-10

1-17

Table 1-5. Curb Weight

UNIT WEIGHT

MK48

MK48A1 25,300 lbs d(11,486.2 kg)

MK14

MK14A1 16,000 lbs (7,264.0 kg)

MK15

MK15A1 28,200 lbs (12, 791.3 kg)

MK16

MK16A1 16,200 lbs (7,354.8 kg)

MK17

MK17A1 22,360 lbs (10,142.3 kg)

MK48/14

MK48/14A1 41,300 lbs (18,750.2 kg)

MK48/15

MK48/15A1 53,500 lbs (24,267.2 kg)

MK48/16

MK48/16A1 41,500 lbs (18,841.0 kg)

MK48/17

MK48/17A1 47,660 lbs (21,618.2 kg)

Table 1-6. Maximum Payload

UNIT ON ROAD OFF ROAD

MK48/14

M K48/14A1 45,000 lbs (20,430 kg) 125,000 lbs (11,350 kg)

MK48/15

MK48/15A1 20,000 lbs ( 9,080 kg) 20,000 lbs ( 9,080 kg)

MK48/16

MK48/16A1 46,000 lbs (20,884 kg)

MK48/17

MK48/17A1 39,000 lbs (04,706 kg) 20,000 lbs ( 9,080 kg)

TM 08780B-10

1-18

Table 1-7. Shipping Dimensions

UNIT SHIPPING CUBAGE SHIPPING

TONNAGE

Cubic

Feet

Cubic

Meters

Tons Metric

Tons

MK48

MK48A1

1352

1355

53.6

53.6

12.5

12.5

11.3

11.3

MK14

MK14A1

813

816

18.6

18.6

8.0

8.0

7.2

7.2

MK15

MK15A1

1190

1280

35.8

35.8

13.0

13.0

11.7

11.7

MK16

MK16A1

943

934

26.4

26.4

8.0

8.0

7.2

7.2

MK17

MK17A1

1253

1363

35.8

35.8

11.0

11.0

9.9

9.9

MK48/14

MK48/14A1

2584

2593

72.3

72.3

20.5

20.5

18.5

18.5

MK48/15

MK48/15A1

2516

2528

72.3

72.3

25.5

25.5

23.1

23.1

MK48/16

MK48/16A1

2255

2265

63.0

63.0

20.5

20.5

18.5

18.5

MK48/17

MK48/17A1

2584

2614

72.4

72.4

23.5

23.5

21.3

21.3

TM 08780B-10

1-19

Table 1-8. Capacities

VEHICLE DESCRIPTION CAPACITY

Standard Metric

All Cooling System 27 gallons 102.6 liters

All Engine (Crankcase Only) 22 quarts 21 liters

All Engine (Crankcase with Filter) 24 quarts 23 liters

All Fuel Tank (Each Tank) 75 gallons 284 liters

All Hydraulic System 95 quarts 90 liters

All Nose Box 7 pints 3.3 liters

All No. 1 Axle 33 pints 15.6 liters

All No. 2 and 4 Axles 33 pints 15.6 liters

All No. 3 Axle 40 pints 19 liters

All Transmission 36 quarts 34 liters

All Transfer Case 10 quarts 9.5 liters

MK48/15 Winch Gear Case 13 quarts 12.3 liters

MK48/16 Winch Gear Case 13 quarts 12.3 liters

All Windshield Washer 4 quarts 3.78 liters

TM 08780B-10

1-20

Table 1-9. Specifications

MK48/48A1 Front Power Unit

Engine

Make .......................................................... Detroit Diesel 8V92TA

Type ......................... Diesel, Turbocharged, Blown, Liquid cooled

Brake Horsepower ............................ 445 Horsepower at 2100 rpm

Idle Speed (engine rpm) .............................................. 690-700 rpm

Oil Pressure ............................................... 5 psi (34.4 k Pa) at idle,

....................................................... 70 psi (482.6 k Pa) at 2,100 rpm

Water Temperature ..................... 160°F to 230°F (71°C to 110°C)

Governed Speed ............................................................... 2100 rpm

Maximum Horsepower (at 2,100 rpm) ...... 445 Brake Horsepower

Electrical System

Type ...................................................... 24 Volts Negative Ground

Battery Make .................................................................... Prestolite

Battery Model ...................................................... ................... 31CS

*Battery make ...................................................... .................. Exide

*Battery Model ......................................................................... 6TL

Starter Make ................................................................ Delco Remy

Starter Model ..................................................................... 1990272

Alternator Make ........................................................ Leece Neville

Alternator Model ................................................................. 2428JC

Alternator Type .......................... Direct Drive W/Integral Regulator

Cooling System

Radiator ........................................................................ Heavy Duty

Make ............................................................ General Radiator, Inc.

*Make .............................................................. G&O Radiator, Inc.

*LVSA1 Series Vehicles Only

TM 08780B-10

1-21

Table 1-9. Specifications (Continued)


Fuel System

Fuel Tanks ..................................................... Two (One Each Side)

Capacity ......................................................................... 75 Gallons

Air Cleaner

Make ......................................................................................... Farr

Model ..................................................................................... T-528

Type ............................................................................... Two Stage

Transmission

Make ............................................................ Detroit Diesel Allison

Model ............................................................................... HT 740D

Type .................................................................. 4-Speed Automatic

Oil Temperature ......................... 160°F to 220°F (71 °C to 104°C)

Transfer Case

Make ................................................... Oshkosh Truck Corporation

Model ................................................................................... DA100

Type ................................................................................... 2-Speed

Location ........................................................ Behind Transmission

Axles

No. 1

Make .......................................................................... Eaton

Model ................................................................... DS-381 P

Type ........................................... Single Reduction Tandem

TM 08780B-10

1-22



No. 2

Make .......................................................................... Eaton

Model ...................................................................... RS-381


Shock Absorbers

Make .................................................................................... Gabriel

Type ............................................................................. Heavy Duty

Quantity .................................................................................... Four

Wheels and Tires

Wheel Type .............................................................................. Disc

Wheel Size ............................................. 21 x 10 (53.34 x 25.4 cm)

Tire Size ................................................................................ 16R21

Brakes

No. 1 Axle

Make .................................................................... Rockwell

Type ......................................................................... Wedge

No. 2 Axle

Make .......................................................................... Eaton

Type ......................................................................... S-Cam

ABS ............................................................................. 2S/2M

TM 08780B-10

1-23


MK14/14A1 Container Hauler Trailer

Axles

No. 3

Make .......................................................................... Eaton

Model .................................................................... DS-580P


No. 4

Make .......................................................................... Eaton

Model ...................................................................... RS-580


Wheels and Tires

Wheel Type .............................................................................. Disc

Wheel Size ............................................. 21 x 10 (53.34 x 25.4 cm)

Tire Size ................................................................................ 16R21

Brakes

No. 3 and 4 Axles

Make .......................................................................... Eaton

Type ......................................................................... S-Cam

ABS ............................................................................. 2S/2M

TM 08780B-10

1-24


MK15/15A1 Wrecker/Recovery Trailer

Axles

No. 3

Make .......................................................................... Eaton

Model .................................................................... DS-580P


No. 4

Make .......................................................................... Eaton

Model ...................................................................... RS-580


Wheels and Tires

Wheel Type ................................................. ............................. Disc

Wheel Size ................................ ............. 21 x 10 (53.34 x 25.4 cm)

Tire Size .................................................... ............................ 16R21

Brakes

No. 3 and No. 4 Axles

Make .......................................................................... Eaton

Type ......................................................................... S-Cam

ABS (Axle No. 4 only) ............................................... 2S/2M

Body Equipment

Crane

Make ......................................................................... Wajax

Type ................................................. Hydraulic/Articulated

Rating ..................... 9,000 Lbs (4,086 Kg) At 15 Ft. (4.6m)

TM 08780B-10

1-25


MK15/15A1 Wrecker/Recovery Trailer

Crane (LVSA1 Series Vehicles Only)

Make .......................................................................... Grove

Type ................................................... Hydraulic/Telescopic


Winch

Make ...................................................................... DP Mfg.

Type ................................................. Two-Speed Hydraulic

Rating ............................................ 60,000 Lbs (27,240 Kg)

A-Frame

Make ......................................................................... Wajax

Type ..................................................................... Hydraulic

Rating ............................................ 32,000 Lbs (14,528 Kg)

A-Frame (LVSA1 Series Vehicles Only)

Make .......................................................................... Grove

Type ..................................................................... Hydraulic

Rating ........... .................................. 32,000 Lbs (14,528 Kg)

TM 08780B-10

1-26


MK16/16A1 Fifth Wheel Semi-Trailer Adapter

Axles

No. 3

Make.....................................................……………... Eaton

Model..................................................…………... DS-580P

Type ...................................……. Single Reduction Tandem

No. 4

Make .......................................................................... Eaton

Model ...................................................................... RS-580


Wheels and Tires

Wheel Type .............................................................................. Disc

Wheel Size ............................................. 21 x 10 (53.34 x 25.4 cm)

Tire Size ................................................................................ 16R21

Brakes

No. 3 and 4 Axles

Make .......................................................................... Eaton

Type ......................................................................... S-Cam


Fifth Wheel

Make ................................................................................... Holland

Model ....................................................................... FW-2080-0-15

Type .................................................................. Four-Way Pivoting

Size .................................................................... 36 Inch (91.44 cm)

Kingpin Size ....................................................... 3.5 Inch (8.89 cm)

TM 08780B-10

1-27


MK16/16A1 Fifth Wheel Semi-Trailer Adapter

Body Equipment

Winch

Make ...................................................................... DP Mfg.

Type ................................................. Two-Speed Hydraulic

Rating ............................................ 60,000 Lbs (27,280 Kg)

TM 08780B-10

1-28


MK17/17A1 Dropside Cargo W/Crane Trailer

Axles

No. 3

Make .......................................................................... Eaton

Model .................................................................... DS-580P


No. 4

Make .......................................................................... Eaton

Model ...................................................................... RS-580


Wheels and Tires

Wheel Type .............................................................................. Disc

Wheel Size ............................................. 21 x 10 (53.34 x 25.4 cm)

Tire Size ................................................................................ 16R21

Brakes

No. 3 and No. 4 Axles

Make .......................................................................... Eaton

Type ......................................................................... S-Cam


Body Equipment

Crane

Make ......................................................................... Wajax

Type ................................................. Hydraulic/Articulated


TM 08780B-10

1-29


MK17/17A1 Dropside Cargo W/Crane Trailer

Axles

Crane (LVSA1 Series Vehicles Only)

Make .......................................................................... Grove

Type .................................................. Hydraulic/Telescopic


Section III. Technical Principles of Operation

1-13. INTRODUCTION. All LVS vehicles include five

functional systems. They are the air system, electrical system,

hydraulic system, steering system and drive line system. This

section explains the overall operation of these systems.

1 -14. AIR SYSTEM. The air system has two purposes. The

first is to operate the vehicle's service and parking brakes and the

second is to power the air operated accessories. The system is

divided into two sections-the front cab section and the rear trailer

section. Air pressure in both sections is indicated by a pressure

gauge in the cab.

The air system consists mainly of-an engine-driven compressor

and five air stowage reservoirs. These components, in conjunction

with the necessary valves, hoses and fittings, supply regulated air

to the brakes and other air operated devices on the vehicle.

By automatically turning the compressor on or-off, an air governor

keeps pressure in the system at approximately 120 psi (827.4 kPa)

for non-ABS systems and 130PSI (896.35 kPa) for ABS equipped

vehicles. Regulated air then goes through a safety valve and an air

dryer into a small front reservoir. Pressure builds within the front

reservoir until adequate for safe operation of the brakes. A

pressure regulator in the system opens, once this level is achieved,

allowing pressurization of the six large tanks that remain. All air

TM 08780B-10

1-30

operated systems run off the six large reservoirs, unless pressure

drops to approximately 60 psi (413.7 kPa) when the brake system

takes priority, excluding other systems. A low air warning system,

consisting of a pressure switch, buzzer and warning light, sounds if

pressure drops below 60 psi (413.7 kPa). This informs the

operator that the brakes can no longer be safely operated.

1-15. ELECTRICAL SYSTEM. The electrical system operates

on 24 volts, negative ground. It is powered by four 12 volt

batteries connected in series-parallel circuit to produce 24 volts.

The electricity stored in the batteries is used to start the engine and

operate accessories. Once the engine is started, it drives an

alternator that produces electricity to both maintain battery voltage

and power electrical components on the vehicle.

The ignition switch has three positions (ON, OFF and START). In

the OFF position, electricity is confined to the lighting system. In

the START position, electricity is directed from the batteries

through a relay and a solenoid to the starter.

With the engine running and the ignition switch in the ON

position, the alternator generates between 27.8 and 28.2 volts of

electricity for charging the batteries and operating accessories. A

voltage regulator adjusts alternator output, making sure voltage in

the system is maintained at 24 volts.

TM 08780B-10

1-31

The system is protected against overload by automatic-reset type

circuit breakers. A diagnostic connector assembly is also

incorporated within the system to help Organizational Maintenance

diagnose problems that may develop.

1-16. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM. The hydraulic system consists of

an engine-driven tandem pump, an oil reservoir, a power steering

gear, two yaw cylinders, a radiator fan motor and controlling

valves.

The reservoir holds the hydraulic oil that supplies the system. The

pump draws oil from the reservoir to provide hydraulic pressure

for operation of front axle steering, yaw cylinder steering, the

auxiliary equipment and the fan motor. The various valves within

the system control hydraulic pressure, flow and direction for the

operation of the fan motor, steering system, or auxiliary hydraulics.

The fan motor provides cooling of engine, transmission and

hydraulic oil. A hydraulic selector valve mounted on the right

fender of the front power unit is a two position (Push/Pull) valve

used by the operator to determine whether oil flow goes to

STEERING or AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS. With the selector

valve in the STEERING position, the No. 1 axle will turn and the

yaw cylinders are operational. The vehicle is driven with the

selector valve in this position. With the selector valve in the-

AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS position, the auxiliary equipment

(crane, winch, or power tools) receive hydraulic power. Steering

at the No. 1 axle will still work, but yaw steering is not possible.

TM 08780B-10

1-32

Without yaw steering, the vehicle's ability to turn is seriously

reduced. For this reason, the vehicle must never be driven with the

selector valve in the AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS position.

1-17. STEERING SYSTEM. When the hydraulic selector valve

is in the STEERING position, steering is accomplished through the

use of two sub-systems – yaw steering and hydraulic power-assist

steering. These systems work together to make the vehicle highly

maneuverable.

The yaw steering system is responsible for turning the front power

unit at the articulation joint. This is accomplished through the use

of two double-acting, hydraulic yaw cylinders that connect to the

front and rear bodies on each side of the articulation joint. As one

cylinder contracts, the other extends. The front power unit is then

forced to turn, whether the vehicle is rolling or not. This reduces

turning radius and allows the vehicle to navigate among obstacles

that are relatively close together.

The yaw steering system coordinates with the hydraulic, power-

assist steering wheel, the No 1 axle and the yaw steering work

together to turn the vehicle. This system maintains proper

alignment between the front and rear sections through the full

range of steering.

TM 08780B-10

1-33

NOTE

The yaw steering system will not operate with the parking brakes

applied and the transmission in neutral. If the yaw steering

system operates in this condition, notify Organizational

Maintenance.

1-18. DRIVE LINE SYSTEM. Power for the LVS vehicle

comes from a diesel engine housed in the center of the front power

unit. The power goes to an automatic transmission attached to the

back of the engine. A short propeller shaft delivers power from the

transmission to the transfer case. The transfer case then sends the

power to both the No. 1 axle of the power unit and the No. 3 axle

of the rear trailer.

A nose box mounted on the No. 1 axle receives power from the

transfer case and delivers it to the No. 1 axle. The No. 1 axle has

an inter-axle differential that sends power through a propeller shaft

to the No. 2 axle. In this way, all four wheels of the power unit are

driven.

The No. 3 axle of the trailer receives power from the transfer case

through a series of propeller shafts and universal joints. The No. 3

axle has an inter-axle differential that sends power through a

propeller shaft to the No. 4 axle. In this manner, all four wheels of

the trailer receive power.

TM 08780B-10

1-34

By using the Drive Line Lockup switch in the front power unit, the

operator can control parts of the drive line. On dry pavement, the

Drive Line Lockup is left in the UNLOCK position. This allows

the drive line to operate in a way similar to that of an ordinary

automobile. If traction is good, all drive wheels pull.

If wheel slippage is expected, either the AXLE-LOCKUP or the

XFR CASE LOCKUP position may be used.

In the AXLE-LOCKUP position, the inter-axle differentials lock

together axles No. 1 and No. 2 and axles No. 3 and 4. The

controlled traction differentials then lock together the wheels on

each axle. Unless the difference in torque between the wheels goes

beyond certain limits, they will turn at the same speed.

In the XFR CASE LOCKUP position, the transfer case differential

is locked. This provides power equally between the front power

unit and the trailer. If one section of the vehicle loses traction, the

other section will continue to pull.

TM 08780B-10

2-1

CHAPTER 2

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

Section I. Description and Use of Operator's

Controls, Indicators and Features

2-1. MK48 FRONT POWER UNIT

a. Instrument Panel

Key Item and Function

(1) LEFT TURN INDICATOR. Flashes green

when left turn signal is on.

(2) SPEEDOMETER/ODOMETER. Shows

vehicle's speed and total miles traveled in MPH and KM/h.

(3) HIGH BEAM INDICATOR. Lights red

when vehicle headlights are on high beam.

(4) TRAILER AIR SUPPLY VALVE.

Supplies air to additional trailers being towed behind the

MK14/14A1, MK15/15A1, MK16/16A1, or MK17/17A1. PUSH

to charge brakes-PULL to release.

(5) PARKING BRAKE VALVE. Applies and

releases vehicle parking brake. PULL to apply-PUSH to release.

TM 08780B-10

2-2

(6) TACHOMETER/HOURMETER. Shows

engine operating speed (RPM) and total operating time in hours.

Includes red tipped pointers to show best RPM operating range.

(7) RIGHT TURN INDICATOR. Flashes green

when right turn signal is on.

(8) FUEL GAUGE. Shows amount of fuel in

fuel tanks.

(9) OIL PRESS GAUGE. Shows engine oil

pressure.

(10) LOW OIL/WATER INDICATOR LIGHT.

Lights red when engine oil pressure is too low or when engine

coolant temperature is too high. A buzzer will sound when the

light is on for either oil pressure or coolant temperature.

(11) BUZZER. Sounds when hydraulic oil level

is low.

TM 08780B-10

2-3

(12) AIR FILTER RESTRICTION

INDICATOR. Shows condition of air filter. Yellow indicates

clean. Red indicates filter requires service.

(13) HYDRAULIC LOW OIL INDICATOR.

Lights red if level in hydraulic reservoir is low.

(14) DRIVE LINE LOCKUP INDICATORS.

Lights green when drive line lockup control is in AXLE LOCKUP

position or TRANSFER CASE LOCKUP POSITION.

(15) DRIVE LINE LOCKUP CONTROL

LEVER. Three position lever-center is UNLOCK, left is AXLE

LOCKUP and right is TRANSFER CASE LOCKUP.

(16) COLD WEATHER START BUTTON.

Injects ether into engine for cold weather starting.

(17) ENGINE STOP SWITCH. Used to stop

engine. Returns to position when released.

TM 08780B-10

2-4

(18) ENGINE START SWITCH. Three

position-OFF, ON and START. When switch is released after

engine starts, it will return to ON position.

(19) LOW AIR INDICATOR. Lights red when

air pressure drops below 60 psi (413.7 kPa). A buzzer sounds

when light is lit.

(20) AIR PRESSURE GAUGE. Shows air

pressure in both sections of air brake system. Green shows front

section. Red shows rear section.

(21) WATER TEMP GAUGE. Shows engine

coolant temperature.

(22) BATTERY GAUGE. Shows battery

voltage.

(23) TRANS TEMP GAUGE. Shows

transmission fluid temperature.

(24) HYDRAULIC OIL TEMPERATURE

GAUGE. Indicates hydraulic oil temperature within reservoir.

b. Driver's Side Panel


(25) TRAILER HANDBRAKE CONTROL.

Applies brakes on additional trailers being towed behind the

MK14/14A1, MK15/15A1, MK16/16A1, or MK17/17A1. This is

separate from LVS service brakes.

(26) JACOBS ENGINE BRAKE ON/OFF

SWITCH. Supplies or shuts off electrical power to Jacobs engine

brake.

(27) JACOBS ENGINE BRAKE INDICATOR.

Lights green when Jacobs engine brake is on.

TM 08780B-10

2-5

(28) JACOBS ENGINE BRAKE HIGH/LOW

SWITCH. Selects amount of engine braking action. HIGH

provides maximum braking. LOW position provides lesser

amount of engine braking.

(29) BEACON LIGHT SWITCH. Two position

ON/OFF switch controls amber strobe light, located on top of cab.

(30) WORK LIGHT SWITCH. Two position

ON/OFF switch controls exterior work lights.

(31) DOME LIGHT SWITCH. Two position

ON/OFF switch controls dome light.

(32) CLEARANCE LIGHT SWITCH. Two

position ON/OFF switch controls clearance lights.

TM 08780B-10

2-6

(33) DEFROST CONTROL. Controls amount of

heated air directed at windshield. PULL to increase-PUSH to

decrease.

TM 08780B-10

2-7

(34) FAN SWITCH. Three position switch

controls fan speed-HI, LOW and OFF.

(35) HEAT CONTROL. Controls amount of

heated air entering cab. PULL to increase-PUSH to decrease.

(36) MANUAL AND AUTOMATIC

DISENGAGE LIGHTS. MANUAL DISENGAGE LIGHT is on

when selector valve is in the AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS

position. AUTOMATIC DISENGAGE LIGHT is on when

transmission is in NEUTRAL and parking brakes are applied.

NOTE

For LVSA1 series vehicles only, the indicator will also light

orange when the articulation joint lockout strut is in place.

(37) LOCKOUT STRUT WARNING

INDICATOR. Lights orange when suspension lockout struts are in

place.

NOTE

Upon power up of ABS system, ABS warning lights should come

on for about two seconds, then turn off.

(37.1) ABS WARNING LIGHTS. Lights will

come on when there is a malfunction with the ABS system.

(38) TRANSFER CASE SHIFTER. Forward for

DIRECT (HIGH)-back for LOW.

(39) LIGHT CONTROL. Controls all electrical

power for lighting system.

(40) WASHER CONTROL. Controls spray of

cleaning fluid on windshield. Push for spray.

(41) RIGHT WIPER CONTROL. Controls

operation of right windshield wiper. PULL for ON-PUSH and

hold to shut wipers off. Turn control right to increase wiper speed.

TM 08780B-10

2-8

For LVSA1 series vehicles, turn clockwise to turn wiper ON. Turn

counterclockwise to turn wiper OFF.

(42) TRANSMISSION RANGE SELECTOR.

Used to select transmission driving range. Push button in to move

lever.

(42.1) EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUTDOWN

(LVSA1 SERIES VEHICLES ONLY). Used to stop engine

manually. Pull handle to stop engine.

(43) LEFT WIPER CONTROL. Controls

operation of left windshield wiper. PULL for ON-PUSH and hold

to shut wipers off. Turn control right to increase wiper speed. For

LVSA1 series vehicles, turn clockwise to turn wiper ON. Turn

counterclockwise to turn wiper OFF.

d. Steering Column


(48) EMERGENCY FLASHER CONTROL.

Controls 4-way flashers. Position turn signal lever (50) in RIGHT

turn position. Press hazard tab down and push turn signal lever

TM 08780B-10

2-9

(50) up as far as it will go. To shut flashers off, return signal lever

(50) to OFF position.

(48.1) EMERGENCY FLASHER CONTROL

(LVSA1 SERIES VEHICLES ONLY). Controls 4-way flashers.

Position turn signal lever (50.1) in RIGHT turn position. Pull

emergency flasher control (48.1) up and push signal lever (50.1) up

as far as it will go. To shut flashers off, return signal lever (50.1)

to OFF position.

(49) HORN BUTTON. Sounds electric horn

when pressed.

(50) TURN SIGNAL LEVER. Controls turn

signals for RIGHT, LEFT and OFF. Signal must be manually shut

off after turning.

TM 08780B-10

2-10

e. Floor Mounted Controls


(51) HEADLIGHT DIMMER SWITCH.

Controls LOW and HIGH beams of headlights.

(52) THROTTLE TREADLE. Increases or

decreases engine speed.

(53) SERVICE BRAKE TREADLE. Applies

service brakes.

(54) CAB DRAIN PLUG. Provides an opening

to drain cab. One under each seat. Turn T-handle LEFT to loosen-

RIGHT to tighten.

TM 08780B-10

2-11

f. Cab Mounted Hand Controls


(55) AIR HORN CHAIN. Controls air horn.

Pull to sound air horn.

(56) DOOR LATCH. PULL to open cab door.

(57) CAB DOOR HANDLE. PULL to close cab

door.

(58) WINDOW HAND CRANK. Raises or

lowers cab door window glass.

(58.1) RIFLE MOUNTING. Holds driver or

passenger rifle during vehicle operation.

(59) ROOF VENT. Allows fresh air to enter cab.

PUSH up on bar to open and PULL down to close.

TM 08780B-10

2-12

g. Operator and Crew Seat Controls

NOTE

Controls on driver's seat and passenger seats are identical.


DO NOT ADJUST SEAT WHILE VEHICLE IS MOVING.

THE SEAT SUSPENSION MECHANISM CAN CAUSE

SERIOUS INJURY TO PERSONNEL IF HANDS ARE

PLACED INTO IT DURING ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE.

(60) RIDE ADJUSTMENT CONTROL. Use to

adjust seat tension.

(61) SEAT BELT AND SHOULDER

HARNESS. Secures personnel in seat.

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-13

(62) HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT CONTROL. Use

to adjust seat height.

(63) FORWARD/BACKWARD ADJUSTMENT

CONTROL. Use to move seat forward or backward.

h. Vehicle Exterior


(64) ARTICULATION JOINT LOCKOUT

STRUT. Use to keep articulation joint straight when air lifting and

towing.

(65) FRONT GLAD HANDS. Allows towing

vehicle to supply air to reservoirs on towed vehicle for operation of

towed vehicle's brakes.

TM 08780B-10

2-14

(66) TOW BRACKETS. Used for towing the

vehicle.

(67) PEEP WINDOW. Provides ground vision

for driver when climbing or cresting hills.

(68) STEP. Allows access in or out of vehicle.

(69) DOOR LATCH. Pull to open cab door.

(70) GRAB HANDLES. Allow access into or

onto vehicle.

(71) LOCKOUT STRUT SENSOR. Electrical

switch that indicates suspension lockout struts are in position, one

on each side of unit. Turn LEFT to remove cap-RIGHT to install.

TM 08780B-10

2-15

(72) LOCKOUT STRUT. Locks out suspension

action of the front power unit. This stabilizes the front power unit

when uncoupled from the trailer. One on each side of power unit.

(72.1) ARTICULATION JOINT LOCKOUT

SENSOR (LVSA1 SERIES VEHICLES ONLY). Electrical switch

that indicates articulation joint lockout strut is in position. Turn

LEFT to remove cap-RIGHT to install.

(73) WORKLIGHT. Can be removed by

removing retaining pin. Operate by turning on switch inside cab

and switch on worklight.

TO PREVENT PARTS DAMAGE, DO NOT DROP ENGINE

COMPARTMENT DOOR TO CLOSE IT. LOWER IT AND

CAREFULLY SNAP IT CLOSED.

CAUTION

TM 08780B-10

2-16

(74) ENGINE COMPARTMENT DOOR

LATCH. Lift up and turn clockwise to open.

(75) PIONEER TOOL BRACKET. Used to

secure pioneer tools.

(76) RADIATOR CAP. Provides pressurization

of cooling system and covers filler opening. Turn LEFT to open –

RIGHT to close.

(MK48A1 SERIES VEHICLES ONLY)

(77) COOLANT SIGHT GLASS. Allow visual

inspection of radiator coolant level.

(78) FUEL TANK CAP. Turn LEFT to open-

RIGHT to close.

(79) ETHER QUICK START. Provides ether to

the engine for cold weather starting. Operated by a button inside

cab.

TM 08780B-10

2-17

(80) SLAVE PLUG. Used for jump starting the

vehicle. Slide cap off to connect slave cable.

BATTERY BOX COVER IS NOT HINGED. TO PREVENT

PARTS DAMAGE RAISE IT ONE INCH AND PULL

OUTWARD.

(81) BATTERY BOX LATCH. Lift rubber tee,

raise battery box cover one inch and pull outward.

NOTE

• When parking vehicle on a side slope, ensure that one of

the fuel tank shut-off valves is closed to prevent lower side

fuel tank from overfilling.

• When filling fuel tanks, ensure at least one of the fuel

tank shut-off valves is closed, to allow each fuel tank to be

filled separately.

(82) FUEL TANK SHUT-OFF VALVE. Allows

either left or right fuel tank to be shut off. Turn handle in line with

fuel line to open-turn 90° to close. Each fuel tank has its own

valve.

CAUTION

TM 08780B-10

2-18

(83) AIR RESERVOIR QUICK DISCONNECT.

Used for connection of air hose. Pull back on sleeve to connect or

release air hose.

(84) SPARE WHEEL AND TIRE. Provides

additional wheel and tire for the vehicle.

(85) TIRE HOIST ASSEMBLY. Used to raise

or lower spare tire from vehicle. Remove retaining pins to remove

hoist parts.

(86) HYDRAULIC QUICK DISCONNECTS.

Used when coupling or uncoupling the front power unit from its

trailer. Pull back on sleeve to connect or release hoses.

(87) ARTICULATION LOCKOUT STRUT

MOUNTS. Provide mounting for the articulation lockout strut.

(88) WHEEL CHOCK RACK. Used to store

wheel chocks.

TM 08780B-10

2-19

(89) TRANSMISSION DIPSTICK. Used to

check transmission fluid level. Turn T-handle LEFT to loosen-

RIGHT to tighten.

(90) HAND PRIMER PUMP. Used to manually

prime fuel system. PUSH in knob and turn LEFT to pump-PUSH

knob in to override spring, then turn RIGHT to lock.

(91) WATER/FUEL SEPARATOR. Traps

condensation in lower portion of separator. Drain condensation by

opening drain on bottom of bowl.

(92) STOWAGE BOX. Used to store extension

cord for worklight. Lift rubber tee to open compartment.

(93) TIRE HOIST BASE MOUNT. Provides a

base for assembling tire hoist.

TM 08780B-10

2-20

(94) SELECTOR VALVE. Two position valve.

PUSH in to shift to the STEERING position-PULL out to shift to

the AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS position.

(95) HYDRAULIC RESERVOIR FILLER CAP.

Provides a cover for the hydraulic reservoir filler opening. Turn

LEFT to remove-RIGHT to install.

(96) ENGINE OIL FILLER CAP. Provides an

opening to add engine oil. Turn T -handle LEFT to loosen-RIGHT

to tighten.

(97) HYDRAULIC RESERVOIR SIGHT

GLASS. Provides visual inspection of fluid level in reservoir.

Level is inspected with crane in the stowed position.

(98) ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK. Used to check

engine oil level. Turn T-handle LEFT to loosen-RIGHT to tighten.

TM 08780B-10

2-21

2-2. MK14/14A1 CONTAINER HAULER TRAILER

a. Cargo Bed


(1) ISO/ANSI FITTINGS. 12 fittings to add

additional locks for container.

(2) TIE DOWN SLOTS. 24 cargo tie downs

used for securing cargo.

(3) ISO/ANSI CONTAINER LOCK. Four

positive locking devices used to lock down containers on the cargo

bed.

(4) CONTAINER LOCK DOOR. Covers

ISO/ANSI lock when not in use. Lift up to open.

(5) ISO/ANSI LOCK HANDLE. Used to

engage ISO/ANSI container lock.

TM 08780B-10

2-22

b. Body and Frame


(6) TIE DOWN RINGS. Used to secure vehicle

in place during transportation.

(7) FIRE EXTINGUISHER BRACKET. Used

to secure fire extinguisher. Pull handle to open bracket.

(8) STOWAGE COMPARTMENT. Used to

store tools and other equipment. Open by removing quick release

pins.

(9) LANDING LEG BRACKET. Holds

landing leg in its stowed position.

(10) LANDING LEG HAND CRANK. Raises

or lowers landing leg. Remove retaining pin to unstow crank.

Turn crank clockwise to raise – counterclockwise to lower.

(11) LANDING LEG. Used to support trailer

when separated from the front power unit. There is one leg per

side.

TM 08780B-10

2-23

(12) LANDING LEG BRACES. Used to

strengthen landing legs when deployed. Remove retaining pins to

remove braces.

(13) TOW/LIFTING BRACKETS. Used to

either attach lifting sling, or to tie vehicle down for transport.

TM 08780B-10

2-24

(14) PINTLE HOOK. Used for attaching trailers

and tow bars. Remove cotter pin and pull latch forward to open.

(15) GLAD HANDS. Allow LVS to supply air

to towed trailer. Glad hands are marked RED for emergency and

BLUE for service.

(16) INTER-VEHICLE ELECTRICAL

CONNECTOR. Connects LVS electrical system to electrical

system of towed trailer.

2-3. MK15/15A1 WRECKER/RECOVERY TRAILER

a. Both Left and Right Sides




TM 08780B-10

2-25



pins.








side.

b. Left Side



store tools and other equipment. Pull tee handle out and turn left to

open.

TM 08780B-10

2-26

(7) GROUND SPADES. Used to hold vehicle

in place during winching operation. Shown in stowed position.

(8) STABILIZER CYLINDER. Used to

support and level vehicle during crane operation.

(8.1) OUTRIGGER JACK EXTENSION

CYLINDER (MK15A1 ONLY). Used to support and level vehicle

during crane operation.

(8.2) BOOM ANGLE INDICATOR (MK15A1

ONLY). Indicates the angle of the MHC boom during operation.

(9) STABILIZER CYLINDER LOCK VALVE.

Valve has two positions. In the LOCK position, vertical stabilizer

will not work.

(10) VERTICAL STABILIZER LOCK PIN.

Locks stabilizer cylinder in either stowed or working position.

TM 08780B-10

2-27

(11) STABILIZER CABLE. Detachable cable

used to raise or lower stabilizer cylinder.

(12) GROUND SPADE TUBE HOLD DOWN.

Used to stow ground spade tubes to vehicle. Turn handle

counterclockwise to loosen hold down.

(13) GROUND SPADE TUBES. Used to

connect ground spades on vehicle.

(14) MATERIAL HANDLING CRANE. Used

to lift cargo or equipment and place it within a 350 degree radius,

TM 08780B-10

2-28

(14.1) MATERIAL HANDLING CRANE

(MK15A1 ONLY). Used to lift' cargo or equipment and place it

within a 318 degree radius.

(15) SIDE PULL RELIEF VALVE. Limits

hydraulic pressure to the winch preventing damage when making

side pulls.

(15.1) AUXILIARY CONTROL PANEL

(MK15A1 ONLY). Contains the following items:

(a) SIDE PULL RELIEF VALVE.

Limits hydraulic pressure to the winch, preventing damage when

making side pulls.

(b) WINCH REMOTE CONTROL

RECEPTACLE. Used to connect winch remote control.

(c) AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS

LEVER. Used to supply hydraulic pressure to auxiliary hose reel.

(d) A-FRAME CYLINDER LEVER.

Used to raise or lower A-frame cylinder.

(16) MANUAL/REMOTE SWITCH. Three

position switch that allows the selection of either manual or remote

controls.

(17) OUTRIGGER EXTENSION LOCK

VALVE. Valve has two positions. In the UNLOCK position,

outrigger beam will extend or retract. In the LOCK position,

outrigger beam will not move.

(18) CRANE HOOK. Used for attaching load to

crane.

TM 08780B-10

2-29

(19) MAIN CONTROL PANEL. Contains the

following controls:

(a) EMERGENCY MANUAL

SHUTDOWN VALVE. Allows the crane to continue operation in

the event of an electrical failure.

(b) DECK WINCH. Pays out or

rewinds cable. Control also engages high idle.

(c) ROTATION. Rotates crane

clockwise or counterclockwise.

(d) MAIN BOOM. Raises or lowers

main boom.

(e) FOLDING BOOM. Raises or lowers

folding boom.

(f) BOOM EXTENSION. Retracts or

extends extension booms.

(g) WRECKER HOIST. Raises or

lowers A-frame cylinder.

TM 08780B-10

2-30

(h) NEAR SIDE STABILIZER.

Extends or retracts either the near side outrigger beam or stabilizer

cylinder.

(i) FAR SIDE STABILIZER. Extends

or retracts either the far side outrigger beam or stabilizer cylinder.

(19.1) MHC MAIN CONTROL PANEL

(MK15A1 ONLY). Contains the following controls:

(a) BOOM LEVER. Raises and lowers

boom.

(b) TELESCOPE LEVER. Retracts or

extends telescoping boom sections.

(c) SWING LEVER. Rotates crane


(d) HOIST LEVER. Pays out or reels in

the crane hoist cable.

(e) LH O/R (Outrigger) JACK LEVER.

Raises or lowers LH outrigger jack cylinder.

(f) MAST LEVER. Raises or lowers

the mast.

(g) O/R (Outrigger) EXT LEVER.

Extends or retracts right and left side outrigger jack beams.

(h) RH O/R (Outrigger) JACK LEVER.

Raises or lowers RH outrigger jack cylinder.

(19.2) MHC REMOTE CONTROL

RECEPTACLE (MK15A1 ONLY). Used to connect MHC remote

control.

TM 08780B-10

2-31

(19.3) TILT ALARM (MK15A1 ONLY). Sounds

warning when crane is out of balance during operation.

4.5-degrees out of level will sound alarm.

(19.4) MANUAL OVERRIDE SWITCH

(MK15A1 ONLY). Push button switch used to provide hydraulic

power to MHC in the event of a MHC electrical failure.

(19.5) MHC MAIN JUNCTION BOX. Contains

the following switches:

(a) MAIN POWER. Two-position

on/off switch used to control MHC electrical power supply.

(b) TILT ALARM. Turns MHC tilt

alarm system ON or OFF.

TM 08780B-10

2-32

TM 08780B-10

2-33

c. Rear


(20) RECOVERY WINCH. Used for recovery

operations.

(21) STOWAGE STRAPS. Used to hold A-

frame in upright position when A-frame is not in use.

TM 08780B-10

2-34

(22) A-FRAME. Used to lift and support

disabled vehicles.

(23) WRECKER CYLINDER. Used to lift

disabled vehicles.

(24) CYLINDER STOWAGE BRACKET.

Holds end of A-frame cylinder when not in use.

(25) WINCH ROLLERS. Used to support winch

cable during side or downward pull operations.

(26) TIE DOWN/LIFTING POINTS. Used to

either attach lifting sling, or to tie vehicle down for transportation.

(27) WINCH CABLE STOWAGE HOOK.

Holds end of cable when winch is not in use.





BLUE for service.


CONNECTOR. Connects LVS electrical system to system of

towed trailer.


to secure fire extinguisher. Pull handle to open bracket.

(31.1) MHC REMOTE CONTROL STOWAGE

COMPARTMENT (MK15A1 ONLY). Used to store MHC

remote control unit and cable.

TM 08780B-10

2-35

TM 08780B-10

2-36

d. Right Side


(32) REMOTE CONTROL STOWAGE

COMPARTMENT. Used to store remote control and cable. Pull

rubber tee to open compartment.

(32.1) WINCH REMOTE CONTROL STOWAGE

COMPARTMENT. Used to store winch remote control unit and

cable.

(32.2) PASSENGER SIDE OUTRIGGER JACK

CYLINDER CONTROL PANEL. Contains the following

controls:

(a) RH O/R (Outrigger) JACK LEVER.


(b) O/R (Outrigger) EXT LEVER.

Extends or retracts right and left side outrigger beams.

(c) LH O/R (Outrigger) JACK LEVER.

Raises or lowers LH outrigger jack cylinder.

(32.3) CRANE HOOK BLOCK (MK15A1

ONLY). Used to attach load to crane.

(32.4) CRANE HOOK BRACKET (MK15A1

ONLY). Used to store crane hook block when not in use.

(33) STABILIZER CYLINDER LOCK VALVE.

Valve has two positions. In the UNLOCK position, stabilizer

cylinder will extend or retract. In the LOCK position, stabilizer

cylinder will not move.

(34) VERTICAL STABILIZER LOCK PIN.

Locks stabilizer cylinder in either stowed or working position.

TM 08780B-10

2-37

(35) FLOW CONTROL VALVE. Adjustable

flow valve used to set hydraulic oil flow rate to auxiliary hose reel.

(36) OUTRIGGER EXTENSION LOCK



stabilizer beam will not move. Stabilizer cylinder is lowered with

outrigger beam extended and locked.

(37) NEAR SIDE STABILIZER CONTROL.

Used to extend or retract either the outrigger beam or the stabilizer

cylinder.

(38) AUXILIARY CIRCUIT CONTROL. Used

to supply hydraulic pressure to auxiliary hose reel.

TM 08780B-10

2-38

(39) STOWAGE COMPARTMENT. Used for

stowage of the following items: two hydraulic impact wrenches

and sockets, hydraulic drill, hydraulic chain saw and hydraulic

hose reel with 50 feet (15.25 m) of hose.

(40) ISO/ANSI FITTINGS. Consists of four

fittings to add additional locks for container.

(41) TIE DOWN SLOTS. Consists of eight

cargo tie downs used for securing cargo.

TM 08780B-10

2-39

(42) FRONT STOWAGE COMPARTMENT.

Used to store the following items: slings, chains and clevises.

Oxygen and acetylene tanks are also mounted to front stowage

compartment.


store tools, tie down straps and other equipment. Open by

removing quick release pin.

(43.1) OUTRIGGER JACK EXTENSION PADS

(MK15A1 ONLY). Used as support platforms for the outrigger

jack extension cylinders. When not in use, the outrigger jack

extension pads are stowed in brackets located on the underside of

the RH and LH stowage compartments.



remove braces.

TM 08780B-10

2-40

2-4. MK16/16A1 FIFTH WHEEL SEMI-TRAILER

ADAPTER

a. Left Side



strengthen landing legs-when deployed. Remove retaining pins to

remove braces.

(2) STOWAGE COMPARTMENT. Stores

remote control. Pull up on tee handle to open.

b. Both Left and Right Sides

(3) STOWAGE COMPARTMENT. Stores

tools and other equipment. Open by removing quick release pins

(both sides).


landing leg in its stowed position (both sides).

TM 08780B-10

2-41



Turn crank clockwise to raise – counterclockwise to lower (both

sides).

(6) LANDING LEGS. Used to support trailer

when separated from front power unit (both sides).


in place during transportation (both sides).

c. Rear


(8) WINCH. Used to pull vehicles onto fifth

wheel semi-trailer.

(9) SIDE PULL ROLLERS. Used to support

the winch cable during operation. These rollers are adjustable.

Rollers should be in the inboard position for winching the

TM 08780B-10

2-42

M870/870Al trailer onto the fifth wheel. The rollers should be in

the outboard position during other operations.



pins.

(11) LADDER AND GRAB HANDLES.

Allows access onto vehicle and platform.

(12) WINCH CABLE STOWAGE HOOK.

Holds end of cable when not in use.

(13) ADJUSTABLE FIFTH WHEEL. Used to

support semi-trailer, on or off road. Oscillates four ways and has

positive locking mechanism.

(14) SECONDARY KINGPIN LATCH

HANDLE. Unlocks secondary kingpin lock.

(15) PRIMARY KINGPIN LATCH HANDLE.

Unlocks primary kingpin lock.

(16) REMOTE CONTROL RECEPTACLE.

Used to plug in remote control cable.


CONNECTOR. Connects LVS electrical system of towed trailer.

(18) SIDE PULL RELIEF VALVE. Used when

making a side pull. In OPEN position, hydraulic system builds up

normal pressure. In CLOSED position, hydraulic pressure is

reduced.


to semi-trailer. Glad hands are marked RED for emergency and

BLUE for service.

TM 08780B-10

2-43

(20) HOSE TENDER. Used to secure semi-

trailer air lines when not in use.

(21) FIFTH WHEEL RAMPS. Used to pick up

and guide the king pin of attaching semi-trailers to the fifth wheel.

(21.1) FIFTH WHEEL SUPPORT BLOCKS

(MK16A1 ONLY). Used to support fifth wheel when

disconnecting from trailer. To use, place both blocks under rear

edge of fifth wheel. Stow in stowage brackets when not in use.


either attach lifting sling, or to tie vehicle down for transportation.





BLUE for service.


CONNECTOR. Connects LVS electrical system to system of

towed trailer.

TM 08780B-10

2-44

2-5. MK17/17A1 DROPSIDE CARGO W/CRANE

TRAILER

a. Cargo Bed


(1) SIDE PANEL LATCH. Used to secure two

side panels together. Lift up latch to release panels individually.

(2) SIDE PANEL. Fold-down and removable

side panels ease loading.

(3) TROOP SEAT. Folds down for carrying

personnel.

(4) LOCK PIN. Locks side panel to front and

rear gates.

(5) ISO/ANSI FITTINGS. 10 fittings to add

additional locks for container.

(6) TIE DOWN SLOTS. 24 cargo tie downs

used for securing cargo.

TM 08780B-10

2-45

b. Both Left and Right Sides


(7) LADDER. Used to climb onto cargo bed.

Lift up and swing down to use.



pins.






TM 08780B-10

2-46



side.

(12) TIE DOWN RING. Used to secure vehicle


c. LEFT SIDE


(13) STABILIZER CABLE. Detachable cable

used to raise or lower stabilizer cylinder.

(14) VERTICAL STABILIZER LOCK VALVE.

Valve has two positions. In the UNLOCK position, stabilizer

cylinder can be raised or lowered. In the LOCK position, stabilizer

cylinder will not work.

(15) STABILIZER CYLINDER. Used to

support and level vehicle during crane operation.

(16) REMOTE CONTROL STOWAGE

COMPARTMENT. Used to store remote control and cable. Pull

rubber tee to open compartment.

(17) MATERIAL HANDLING CRANE. Used

to lift cargo or equipment and place it within 350 degrees.

(18) CRANE HOOK. Used for attaching load to

crane.

(19) EMERGENCY MANUAL SHUT DOWN

VALVE. Allows the crane to continue operation in the event of an

electrical failure.

(20) STABILIZER EXTENSION LOCK


TM 08780B-10

2-47



(21) CRANE CONTROLS. Contains the

following controls:

(a) Rotation. Rotates crane clockwise or

counterclockwise.

(b) Main Boom. Raises or lowers main

boom.

(c) Folding Boom. Raises or lowers

folding boom.

(d) Boom Extension. Retracts or

extends extension booms.

(e) Near Side Stabilizer. Extends or

retracts either the near side outrigger beam or stabilizer cylinder.

(f) Far Side Stabilizer. Extends or

retracts either the far side outrigger beam or stabilizer cylinder.

(22) STABILIZER CYLINDER LOCK PIN.

Locks stabilizer in either stowed or working position.

TM 08780B-10

2-48

(22.1) MATERIAL HANDLING CRANE (MHC)

(MK17A1 ONLY). Used to lift cargo and equipment and place it

within a 318 degree radius.

(22.2) OUTRIGGER JACK EXTENSION PADS

(MK17A1 ONLY). Used as support platforms for the outrigger

jack extension cylinders. When not in use, the outrigger jack

extension pads are stowed in brackets located on the underside of

the RH and LH stowage compartments.

(22.3) OUTRIGGER JACK EXTENSION

CYLINDER (MK17A1 ONLY). Used to support and level vehicle

during crane operation. Outrigger jack extension cylinders may be

TM 08780B-10

2-49

controlled from either the MHC main control panel or the

passenger side outrigger jack extension control panel.

(22.4) MHC MAIN CONTROL PANEL

(MK17A1 ONLY). Contains the following controls:

(a) BOOM LEVER. Raises and lowers

boom.

(b) TELESCOPE LEVER. Extends or

retracts telescoping boom sections.

(c) SWING LEVER. Rotates crane


(d) HOIST LEVER. Pays out or reels in

the crane hoist cable.

TM 08780B-10

2-50

(e) RH O/R (Outrigger) JACK LEVER.

Raises or lowers right side outrigger jack cylinder.

(f) O/R (Outrigger) EXT LEVER.

Extends or retracts right and left side outrigger beams.

(g) MAST LEVER. Raises or lowers

the mast.

(h) LH O/R (Outrigger) JACK LEVER.

Raises or lowers left side outrigger jack cylinder.

(22.6) MANUAL OVERRIDE SWITCH

(MK17A1 ONLY). Push button switch used to provide hydraulic

power to MHC in the event of a MHC electrical failure.

(22.7) REMOTE CONTROL HOOK-UP

RECEPTACLE (MK17A1 ONLY). Used to connect MHC remote

control.

TM 08780B-10

2-51

(22.8) TILT ALARM (MK17A1 ONLY). Sounds

warning when crane is out of balance during operation.

4.5-degrees out of level will sound alarm.

(23) EXTENDED PINTLE BRACKET. Used to

attach rear extended pintle to vehicle.

(24) CRANE STOWAGE PIN. Secures crane in

stowed position when not in use.

(25) NEAR SIDE STABILIZER CONTROL.

Used to extend or retract either the outrigger beam or the stabilizer

cylinder.

(26) STABILIZER EXTENSION LOCK


TM 08780B-10

2-52




to secure fire extinguisher. Pull handle to open basket.


either attach lifting sling or to tie vehicle down for transportation.

(29) REAR LANDING LEG. Used to support

rear of trailer when separated from the front power unit.



(31) GLAD HANDS. Allows LVS to supply air


BLUE for service.


CONNECTOR. Connects LVS electrical system to electrical

system of towed trailer.

(32.1) MHC MAIN JUNCTION BOX (MK17A1

ONLY). Contains the following switches:

(a) MAIN POWER. Two-position

on/off switch used to control MHC electrical power supply.

(b) TILT ALARM. Turns MHC tilt

alarm system ON or OFF.

(32.2) BOOM ANGLE INDICATOR (MK17A1

ONLY). Indicates angle of the MHC boom.

(32.3) REMOTE CONTROL STOWAGE BOX

(MK17A1 ONLY). Used to store MHC remote control and cable.

TM 08780B-10

2-53

TM 08780B-10

2-54

e. Right Side

Key item and function


store tools, tie down straps and other equipment. Open by

removing quick release pins.



remove braces.

TM 08780B-10

2-55

(34.1) PASSENGER SIDE OUTRIGGER JACK

CYLINDER CONTROL PANEL. Contains the following

controls:

TM 08780B-10

2-56

(a) RH O/R (Outrigger) JACK LEVER.


(b) O/R (Outrigger) EXT LEVER.

Extends or retracts right and left side outrigger jack extensions.

(c) LH O/R (Outrigger) JACK LEVER.

Raises or lowers left side outrigger jack cylinder.

2-6. SPECIAL PURPOSE KITS' CONTROL AND

INDICATORS

a. Rear Body Unit Tow Kit


(1) TOW EYE. Used for attaching rear body

tow kit to towing vehicle.

(2) STOWAGE BOX. Stores tow unit

mounting hardware when not in use.

(3) AIR LINES. Use quick disconnect

couplings to connect with quick disconnect fittings on rear body.

(4) STOWAGE QUICK DISCONNECT

FITTINGS. Used to stow air lines when not in use.

(5) SERVICE AIR SUPPLY GLAD HAND.

Allow vehicle to supply service air to towed rear body.

(6) STOWAGE GLAD HANDS. Used to stow

glad hand end of air lines when not in use.

(7) EMERGENCY AIR SUPPLY GLAD

HAND. Allows vehicle to supply emergency air to towed rear

body.

TM 08780B-10

2-57

(8) SAFETY CHAINS. Secure towed trailer to

towing vehicle if pintle fails.

(9) ELECTRICAL CABLE. Allows vehicle to

supply power to the rear body's electrical system.

b. Machine Gun Mount

Key Item and function

(10) MACHINE GUN RING. Allows

360 degree rotation of weapon.

(11) ROOF HATCH. Used to cover roof

opening when gun is not in use.

TM 08780B-10

2-58

(12) PLATFORM. Used to stand on when

operating machine gun.

(13) PLATFORM LEG. Supports platform when

in use.

(14) QUICK RELEASE PIN. Locks platform in

stowed position.

TM 08780B-10

2-59

c. Front And Rear Extended Pintle Kit


(15) PINTLE HOOK. Remove cotter pin and

pull latch forward to open.

(16) TOW BAR SUPPORT. Used to support

tow bar when stowed and unstowed.

(17) FRONT TOW BAR. Primarily used to

maneuver the M198 howitzer.

(18) TOW BAR STRUT. Used to support tow

bar when in use.

(19) PINTLE HOOK. Remove cotter pin and

pull latch forward to open.

TM 08780B-10

2-60

(20) REAR TOW BAR. Primarily used to tow

the M198 howitzer.

TM 08780B-10

2-61

Section II. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services

(PMCS)

2-7. GENERAL. This section contains PMCS requirements for

the MK48/48A1/14/14A1 thru MK48/48A1/17/17A1 LVS

vehicles. The PMCS tables contain checks and services necessary

to insure that your vehicle is ready for operation. Using PMCS

tables, perform your maintenance at the specified intervals.

2-8. TABLE ARRANGEMENT. Table 2-1 covers items

which are common to the MK48/48A1/14/14A1 and all other LVS

models. Tables 2-2, 2-3 and 2-4 cover items that are only used on

certain LVS models. Table 2-5 covers special purpose kits which

may be found on any LVS model. Start your PMCS check with

Table 2-1 and continue to the next table that covers your vehicle

model.

All Table 2-1

MK48/48A1/15/15A1 Table 2-2/2-3

MK48/48A1/16/16A1 Table 2-4

MK48/48A1/17/17A1 Table 2-5/2-6

Kits Table 2-7

If your vehicle has a special purpose kit installed, follow the

PMCS checks in Table 2-5.

2-9. USE OF PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS

AND SERVICES (see Tables 2-1 thru 2-5)

a. Do your BEFORE (B) Preventive Maintenance just

before you operate the vehicle. Pay attention to all CAUTIONS

and WARNINGS.

b. Do your DURING (D) Preventive Maintenance

while the vehicle and/or its component systems are in operation.

Pay attention to all CAUTIONS and WARNINGS.

c. Do your AFTER (A) Preventive Maintenance right

after operating the vehicle.

TM 08780B-10

2-62

d. Do your WEEKLY (W) Preventive Maintenance

once a week.

e. Do your MONTHLY (M) Preventive Maintenance

once a month.

f. If something does not work, troubleshoot it with the

instructions in this manual, or notify your Non-Commissioned

Officer in Charge (NCOIC).

g. Always do your Preventive Maintenance in the

same order so that it gets to be a habit.

h. If you find a problem that is beyond your echelon of

repair, report the problem to Organizational Maintenance.

i. When you do your Preventive Maintenance, take

along the tools you will need to make all the checks. You will

always need a rag or two.

2-10. GENERAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

DRY CLEANING SOLVENT, USED TO CLEAN PARTS, CAN

GIVE OFF HARMFUL VAPORS AND IS HARMFUL TO

SKIN AND CLOTHING. TO AVOID INJURY OR DEATH,

KEEP AWAY FROM OPEN FLAME OR EXCESSIVE HEAT

AND USE IN A WELL-VENTILATED AREA. IF DRY

CLEANING SOLVENT GETS ON SKIN OR CLOTHING,

WASH IMMEDIATELY WITH SOAP AND WATER.

a. Cleanliness. Dirt, grease, oil and debris get in the

way and may cover up a serious problem. Use dry cleaning

solvent (item 20, Appendix D) on all metal surfaces.

b. Bolts, Nuts and Screws. Check them all for obvious

looseness or missing, bent, or broken condition. You cannot try

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-63

them all with a tool but look for chipped paint, bare metal, or rust

around bolt heads. If you find one you think is loose, tighten it or

report it to Organizational Maintenance.

c. Welds. Look for loose or chipped paint, rust, or

gaps where parts are welded together. If you find a bad weld,

report it to Organizational Maintenance.

d. Electric wires and Connectors. Look for cracked or

broken insulation, bare wires, and loose or broken connectors.

Tighten loose connectors and make sure the wires are in good

shape. If you find a bad wire or connector, report it to

Organizational Maintenance.

e. Hydraulic Lines and Fittings. Look for wear,

damage, or leaks and make sure clamps and fittings are tight. Wet

spots show leaks but a stain around a fitting or connector can also

mean a leak. If a leak comes from a loose fitting or connector,

tighten it. If any part is broken or worn out, report it to


f. Damage. Damage is defined as any conditions that

affect safety or would render the vehicle unserviceable for mission

requirements.

2-11. FLUID LEAKAGE. It is necessary for you to know how

fluid leakage affects the status of fuel, oil, coolant and the

hydraulic systems. The following are definitions of the

types/classes of leakage you need to know about for determining

the status of fluid systems. Become familiar with them and

remember-WHEN IN DOUBT, NOTIFY YOUR NCOIC.

EQUIPMENT OPERATION IS ALLOWABLE WITH MINOR

LEAKAGES (CLASS I OR II). OF COURSE,

CONSIDERATION MUST BE GIVEN TO THE FLUID

CAPACITY IN THE ITEM/SYSTEM BEING

CHECKED/INSPECTED. WHEN IN DOUBT, NOTIFY YOUR

CAUTION

TM 08780B-10

2-64

SUPERVISOR. WHEN OPERATING WITH CLASS I OR II

LEAKS, CONTINUE TO CHECK FLUID LEVELS AS

REQUIRED IN YOUR PMCS. CLASS III LEAKS SHOULD

BE REPORTED TO YOUR SUPERVISOR OR TO

ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE.

a. Class I. Seepage of fluid (as indicated by wetness

or discoloration) not great enough to form drops.

b. Class II. Leakage of fluid great enough to form

drops but not enough to cause drops to fall from item being

checked/inspected.

c. Class III. Leakage of fluid great enough to form

drops that fall from the item being checked/inspected.

2-12. OPERATOR/CREW PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

CHECKS AND SERVICE TABLES. Checks and service

intervals given are for normal operation. These should be adjusted

for abnormal or severe operating conditions. This walk around

PMCS diagram will help you perform the B, D and A PMCS. It

shows the vehicle PMCS routing track which matches the

sequence of basic PMCS to be performed on all vehicles.

TM 08780B-10

2-65

TM 08780B-10

2-66

Table 2-1. Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks And

Services (All Vehicles)

NOTE: These checks are to be made in the order listed, within

designated interval.

B-Before operation D-During operation A-After operation

W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval

Item To Be Inspected Procedure:

Check for and have repaired, filled

or adjusted as needed.

For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/

Available If: B D A W M

MAKE THE FOLLOWING WALK-AROUND

CHECKS:

CAB EXTERIOR

• a. Inspect cab (1) for damage that

would impair operation.

Any damage to

cab that would

impair vehicle's

mission.

• b. Inspect cab door for damage or

misalignment.

• c. Inspect cab door seals for tears

or rot.

• d. Inspect for broken, cracked, or

loose mirrors.

DANGER

FRONT AND REAR FRAMES PIVOT. STAY CLEAR OF

TIRES AND CENTER HINGE

AREA WHILE ENGINE IS

RUNNING

TM 08780B-10

2-67


Services (All Vehicles) (Continued)




W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/


1 CAB EXTERIOR (Continued)

• e. Check for broken or loose

reflectors.

• f. Look under the vehicle for fuel,

oil, or coolant leakage.

Any class III

fuel, oil, or

coolant leaks.

• g. Check for missing, illegible, or

damaged data plates (2) between the

two frames.

2 TIRES

• WHILE CHANGING

TIRES OR WHILE PERFORMING

TIRE MAINTENANCE, STAY

OUT OF THE TRAJECTORY AS

SHOWN BY THE AREA

INDICATED. FAILURE TO

FOLLOW PROPER

PROCEDURES MAY RESULT IN

INJURY OR DEATH TO

PERSONNEL.

• UNDER SOME

CIRCUMSTANCES, THE

TRAJECTORY MAY DEVIATE

FROM ITS EXPECTED PATH.

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-68






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/


2 TIRES (Continued)

FAILURE TO FOLLOW PROPER


INJURY OR DEATH TO

PERSONNEL.

NOTE

Trajectory area as shown applies

to all wheel/ tire assemblies.

• • a. Check tires (3) for cuts, gouges,

or cracks.

Tires have cuts,

gouges, or

cracks which

would result in

tire failure

during

operation. One

or more tires is

unserviceable

and no spare is

available.

• • b. Check tire tread depth. Tires

should not be worn beyond level of

wear bar.

If tread is worn

beyond level of

wear bar.

TM 08780B-10

2-69






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/


2 TIRES (Continued)

• • c. Check wheels (4) for broken,

cracked, or bent surfaces. Check that

side ring (5) and clamp plate (6) are

not damaged or loose and that they

fit securely in their grooves.

A wheel is

broken,

cracked, or

bent; or side

ring or clamp

plate are

damaged or not

secure.

• • d. Check wheel studs and nuts (7)

for obvious looseness. Check for

bent or broken studs and missing

nuts.

Two or more

nuts or studs on

the same wheel

are missing,

broken, or bent.

WHILE CHANGING TIRES OR

WHILE PERFORMING TIRE

MAINTENANCE, STAY OUT OF

THE TRAJECTORY AS SHOWN

BY THE AREA INDICATED.



INJURY OR DEATH TO

PERSONNEL.

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-70






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/


2 TIRES (Continued)

UNDER SOME

CIRCUMSTANCES, THE

TRAJECTORY MAY DEVIATE

FROM ITS EXPECTED PATH.



INJURY OR DEATH TO

PERSONNEL.

NOTE

Trajectory area as shown applies to

all wheel tire assemblies.

• e. Check tires for proper air

pressure. Refer to paragraph 3-4.

OFF ROAD OPERATION MUST

BE LIMITED TO 30 MPH.

EMERGENCY OPERATION

(SAND, MUD AND SNOW) MUST


NOTE

All tire pressure should be checked

and adjusted when tires are cold.

WARNING

CAUTION

TM 08780B-10

2-71






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/


2 TIRES (Continued)

TIRE PRESSURE (PSI)

MK48/

48A1

MK14/14A1,

1515/A1,

16/16A1 and

17/17A1

ON ROAD 60 PSI 110 PSI

OFF ROAD 45 PSI 45 PSI

EMERGENCY

(sand, mud and snow)

30 PSI 30 PSI

3 BATTERIES

DO NOT WEAR WATCHES,

RINGS OR OTHER JEWELRY

WHEN SERVICING BATTERIES

WHICH COULD SHORT OUT

BATTERY TERMINALS. DO NOT

SMOKE OR USE OPEN FLAME

AROUND BATTERIES.

BATTERIES MAY EXPLODE

FROM A SPARK. BATTERY

ACID IS HARMFUL TO SKIN

AND EYES.

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-72






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/


3 BATTERIES • a. Inspect for missing battery One or more

batteries

missing.

• b. Remove battery caps (8) and

check fluid level of each cell. Fluid

level should be up to the split ring.

NOTE

If fluid level is repeatedly low, or

fluid is boiling, notify

Organizational Maintenance. When

temperature is below +32°F (0°C),

run engine 15 minutes to allow

water, added by Organizational

Maintenance, to mix with

electrolyte.

TM 08780B-10

2-73






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/


3 BATTERIES (Continued)

• c. Inspect batteries for cracked or

leaking casing (9), or loose, broken,

burned, or corroded terminal post

(10). If batteries require

maintenance, refer to paragraph 3-10.

Battery is

damaged or

terminals are

broken or

burned.

• d. Check battery box (11) for

damage or corrosion.

• e. Inspect slave receptacle, (12)

for loose cables, damage, or missing

cover.

TM 08780B-10

2-74






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/


3.1 BATTERIES (MK48A1 VEHICLES ONLY)

DO NOT WEAR WATCHES OR

OTHER JEWELRY WHEN

SERVICING BATTERIES WHICH

COULD SHORT OUT BATTERY

TERMINALS. DO NOT SMOKE

OR USE OPEN FLAME AROUND

BATTERIES. BATTERIES MAY

EXPLODE FROM A SPARK.

BATTERY ACID IS HARMFUL

TO SKIN AND EYES.

• a. Inspect for missing battery. One or more

batteries

missing.

• b. Remove battery caps (1) and

check fluid level of each cell. Fluid

level should be approximately 1/8 in.

(3.2 mm) below the split ring.

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-75






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/


3.1 BATTERIES (MK48A1 VEHICLES ONLY)

(Continued)

NOTE

If fluid level is repeatedly low, or

fluid is boiling, notify

Organizational Maintenance. When

temperature is below +32°F (0°C),

run engine 15 minutes to allow

water, added by Organizational

Maintenance, to mix with

electrolyte.

• c. Inspect batteries for cracked or

leaking casing (2), or loose, broken,

burned, or corroded terminal post (3).

If batteries require maintenance, refer

to paragraph 3-10.1.

Battery is

damaged or

terminals are

broken or

burned.

TM 08780B-10

2-76






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/


BATTERIES (MK48A1 VEHICLES ONLY)

(Continued)

• d. Check battery box (4) for

damage or corrosion.

• e. Inspect slave receptacle (5) for

loose cables, damage, or missing

cover.

TM 08780B-10

2-77






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/


4 ETHER START SYSTEM

• a. When temperature is below

+45°F (+7°C), inspect ether canister

(13) for punctures or obvious

damage.

Canister is

punctured or

empty.

• b. Check for loose or damaged

mounts or hardware.

TM 08780B-10

2-78






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/


5 AIR DRYER

• a. Inspect air dryer (14) for

punctures and obvious damage.

Air dryer is

punctured.

• b. Check air dryer (14) for loose

mounting bolts and loose air line

connections.

TM 08780B-10

2-79






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/


6 WORK LAMP

• a. Check work lamp (15) for

damage to lens, or case. Make sure

lamp is secure in its holder.

• b. Check work lamp (15) for

proper operation.

7 FUEL TANKS

DO NOT PERFORM FUEL

SYSTEM CHECK WHILE

SMOKING OR NEAR FLAMES,

FIRE OR SPARKS. FUEL COULD

IGNITE, CAUSING DAMAGE TO

VEHICLE, SEVERE INJURY OR

DEATH.

• • a. Check fuel tank (16) for leaks

or damage.

Any class III

fuel leakage.

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-80






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/

Available If:

7 B D A W M FUEL TANKS (Continued)

• b. Check fuel hoses (17) and

connections (16) for leaks or damage.

Make sure all connections are secure.

Any class III

leakage or loose

connections.

NOTE

Both the right and left fuel tanks

have fuel tank shut-off valves.

• c. Check fuel tank shut-off valves

(19) for proper operation.

TM 08780B-10

2-81






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/


8 COUPLING BOLTS

• • Check for broken, loose, or missing

coupling bolts and nuts (20).

Any coupling

bolts or nuts are

broken, loose,

or missing.

9 STOWAGE COMPARTMENTS

• Check compartment (21) for water in

bottom of compartment, or other

obvious damage. Ensure drain holes

are clear.

TM 08780B-10

2-82






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/


10 LIGHTS

• Check stoplights, clearance lights,

and headlights for burned out bulbs

or broken lens.

11 PINTLE HOOK

• Check pintle hook (22) for secure

mounting and proper operation of

locking mechanism.

Pintle locking

mechanism is

damaged and is

required for

mission.

12 ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR

• a. Inspect electrical connector (23)

for damage.

Connector is

damaged and is

required for

mission.

• b. Inspect electrical connector

cover seal for tears or rot.

TM 08780B-10

2-83






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/


12 ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR (Continued)

• c. Inspect electrical connector

cable for damage.

Cable is

damaged and is

required for

mission.

13 REAR GLAD HANDS

• Check glad hands (24) and air lines

for damage. Inspect glad hands for

missing or rotted seals.

Air lines or

seals are

damaged,

missing, or

rotting and glad

hands are

required for

mission.

TM 08780B-10

2-84






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/


14 TIRE HOIST

• Check tire hoist (25) for any

damaged or missing parts.

15 FUEL-WATER SEPARATOR

DO NOT PERFORM FUEL

SYSTEM CHECKS WHILE

SMOKING OR NEAR FLAMES,

FIRE, OR SPARKS. FUEL

COULD IGNITE, CAUSING

DAMAGE TO VEHICLE SEVERE

INJURY, OR DEATH

• a. Check fuel-water separator (26)

for leaks and/or damage.

Any class III

fuel leakage.

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-85






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/


15 FUEL-WATER SEPARATOR (Continued)

• b. Check priming pump (27) for

leaks or damage.

Any class III

fuel leakage.

• c. Check sediment bowl (28) for

water. If water is present, drain fuel

from bowl into suitable container

until clean fuel flows out.

16 SECONDARY FUEL FILTER

• Check secondary fuel filter (29); for

leaks or damage.

Any class III

fuel leakage.

TM 08780B-10

2-86






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/


17 ENGINE OIL

DO NOT OVERFILL ENGINE

OIL. ENGINE DAMAGE COULD

RESULT.

NOTE

• If engine has been running,

wait approximately five

minutes after engine shutdown

before checking engine oil

level.

• Normal oil consumption could

be up to .27 quarts (.26 liters)

per operating hour under

normal operating conditions.

• Check engine oil level on dipstick

(30). Oil level should be between

low (L) mark and full (F) mark. Add

oil as required.

Oil level below

low (L) mark or

above full (F)

mark.

CAUTION

TM 08780B-10

2-87






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/


17 ENGINE OIL (Continued)

18 COOLANT FILTER

• Check coolant filter (31) for leaks or

damage.

19 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM RESERVOIR

NOTE

On the MK15 and the MK17, the

cranes must be in the stowed

position to correctly check hydraulic

fluid level. Hydraulic fluid must be

at operating temperature.

TM 08780B-10

2-88






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/


19 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM RESERVOIR (Continued)

• • a. Check that hydraulic fluid level

in sight glass (32) on reservoir (33) is

between full and add marks. Add

fluid as required.

Fluid is below

add mark.

• • b. Inspect hydraulic fluid in sight

glass (32) for milky, foamy, or dirty

appearance.

Fluid appears

milky, foamy,

or dirty.

19.1 HYDRAULIC SELECTOR VALVE

• Clean selector shaft of dirt and

grease. Pull out and push in valve

knob. Recoat selector shaft with

grease.

TM 08780B-10

2-89






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/


20 WIPER ARMS AND BLADES

• Check windshield wiper arms and

blades for damage or wear.

21 WINDSHIELD AND CLASS

• Check for broken or cracked

windshield, door glass, rear window,

or peep window.

22 FRONT GLAD HANDS

• Check glad hands (34) for damage.

Inspect glad hands for missing or

rotted seals.

TM 08780B-10

2-90






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/


24 HYDRAULIC PUMP

PERFORM YOUR INSPECTS/

CHECKS ON THE HYDRAULIC

PUMP ONLY WHEN THE

ENGINE IS OFF.

• a. Inspect hydraulic pump (35)

for cracks.

Pump housing

is cracked.

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-91






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/


23 HYDRAULIC PUMP (Continued)

• b. Check hydraulic pump (35),

hoses (36), and split flanges (37) for

leaks.

Any class III

leakage.

• c. Check hydraulic pump (35) for

looseness or missing mounting bolts.

Make sure pump is secure.

Pump is loose

or bolts are

missing.

24 UNDERCARRIAGE AND FRAME

• a. Inspect for missing or broken

suspension limit chains (39) on No. 1

and No. 2 axles.

One or more

chains are

missing or

broken on the

same axle.

TM 08780B-10

2-92






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/


24 UNDERCARRIAGE AND FRAME (Continued)

• b. Check that all axle and shift

unit breathers (39) are not dogged

and that they spin.

TM 08780B-10

2-93






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/



c. Check for loose, broken, or

missing cargo body mounting studs

(40).

One or more

studs are

broken or

missing.

• d. Inspect frame rails and

crossmembers for loose or broken

bolts, cracked or broken welds.

Any broken

frame rails,

crossmembers,

broken welds,

loose or broken

bolts.

• e. Check air lines and hoses for

leaks or obvious damage.

Any leaks or

damage to

lines, hoses, or

fittings.

TM 08780B-10

2-94






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/



• f. Visually inspect spring brake

chamber for missing dust caps (41).

Replace missing dust caps (41)

immediately if operating off road.

• g. Check all slack adjusters (41.1)

for looseness or damage.

Any loose or

damaged slack

adjuster is

found.

• h. Inspect hydraulic lines and

hoses for breaks, cracks or leaks.

Any class III

leaks or

cracked,

broken, or bent

lines or hoses.

TM 08780B-10

2-95






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/


25 AIR INTAKE SYSTEM

• Check air intake system for loose

clamps (42) and punctured or

damaged tubes (43).

Any punctured

or damaged

tube that would

allow unfiltered

air to enter

engine.

TM 08780B-10

2-96






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/


26 ENGINE COMPARTMENT

• a. Check turbocharger oil line (44)

and fittings for signs of leaks or

damage.

Any leakage is

evident.

• b. Check air compressor (45) for

oil and coolant leaks. Check that the

compressor is securely mounted.

Compressor is

loose.

TM 08780B-10

2-97






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/


27 EXHAUST SYSTEM

DO NOT TOUCH HOT EXHAUST

PIPES OR MUFFLER WITH

BARE HANDS. SEVERE BURNS

WILL RESULT.

• Check exhaust system (46) for

damaged pipes or muffler, or loose or

missing clamps. While engine is

running, listen for exhaust leaks.

Pipe between

turbocharger

and exhaust

manifold leaks.

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-98






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/


28 RADIATOR HOSES

• Check radiator hoses (47) for rot,

leaks or loose clamps (48).

TM 08780B-10

2-99






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/


29 RADIATOR COOLANT

• a. Check for coolant in sight glass

(49). Add coolant, if required, as

follows:

Sight glass does

not show

coolant.

USE EXTREME CARE TO AVOID

BEING SCALDED OR BURNED

WHEN REMOVING COOLING

SYSTEM RADIATOR CAP. USE

HEAVY RAG OR GLOVES TO

PROTECT HANDS.

b. Turn radiator cap (50) only one-

half turn counterclockwise and allow

pressure to escape before fully

removing cap.

c. Add coolant to radiator (51)

approximately one inch (2.54 cm)

below filler neck.

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-100






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/


30 CARGO LOCKS, TIEDOWNS AND FITTINGS

• Check for broken or cracked

container locks (52), fittings (53) and

tiedown slots (54).

Any lock,

fitting, or slot

broken that is

required to

secure intended

mission load.

TM 08780B-10

2-101






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/


31 FUEL TANK STRAINER

• Check fuel tank strainer (55) for

clogs or damage. If strainer is

clogged, clean strainer. Refer to

paragraph 3-9.

*Item (52) on MK14 only. Items

(53) and (54) are on MK14, MK15

and MK17 only.

32 CAB INTERIOR

NOTE

Upon power up of ABS system, ABS

warning lights should come on for

about 2 seconds, then turn off.

TM 08780B-10

2-102






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/


32 CAB INTERIOR (Continued)

•

•

•

a. Check engine for:

(1) Noisy or slow cranking

starter.

(2) Excessive smoke, unusual

noise, rough running, or misfiring.

(3) Correct idle of 690 to 700

rpm.

Starter is noisy

or cranks slow.

Any of these

conditions are

found.

Tachometer

reads less than

650 rpm or

more than 750

rpm.

• b. Check the following readings

(1) Engine oil pressure gauge

(56) must show normal operating

pressure of 49 to 70 psi (337 to 482

kPa) at 2,100 rpm. Minimum oil

pressure at idle can go as low as 5 psi

(34 kPa).

Gauge reads

less than 49 psi

(337 kPa)

during

operation or

less than 5 psi

(34 kPa) at idle.

TM 08780B-10

2-103






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/



• (2) Air cleaner restriction

indicator (57) must read within the

yellow area. If restriction window

(58) reads yellow but gauge (59)

reads 18 H2O (4.50 kPa) or more,

filter is partially clogged and should

be replaced at the end of the vehicle's

operation or mission.

Indicator reads

red.

TM 08780B-10

2-104






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/



• • (3) Air pressure gauge (60)

indicates system air pressure in both

the front and rear sections. Low air

pressure indicator (61) and buzzer

will operate until the air pressure is

between 55 psi and 75 psi (379 and

517 kPa) in both sections.

Gauge

indication is

less than 55 psi

(379 kPa), or

low pressure

indicator

remains on or

does not

operate. Or

pressure

exceeds 120 psi

(827 kPa) for

non-ABS

systems or 130

psi (863.35

kPa) for ABS

equipped

systems.

TM 08780B-10

2-105






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/



• • (4) Battery gauge (62) should

read between 24 and 28 volts.

Gauge reads

below 24 or

above 28 volts

•

•

•

c. Check to see that:

(1) Seat belts are securely

mounted and operate properly.

(2) Turn signal control (63)

and indicators (64) operate properly.

(3) Emergency flasher control

(65) operates properly.

TM 08780B-10

2-106






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/



• (4) Both WIPER controls (66

and 67) operate properly. WASHER

control (68) operates properly.

• (5) Both horns (air and

electric) operate properly (only if

tactical situation permits).

• (6) HEAT (69) and

DEFROST (70) controls operate

properly. FAN switch (71) operates

properly, in LO and HI positions.

• (7) Check fire extinguisher

for missing or-broken seal.

• (8) Check condition of fire

extinguisher.

• (9) Check condition of fire

extinguisher mounting bracket.

(10) Check that ABS warning

lights (71.1) come on for about 2

seconds then go off when vehicle is

powered up.

TM 08780B-10

2-107






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/



NOTE

If ABS lights stay on, the ABS is

inoperable but the air brakes remain

functional.

• d. Check that engine water

temperature gauge (72) indicates

normal operating temperature of

160°F to 230°F (71°C to 110°C).

Gauge not

operating or

reads more than

230°F (110°C).

TM 08780B-10

2-108






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/



• e. Check that hydraulic oil

temperature gauge (73) indicates

normal operating temperature of

130°F to 150°F (54.4°C to 65.5°C).

Gauge reads

above 170°F

(77°C).

TM 08780B-10

2-109






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/


33 TRANSMISSION FLUID

• SET PARKING BRAKE

BEFORE CHECKING

TRANSMISSION FLUID.

• WHEN WORKING AT THE

ARTICULATION JOINT,

MAKE SURE TRANSMIS-

SION IS IN NEUTRAL AND

THE PARKING BRAKE IS

APPLIED. THIS WILL

PREVENT THE

ARTICULATION JOINT

FROM MOVING IF THE

STEERING WHEEL IS

ACCIDENTALLY MOVED

WHILE THE ENGINE IS

RUNNING.

• a. With engine running and

transmission in neutral, check

transmission fluid level on dipstick

(74). If transmission temperature is

below 160°F (71°C), fluid level

should be within COLD RUN area.

If transmission temperature is above

160°F (71°C), fluid level should be

within HOT RUN area.

Fluid level is

low or too high.

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-110






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/


34 BRAKES

• a. Check brakes for chatter, noise,

or side pull.

Brakes chatter,

are noisy, or

pull.

NOTE

Trailer hand brake control (75) can

only be checked with a trailer

connected.

• b. Check that trailer brake hand

control (75) operates properly by

moving truck and applying trailer

brakes.

Control does

not apply trailer

brakes.

TM 08780B-10

2-111






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/


34 BRAKES (Continued)

35 STEERING

• Check steering system for any

unusual noise, binding or steering

difficulty during operation.

Steering binds

or is

unresponsive.

TM 08780B-10

2-112






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/


36 TRANSFER CASE

TRUCK MUST BE STOPPED

WHEN MAKING THIS CHECK.

TRANSFER CASE WILL BE

DAMAGED IF SHIFTED WHILE

TRUCK IS MOVING.

• Check transfer case (76) for proper

operation in DIRECT (HIGH) and

LOW range.

Transfer case

does not

operate in all

ranges required

for mission.

CAUTION

TM 08780B-10

2-113






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/


37 TRANSMISSION

• a. Check transmission for proper

shifting.

Transmission

does not

operate in all

ranges.

NOTE

At idle speed the automatic

transmission may not reach 160°F

(71°C) oil temperature.

• b. Check transmission temperature

gauge (77) for normal operating

temperature of 160°F to 220°F (71°C

to 104°C). If the transmission

temperature exceeds 220°F (104°C),

downshift to lower gear to avoid

overheating.

Gauge reads

300°F (149°C)

or more.

TM 08780B-10

2-114






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/


37 TRANSMISSION (Continued)

38 AIR RESERVOIR

• a. With engine off, listen for leaks

at all air reservoirs and reservoir

lines.

Any air leakage

present.

TM 08780B-10

2-115






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/


38 AIR RESERVOIR (Continued)

• b. Drain air reservoirs (78), (79),

(80), (81) and (82). Refer to

paragraph 3.5.

TM 08780B-10

2-116






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/


39 VEHICLE EXTERIOR

NOTE

• Recommended vehicle wash

intervals are based on the severity of

the corrosive environment. The

following areas have high

concentrations of vehicles for which

wash intervals must be adjusted to

more than an after operation

interval.

1. Continental United States

(CONUS)

2. Okinawa, Japan

3. Hawaii

4. Panama

5. Puerto Rico

6. Republic of Korea (ROK)

• Highly corrosive

environments include "severe" and

"extremely severe" corrosive

regions. A highly corrosive

environment does not refer only to

areas where the use of road salts or

other chemical de-icers is common,

high humidity areas and/or areas

with a high concentration of salt in

the air are also considered to be

highly corrosive.

TM 08780B-10

2-117






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/


39 VEHICLE EXTERIOR (Continued)

NOTE

Intervals listed in the following

chart are the minimum

recommended wash intervals based

on severity of corrosive areas.

These intervals should be adjusted

with regard to availability of

vehicles, personnel, fresh water and

wash rack facilities.

Recommended Wash Intervals by Seventy of Corrosive

Areas

Ranking Wash Intervals

Extremely Severe* Every 5 Days

Severe** Every 15 Days

Moderate Every 25 Days

* Within 0-75 miles of coastal area

** Beyond 75 miles from coastal area

• Wash exterior of vehicle

undercarriage and frame. Refer to

paragraph 3-6.

TM 08780B-10

2-118


Services (MK15 Wrecker/Recovery)




W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/


40 HYDRAULICS (MK15/15A1)

NOTE

Inspection for hydraulic leaks must

be performed with engine running

and AUXILIARY HYDRAULIC

selector valve engaged.

a. Inspect the A-frame, crane and

winch for

Any class III

hydraulic

leakage.

• • (1) Broken, cracked, or leaking

hydraulic hoses

• • (2) Bent, crushed, or leaking

hydraulic lines

• b. Inspect all hydraulic lines and

hoses are secure and fittings are not

loose.

• c. Check all valves and cylinders

for proper operation.

Valve or

cylinder will

not operate.

TM 08780B-10

2-119


Services (MK15 Wrecker/Recovery) (Continued)




W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/


40 HYDRAULICS (MK15/15A1) (Continued)

d. Check main control (1) for Controls,

malfunction,

bind, or do not

respond.

• • (1) Damage to casing.

• • (2) Damage or binding control

levers.

• • (3) Torn or ripped bellows and

switch boot.

• • (4) Malfunction or

misadjustment..

TM 08780B-10

2-120






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/


41 A-FRAME (MK15/15A1)

• • a. Inspect A-frame (2) for cracks,

broken welds, or damaged hydraulic

cylinder (3).

A-frame is

cracked, broken

welds are

found, or

hydraulic

cylinder is

damaged.

• • b. Check that hydraulic cylinder

(3) is retracted and clevis (4) is in

stowed position.

• • c. Check cable (5) for kinks,

broken strands, or wear.

Cable has more

than six wires

in one strand

that are broken.

TM 08780B-10

2-121






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/


41 A-FRAME (MK15/15A1) (Continued)

TM 08780B-10

2-122






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/


42 WINCH (MK15)

• USE LEATHER GLOVES

WHEN CHECKING WINCH

CABLE. INJURY TO HANDS

MAY RESULT IF GLOVES

ARE NOT WORN.

• DO NOT HOLD ONTO

WINCH CABLE IF TENSION

IS REQUIRED TO GUIDE

THE CABLE BACK ON THE

SPOOL. THE ASSISTANT

WILL HOLD THE CLEVIS,

NOT THE CABLE.

NEITHER THE OPERATOR

NOR THE ASSISTANT

SHOULD STAND WITHIN

ARMS LENGTH OF THE

SPOOL WHEN THE CABLE

IS BEING RETRIEVED.

• a. Unwind cable and check for

kinks, broken strands, or wear. Refer

to paragraph 2-20.

Evidence of

cable breaks,

kinks, broken

strands, or

wear.

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-123






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/


42 WINCH (MK15) (Continued)

• b. Check that winch cable shackle

(5) is not broken and pin (6) is secure

and in place.

Shackle is loose

on cable or

broken.

TM 08780B-10

2-124






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/


43 CRANE (MK15)

NOTE

Perform PMCS check No. 43c only

if crane is to be operated during

vehicle mission.

• a. Check crane (7) for cracks or

broken welds.

Cracks or

broken welds

are evident.

• b. Inspect boom hook (a) for

cracks.

Hook is

cracked.

• c. Check for hydraulic power to

crane by extending and retracting one

outrigger beam (9) approximately

one foot. Refer to paragraph 2-16.

Outrigger beam

does not

operate.

TM 08780B-10

2-125






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/


44 REMOTE CONTROL STOWAGE

COMPARTMENT (MK15)

• a. Check compartment (10) for

tom or damaged seal, water in



are clear.

• b. Check for missing remote

control unit (11) and cable (12).

NOTE

If remote unit is to be operated

during mission, perform PMCS step

No. 44c.

TM 08780B-10

2-126






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/


44 REMOTE CONTROL STOWAGE

COMPARTMENT (MK15) (Continued)

• c. Check remote control unit (11)

for proper operation. Refer to

paragraph 2-16.

TM 08780B-10

2-127


Services (MK15A1 Wrecker/Recovery)




W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/


44.1 HYDRAULICS (MK15A1)

NOTE


be performed with engine running,

AUXILIARY HYDRAULIC selector

valve engaged and MHC MAIN

POWER SWITCH ON.

a. Inspect Material Handling

Crane (MHC) for

Any class III

hydraulic

leakage.


hydraulic hoses.


hydraulic lines.

• b. Inspect to ensure that all

hydraulic lines and hoses are secure

and fittings are not loose.

TM 08780B-10

2-128


Services (MK15A1 Wrecker/Recovery) (Continued)




W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/


44.1 HYDRAULICS (MK15A1) (CONTINUED)

• c. Check all valves and

cylinders for proper operation.

Valve or

cylinder will

not operate.

d. Check MHC main control panel

(1) for

Controls

malfunction,

bind, or do not

respond.

• • (1) Damaged or binding

control levers.

• • (2) Loose or damaged

electrical connectors

• • (3) Damaged or missing pins

and other obvious damage in remote

control receptacle (2)

TM 08780B-10

2-129






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/


44.1 HYDRAULICS (MK15A1)(Continued)

e. Check passenger side outrigger

jack control panel (3) for damaged or

binding control levers.

Controls

malfunction,

bind, or do not

respond.

f. Check auxiliary control panel

(4) for

Controls

malfunction,

bind, or do not

respond.

• (1) Damaged or binding

control levers.

• (2) Loose or damaged

electrical connectors.

TM 08780B-10

2-130






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/


44.1 HYDRAULICS (MK15A1) (Continued)

• (3) Damaged or missing pins

and pinholes on winch remote

control receptacle (5).

Damaged or

missing pins are

found.

44.2 MATERIAL HANDLING CRANE (MK15A1)


broken welds.

Cracks or

broken welds

are evident.

• • b. Inspect hook block (7) for

cracks and other obvious damage.

Hook block is

damaged.

TM 08780B-10

2-131






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/



(Continued)

• • c. Check for hydraulic power to

crane by extending and retracting

both outrigger beams (8)

approximately one foot. Refer to

paragraph 2-17. Fully stow

outriggers after check.

Outrigger beam

does not

operate.

• • d. Check and ensure crane boom

and hook block are fully stowed.

Refer to paragraph 2-17.

• e. Check outrigger pads (9) for

damaged or missing retaining pins

and other obvious damage.

TM 08780B-10

2-132






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/



(Continued)

TM 08780B-10

2-133






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/


44.3 REMOTE CONTROL/STOWAGE

COMPARTMENT (MK15A1)

• a. Check all tool stowage

compartments (10) for water in

bottom of compartment or other


are clear.

• b. Check MHC remote control

compartment (11) for torn seal, water

in bottom of compartment, or other


are clear.

TM 08780B-10

2-134






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/



COMPARTMENT (MK15A1) (Continued)

• c. Check for missing MHC remote


• d. Check MHC remote control

unit cable (13) for cracked insulation

and damage to plugs on cable.

• e. Check MHC remote control

unit (12) for broken controls or other

obvious damage.

• f. Check receptacle (14) on MHC

remote control unit (12) for damaged

or missing pins.

NOTE

Perform PMCS check 44.3g only if

MHC is to be operated during

mission.

• g. Check MHC remote control

unit (12) for proper operation. Refer

to paragraph 2-17.

TM 08780B-10

2-135






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/




• h. Check winch remote control

stowage compartment (15) for torn

seal, water in bottom of compartment

or other obvious damage. Ensure

drain holes are clear.

• i. Check for missing winch

remote control unit (16) and cable

(17).

Control unit is

missing.

• j. Check winch remote control



TM 08780B-10

2-136






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/




• k. Check receptacle (18) on winch


or missing pins

Damaged or

missing pins are

found.

NOTE

Perform PMCS check 44.3 l only if

winch is to be operated during

mission.

• l. Check winch remote control


to paragraph 2-20.

Control unit

does not

operate.

TM 08780B-10

2-137






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/


44.4 MHC CABLE (MK15A1)

CABLE CAN BECOME FRAYED OR CONTAIN

BROKEN WIRES. WEAR HEAVY LEATHER-

PALMED WORK GLOVES WHEN HANDLING

CABLE. NEVER LET MOVING CABLE SLIDE

THROUGH HANDS, EVEN WHEN WEARING

GLOVES. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT

IN INJURY TO PERSONNEL.

• a. Pay out MHC cable (14)

completely and inspect for crushing,

sharp bends and abrasions.

MHC cable is

damaged or

excessively

worn.

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-138






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/


44.4 MHC CABLE (MK15A1) (Continued)

• b. Inspect MHC cable (14) for

broken wires or kinks.

Cable has more

than three

broken wires

per 3-inch

section on same

strand. The

maximum

number of

broken wires

shall not occur

in any two

consecutive 3-

inch sections of

cable. That is,

if six wires are

broken in one

3-inch section

of cable, none

would be

allowed in the

next

consecutive 3-

inch section.

TM 08780B-10

2-139






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/


44.5 MHC OVERLOAD SHUTDOWN BOX (MK15A1)

• a. Check security of electrical

connectors on overload shutdown

box (19).

• b. Inspect electrical wiring for

cracking, fraying, or chafing.

Wiring is

frayed, cracking

or excessively

worn.

TM 08780B-10

2-140


Services (MK16 Fifth Wheel Semi-Trailer Adapter)




W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/


45 HYDRAULICS (MK16)

NOTE





a. Inspect winch for Any class III

hydraulic

leakage.


hydraulic hoses.


hydraulic lines.

• b. Inspect that all hydraulic lines

and hoses are secure and fittings are

not loose.

TM 08780B-10

2-141


Services (MK16 Fifth Wheel Semi-Trailer Adapter) (Continued)




W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/


46 FIFTH WHEEL (MK16)

• • a. Check coupler jaws (1) for

damage and proper operation.

Jaws are broken

or mechanism

is damaged.

• • b. Check primary release handle

(2), secondary release handle (3) and

linkage and locking plungers for

damage and proper operation.

Handles will

not operate

properly.

• c. Check for loose mounting of

fifth wheelbase (4) at frame.

• d. Check fifth wheel ramps (5) for

loose mounting or damage.

• e. Check fifth wheel support

blocks (6) for loose mounting or

damage.

TM 08780B-10

2-142






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/


47 TRAILER AIR BRAKE HOSES AND GLAD

HANDS (MK16)

• • a. Check trailer air brake hoses (6)

for cracks, cuts, or other obvious

damage.

Air hose(s) are

damaged or

cannot be

connected to

trailer.

TM 08780B-10

2-143






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/


47 TRAILER AIR BRAKE HOSES AND GLAD

HANDS (MK16) (Continued)

• • b. Check glad hands (7) for

damage or missing seals.

Glad hand(s)

cannot be

connected or

seal is damaged

or missing.

48 TRAILER ELECTRICAL CABLE (MK16)

• • a. Check trailer electrical cable (8)

for damage.

Cable is

damaged and

cannot be

connected.

49 WINCH (MK16)

USE LEATHER GLOVES WHEN

CHECKING WINCH CABLE.

INJURY TO HANDS MAY

RESULT IF GLOVES ARE NOT

WORN.

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-144






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/



DO NOT HOLD ONTO THE

WINCH CABLE IF TENSION IS

REQUIRED TO GUIDE THE

CABLE BACK ON THE SPOOL.

THE ASSISTANT WILL HOLD

THE CLEVIS, NOT THE CABLE.

NEITHER THE OPERATOR NOR

ASSISTANT SHOULD STAND

WITHIN ARMS LENGTH OF THE

SPOOL WHEN THE CABLE IS

BEING RETRIEVED.

• a. Unwind cable (9) and check for

kinks and broken strands or wear.


Evidence of

able breaks,

kinks, broken

strands or wear.

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-145






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/



• b. Check that winch cable shackle

(10) is not broken and pin (11) is

secure and in place.

Shackle is loose

on cable or

broken.

TM 08780B-10

2-146






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/


50 REMOTE CONTROL/STOWAGE

COMPARTMENT (MK16)

a. Check compartment (12) for

water in bottom of compartment or

other obvious damage. Insure drain

holes are clear.

• b. Check compartment (13) for

torn or damaged seal, water in



are clear.

TM 08780B-10

2-147






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/




• c. Check for missing remote


Control unit is

missing.

• d. Check remote control unit (14)


paragraph 2-24.

Control unit

does not

operate.

TM 08780B-10

2-148


Services (MK17 Dropside Cargo W/Crane)




W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/


51 HYDRAULICS (MK17)

NOTE





a. Inspect crane for Any class III

hydraulic

leakage.


hydraulic hoses.


hydraulic lines.

• b. Inspect that all hydraulic lines

and hoses are secure and fittings are

not loose.


for proper operation

Valves or

cylinders will

not operate.

d. Check main controls (1) for Controls

malfunction,

bind, or do not

respond.

TM 08780B-10

2-149


Services (MK17 Dropside Cargo W/Crane) (Continued)




W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/


51 HYDRAULICS (MK17) (Continued)

• • (1) Damage to casing.

• • (2) Damage or binding control

levers.

• • (3) Torn or ripped bellows and

switch boot.

• • (4) Malfunction or

misadjustment.

TM 08780B-10

2-150






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/


52 CRANE (MK17)

NOTE

Perform PMCS check #52c only if

crane is to be operated during

vehicle mission.


broken welds.

Cracks or

broken welds

are evident.

• b. Inspect boom hook (3) for

cracks.

Hook is

cracked.

• c. Check for hydraulic power to

crane by extending and retracting one

outrigger beam (4) approximately

one foot. Refer to paragraph 2-25.

Outrigger beam

does not

operate.

TM 08780B-10

2-151






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/


52 CRANE (MK17) (Continued)

• d. Check rear landing leg (5) for

damage.

53 CARGO BODY (MK17)

• a. Check for broken latches (6) or

missing lockpins (7).

• b. Check for broken, bent, or

damaged hinge pins (8).

• c. Check that side panels (9) and

end panels (10) are not bent or

broken and have no broken welds.

• • d. Inspect cargo cover for tears or

rips.

TM 08780B-10

2-152






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/


53 CARGO BODY (MK17) (Continued)

TM 08780B-10

2-153






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/



COMPARTMENT (MK17)

• a. Check all compartments (11)

for water in bottom of compartment

or other obvious damage. Ensure

drain holes are clear.

• b. Check compartment (12) for

torn or damaged seal, water in



are clear.

TM 08780B-10

2-154


Services (MK17 Dropside Cargo w/Crane) (Continued)




W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/




• c. Check for missing remote


NOTE

Perform PMCS check #54d only it

crane is to be operated during

mission.

• d. Check remote control unit (13)


paragraph 2-25.

TM 08780B-10

2-155


Services (MK17A1 Dropside Cargo W/Crane)




W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/


54.1 HYDRAULICS (MK17A1)

NOTE


be performed with engine running,

AUXILIARY HYDRAULIC selector

valve engaged and MHC MAIN

POWER switch ON.

a. Inspect Material Handling

Crane (MHC) for

Any class III

hydraulic

leakage.


hydraulic hoses.


hydraulic lines.

TM 08780B-10

2-156


Services (MK17A1 Dropside Cargo W/Crane) (Continued)




W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/



• b. Inspect to ensure that all

hydraulic lines and hoses are secure

and fittings are not loose.


for proper operation.

Valve or

cylinder will

not operate.

d. Check MHC main control panel

(1) for

TM 08780B-10

2-157






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/



• • (1) Damaged or binding

control levers.

Controls

malfunction,

bind, or do not

respond.

• • (2) Loose or damaged

electrical connectors.

• • (3) Damaged or missing

terminal pins and other obvious

damage in remote control receptacle

(2).

TM 08780B-10

2-158






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/



• • e. Check passenger side outrigger

jack control panel (3) for damaged or

binding control levers.

Controls

malfunction,

bind, or do not

respond.

TM 08780B-10

2-159






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/




broken welds.

Cracks or

broken welds

are evident.

• • b. Inspect hook block (5) for

cracks and other obvious damage.

Hook block is

damaged.

• • c. Check for hydraulic power to

crane by extending and retracting

both outrigger beams (6)

approximately one foot. Refer to

paragraph 2-26. Fully stow

outriggers after check.

Outrigger beam

does not

operate.

• • d. Check and ensure crane boom

and hook block are fully stowed.


TM 08780B-10

2-160






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/



• e. Check rear landing leg (7) for

damage.

• f. Check outrigger pads (8) for

damaged or missing retaining pins

and other obvious damage.

TM 08780B-10

2-161






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/



COMPARTMENT (MK17A1)

• a. Check all tool stowage

compartments (9) for water in bottom

of compartment or other obvious

damage. Ensure drain holes are

clear.

• b. Check MHC remote control

compartment (10) for torn seal, water

in bottom of compartment, or other


are clear.

TM 08780B-10

2-162






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/




• • c. Check for missing MHC remote


• • d. Check MHC remote control



• • e. Check MHC remote control

unit (11) for broken controls or other

obvious damage.

• • f. Check receptacle (13) on MHC


or missing pins.

TM 08780B-10

2-163






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/




NOTE

Perform PMCS check 54.3g only if

MHC is to be operated during

mission.

• g. Check MHC remote control


to paragraph 2-26.

54.4 MHC CABLE (MK17A1)

CABLE CAN BECOME FRAYED

OR CONTAIN BROKEN WIRES.

WEAR HEAVY LEATHER-

PALMED WORK GLOVES WHEN

HANDLING CABLE. NEVER

LET MOVING CABLE SLIDE

THROUGH HANDS, EVEN

WHEN WEARING GLOVES.

FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY

RESULT IN INJURY TO

PERSONNEL.

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-164






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/



• a. Pay out MHC cable (14)

completely and inspect for crushing,

sharp bends, and abrasions.

MHC crane

cable is

damaged or

excessively

worn.

TM 08780B-10

2-165






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/



• b. Inspect MHC cable (14) for

broken wires or kinks.

Cable has more

than three

broken wires

per 3-inch

section on same

strand. The

maximum

number of

broken wires

shall not occur

in any two

consecutive 3-

inch sections of

cable. That is,

if six wires are

broken in one

3-inch section

of cable, none

would be

allowed in the

next

consecutive 3-

inch section.

TM 08780B-10

2-166






W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/


54.5 MHC OVERLOAD SHUTDOWN BOX (MK17A1)

• a. Check security of electrical

connectors on overload shutdown

box (15).

• b. Inspect electrical wiring for

cracking, fraying, or chafing.

Wiring is

frayed, cracking

or excessively

worn.

TM 08780B-10

2-167


Services (Special Purpose Kit)




W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/


SPECIAL PURPOSE KITS

The following checks for the special

purpose kits shall not render the

vehicle inoperable. Only the kit will

be reported as inoperable.

55 MACHINE GUN MOUNT

• Check machine gun mount (1) for

proper operation and lubrication.

Refer to TM 08686A-13&P/l.

Gun mount will

not rotate or

lock into

position.

TM 08780B-10

2-168


Services (Special Purpose Kits) (Continued)




W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/


56 EXTENDED PINTLE

• Check front and rear extended pintles

(2 and 3) for cracks or broken welds.

Make sure hook is secure and locking

mechanism operates properly.

Pintle has

cracks or

broken welds,

or locking

mechanism is

damaged.

TM 08780B-10

2-169


Services (Special Purpose Kits) (Continued)




W-Weekly M-Monthly

Item

No

Interval




For Readiness

Reporting

Equipment Is

Not Ready/


57 REAR BODY TOW UNIT

• a. Check tow unit (4) for

cracks or broken welds.

Tow unit has

cracks or

broken welds.

• b. Check tow unit for damaged

air lines (5). Inspect glad hands (6)

for missing or rotted seals.

Air lines or

seals are

damaged,

missing, or

rotting.

TM 08780-10

2-170

Section III. Operation Under Normal Conditions

2-13. MK48 OPERATION

a. Entering Cab and Seat Adjustment

• DO NOT USE STEERING WHEEL FOR A HAND

GRIP TO ENTER THE LVS CAB WHEN ENGINE IS

RUNNING. USE OF STEERING WHEEL FOR A

HAND GRIP WILL CAUSE SUDDEN VIOLENT

JERKING OF THE CAB IF PARKING BRAKE IS NOT

ENGAGED. THIS MAY RESULT IN SEVERE INJURY

TO OPERATOR AND CREW.

• BEFORE STARTING VEHICLE, MAKE CERTAIN

THAT SEAT ADJUSTMENT ALLOWS READY REACH

TO ALL CONTROLS.

(1) Enter cab using step (1) and grab handles

(2).

WARNING

TM 08780-10

2-171

(2) Adjust seat height as needed with height

adjustment lever (4).

(3) Adjust seat forward or backwards as needed

using adjustment control (5).

NOTE

Operator should be able to easily reach trailer handbrake control

lever (18) with seat adjusted and seatbelt and shoulder harness

on.

(4) Buckle seatbelt and shoulder harness

together by pulling on strap (6) and engaging buckle (7). Pull on

strap (8) to tighten seatbelt and shoulder harness. Make certain

seat adjustment allows easy reach of trailer handbrake control lever

(18) and parking brake valve (10).

TM 08780-10

2-172

(5) To release seatbelt and shoulder harness pull

up on buckle latch, (9).

NOTE

• LVSA1 series vehicles have new style 3-point seat belts.

Perform steps (6) thru (10) if operating LVSA1 series

vehicle only.

• The seat belt/shoulder belt is two belts combined together.

The belt below the buckle is the seat belt, the belt above

the buckle is the shoulder belt.

(6) Push seat belt/shoulder belt clip (10) into

buckle (11) until a click is heard.

(7) Place seat belt (12) as low on hips as

possible.

NOTE

Seat belt does not have self-adjusting lock. Take slack out of seat

belt by pulling on shoulder belt end. Adjust shoulder belt until

snug against chest (no more than one inch away).

TM 08780-10

2-173

(8) Pull shoulder belt (13) until the seat belt (12)

fits snug at drivers hips.

(9) Adjust the shoulder belt (13) length by

releasing latch (14) and adjusting shoulder belt no more than one

inch away from chest. Engage latch to hold adjustment.

(10) To release the seat belt/shoulder belt clip

(10), push in release button (15) and pull clip from buckle (11).

b. Starting the Engine Above 32° F (0°C)

NOTE

• For starting the engine below 32° F (0°C), refer to

paragraph 2-13, section c, below. For starting the engine

in extremely cold weather, refer to Section IV, paragraph

2-33, Operation Under Unusual Conditions.

• Before attempting to operate vehicle, be sure to perform

the preventive maintenance checks and services (PMCS)

in Table 2-1 thru 2-5. Also, you should be familiar with

all controls and indicators in paragraph 2-1.

TM 08780-10

2-174

(1) Apply parking brake by pulling out on

PARKING BRAKE valve (10).

NOTE

LOCK button (11) on transmission shifter handle must be

depressed when shifting between ranges.

(2) Place transmission shifter (12) in neutral (N)

position.

BEFORE STARTING VEHICLE BE SURE ALL PERSONNEL

ARE CLEAR OF ARTICULATION JOINT AND OF THE

VEHICLE.

WARNING

TM 08780-10

2-175

FOR LVS MK15A1 AND MK17A1 SERIES VEHICLES ONLY,

ENSURE CRANE POWER SWITCH IS IN THE "OFF"

POSITION PRIOR TO STARTING ENGINE. FAILURE TO

COMPLY MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO OVERLOAD

SHUTDOWN SYSTEM.

NOTE

If air pressure in the brake system is low, a warning buzzer and

light in vehicle cab will activate. This is normal for initial starts.

Buzzer and light will shut off once air pressure builds to a safe

pressure for brake operation.

(3) Turn engine START switch (13) to START

position. Release switch (13) once engine starts, allowing switch

to return to ON position.

CAUTION

TM 08780-10

2-176

• IF ENGINE FAILS TO START WITHIN 30 SECONDS,

TURN STARTER SWITCH TO OFF AND ALLOW

STARTER MOTOR TO COOL AT LEAST TWO

MINUTES BEFORE TRYING AGAIN. FAILURE TO

DO SO COULD RESULT IN THE STARTER BEING

DAMAGED.

• IF STARTER DISENGAGES, WAIT UNTIL ENGINE

STOPS FIRING AND STARTER STOPS SPINNING

BEFORE TRYING TO START ENGINE AGAIN.

NOTE

Upon startup, the engine must be operated at low idle (690-700

rpm) for one minute.

(4) If engine does not start on first try, engine

START switch must be turned to OFF before making next attempt.

(5) Check the following gauges for their proper

readings:

• Oil pressure (14) reads 5-49 psi (34.47-337.85 kPa) at idle.

• Battery gauge (15) reads 26-28 volts.

• Water temperature (16) reads 160° - 220° F (71° - 104° C)

after warmed up.

• Air pressure gauge (17), indicator light (14) and low air

buzzer will stop at approximately 65 psi (448.175 kPa).

c. Starting the Engine Below 32° F (0° C)

NOTE

Before attempting to operate the vehicle, be sure to perform the

"B"-Before Operation Preventive Maintenance Checks and

Services in tables 2-1 thru 2-7, as necessary.

CAUTION

TM 08780-10

2-177

(1) Apply parking brake by pulling out parking

brake valve (10).


position.

FOR LVS MK15A1 AND MK17A1 SERIES VEHICLES ONLY,

ENSURE CRANE POWER SWITCH IS IN "OFF" POSITION

PRIOR TO STARTING ENGINE. FAILURE TO COMPLY

MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO OVERLOAD SHUTDOWN

SYSTEM.

(3) Turn engine switch (13) to ON position.

DO NOT PRESS ETHER START BUTTON MORE THAN

THREE TIMES IN A SINGLE STARTING ATTEMPT TO

PREVENT SEVERE ENGINE DAMAGE.

NOTE

• If air pressure in the brake system is low, a warning

buzzer and light in vehicle will activate. This is normal

for initial starts. Buzzer and light will shut off once air

pressure builds to a safe pressure for brake operation.

• Upon startup, the engine must be operated at low idle

(690-700 rpm) for two minutes.

(4) Press ETHER START button (19) once for

3 seconds and release. Wait 3 seconds more, then turn ENGINE

switch (13) to START for about 10 seconds or until engine starts.

CAUTION

CAUTION

TM 08780-10

2-178

(5) If engine fails to start, return engine switch

to OFF position, then to ON position, press ETHER START

button (19) for 3 seconds, wait 3 seconds, then press ETHER

START button for 3 more seconds. Wait 3 seconds more, then

turn ENGINE switch (13) to START for about 10 seconds or until

engine starts.

(6) If engine fails to start, return engine switch

to OFF position, then to ON position, press ETHER START

button (19) for 3 more seconds, wait 3 seconds, press ETHER

START button for 3 more seconds. Wait 3 seconds, then press

ETHER START button again for 3 more seconds. Wait 3 seconds

more, then turn ENGINE switch (13) to START for about 10

seconds or until engine starts.

(7) If engine fails to start, repeat step (6) up to

five times. If engine does not start after these starting attempts,

notify Organizational Maintenance.

(8) After engine starts, continue normal

operating instructions as in section b, step (5).

TM 08780-10

2-179

d. Driving. After starting engine and monitoring all

instruments for normal indication, the vehicle may be operated as

follows:

(1) Turn on necessary lighting and controls as

conditions require. Adjust seat, mirrors and fasten seatbelt.

SHIFTING OF TRANSFER CASE MUST BE DONE ONLY

WHEN THE TRANSMISSION IS IN NEUTRAL (N) AND

VEHICLE IS STOPPED. OTHERWISE, DAMAGE TO

TRANSFER CASE WILL RESULT.

(2) Select LOW or DIRECT (HIGH) range on

transfer shifter (20) as required by driving conditions. DIRECT

(HIGH) range is used during normal highway type driving

conditions, city hauling, short runs and for stop-and-go type

driving. Low range is used for severe load and grade conditions,

off highway operation, or where creeping speed is needed.

Shifting must be done only when the vehicle is stopped and

transmission is in neutral.

NOTE

Transfer shifter (20) should shift smoothly from LOW to

DIRECT (HIGH) with transmission in neutral (N) range.

However, if shifting is hard to do, place transmission in drive (D)

range until engagement is felt. Return transmission to neutral

(N) range. Transfer shifter (20) should then shift smoothly. If

necessary, repeat the neutral-drive shifting until transfer shifts

easily.

DO NOT ALLOW THE VEHICLE TO COAST IN NEUTRAL.

THIS CAN RESULT IN SEVERE TRANSMISSION DAMAGE

AND UNSAFE OPERATION BECAUSE ENGINE BRAKING

IS NOT AVAILABLE DURING NEUTRAL COASTS.

CAUTION

WARNING

TM 08780-10

2-180

(3) With engine idling, depress lock button (11)

and select proper gear range with shifter (12). Each drive range is

as described in table 2-8.

TM 08780-10

2-181

TABLE 2-8. TRANSMISSION SHIFT RANGES

GEAR DESCRIPTIONS

R Reverse (R). To move vehicle

backward, idle the engine and shift

the selector to reverse position.

Depressing accelerator will then

cause the vehicle to back up.

Completely stop the vehicle when

shifting from forward to reverse or

reverse to forward.

N Neutral (N). Place the shift selector

at the neutral position before

starting the engine. Shifting from

neutral should be done at engine

idle. Apply vehicle parking brakes

and shift to neutral any time the

engine will be running while the

operator is not at the controls.

D Drive (D). The transmission will start in first and

automatically upshift at the proper speeds thru all gears.

Downshifts also will occur automatically in relation to

speed and throttle position.

D-3 Drive (3). In this range, the transmission will start in first

and automatically upshift, at the proper speeds, to third gear.


and automatically upshift, at the proper speed, to second

gear.


gear. No automatic upshift will occur unless the engine's

governed speed is exceeded.

(4) Select DRIVE LINE LOCKUP Lever (21)

position, as required by driving conditions. Drive line lockup

positions are described as follows:

TM 08780-10

2-182

• DO NOT OPERATE IN LOCK UNLESS TIRE

SLIPPAGE IS EXPECTED.

• SHIFT ONLY WITH VEHICLE STOPPED.

• ENGAGING AXLE LOCKUP OR XFR (TRANSFER)

CASE LOCKUP WITH VEHICLE IN MOTION OR

WITH WHEELS SPINNING WILL RESULT IN

DRIVELINE DAMAGE.

(a) Select UNLOCK position for

NORMAL DRIVING CONDITIONS.

(b) Select either AXLE LOCKUP or

XFR CASE LOCKUP position for slippery conditions or where

wheel spin is expected.

(c) When AXLE LOCKUP or XFR

CASE LOCKUP does not provide sufficient traction, stop vehicle

and shift to the alternate lockup position.

(d) Select XFR CASE LOCKUP

position when rear body unit is uncoupled.

(5) Release parking brake by pushing

PARKING BRAKE (10) valve IN. The vehicle is ready to drive.

CAUTION

TM 08780-10

2-183

e. Basic Driving Guidelines

INCREASED EFFORT WILL BE REQUIRED TO TURN

STEERING WHEEL IF THERE IS A FAILURE OF

HYDRAULIC STEERING SYSTEM OR THE ENGINE STOPS

RUNNING. STOP VEHICLE AS SOON AS ROAD

CONDITIONS PERMIT. OPERATING THE VEHICLE WITH

IMPAIRED STEERING COULD RESULT IN SERIOUS

INJURY OR DEATH.

(1) Check gauges often to be sure they are

registering within normal operating range.

(2) Avoid oversteering. The steering wheel

should not be held at full turn for more than 10 seconds. Oil over

heating and power steering damage can result. Become familiar

with steering characteristics of vehicle before attempting

maneuvers in limited space.

WARNING

TM 08780-10

2-184

f. Highway Driving

SPEED LIMITS POSTED ON CURVES REFLECT SPEEDS

THAT ARE CONSIDERED SAFE FOR AUTOMOBILES.

HEAVY TRUCKS WITH A HIGH CENTER OF GRAVITY

CAN ROLL OVER AT THESE SPEED LIMITS. USE

CAUTION AND REDUCE YOUR SPEED BELOW THE

POSTED LIMIT BEFORE ENTERING A CURVE. FAILURE

TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN VEHICLE CRASH AND

INJURY TO PERSONNEL.

When weather and traffic conditions permit, maintain legal

highway speed in gear range D (Drive). The engine will run below

governed speed of 2100 RPM and fuel consumption will be less

than at higher speeds.

g. Driving Up Steep Grades

(1) The engine works hardest when carrying a

load uphill. Proper use of gear ranges will minimize stress on the

engine.

(2) Unless uphill grade is extreme, begin in gear

range D (Drive). If there is enough power for a safe and

satisfactory road speed, remain in D range and allow transmission

to shift automatically.

(3) If the uphill grade causes a steady decrease

in road speed and engine RPM, the transmission can be manually

downshifted to a lower gear. The following are recommended

speeds for downshifting. Do not downshift above these speeds:

Gear Range Maximum Vehicle Speed

D to 3 35 MPH

3 to 2 24 MPH

2 to 1 13 MPH

WARNING

TM 08780-10

2-185

Once grade is crested, return shifter to D (Drive) position.

h. Driving Down Steep Grades

(1) Driving a loaded vehicle down steep grades

requires the operator to use all of the vehicle braking components

available to maintain a safe road speed and engine RPM.

(2) Use the engine to aid braking by manually

downshifting transmission to next lower gear range. If the vehicle

is exceeding the maximum speed for that gear range, use the

service brakes and Jacobs brake to slow the vehicle down so the

transmission can be downshifted safely. At no time should engine

speed go above 2100 RPM. See section G, step (3) for

recommended speeds for downshifting. Do not downshift above

these speeds.

(3) Plan ahead to use the Jacobs brake for

additional speed control when driving in an area known to have

steep downgrades. See paragraph 2-13, section i.

i. Using the Jacobs Brake

APPLY ENGINE BRAKE ONLY WHEN VEHICLE TIRES

HAVE GOOD TRACTION. APPLICATION OF ENGINE

BRAKE ON SLICK SURFACES MAY RESULT IN AN

ACCIDENT THROUGH LOSS OF VEHICLE CONTROL.

• THE JACOBS BRAKE SHOULD ONLY BE USED

WITH THE TRANSFER CASE IN LOW RANGE

WHEN CONDITIONS EXIST REQUIRING USE OF

JACOBS BRAKE. FULL TIME OPERATION OF

JACOBS BRAKE WITH TRANSFER CASE IN LOW

RANGE COULD RESULT IN DAMAGE TO

POWERTRAIN.

WARNING

CAUTION

TM 08780-10

2-186

• DO NOT ALLOW ENGINE SPEED TO GO ABOVE

2100 RPM WHEN GOING DOWN A GRADE.

DAMAGE TO ENGINE WILL RESULT.

• THE ENGINE BRAKE LOSES EFFECTIVENESS

WHEN BEING PUSHED BY A LOADED VEHICLE

DOWN A GRADE. USE SERVICE BRAKES AND

MANUALLY DOWNSHIFT RANGE SELECTOR AS

NECESSARY ON LONG GRADES TO KEEP VEHICLE

SPEED UNDER CONTROL.

(1) Set Jacobs Brake HIGH/LOW switch (22) to

LOW. Turn switch (23) to ON. Jacobs Brake indicator (24) will

light when brake is turned on.

(2) Engine brake will automatically engage to

slow vehicle when accelerator is released.

(3) If more engine braking is needed, turn

HIGH/LOW switch (22) to HIGH position.

(4) When no engine braking is needed, turn

HIGH/LOW switch (22) on LOW and turn ON/OFF switch (23) to

OFF.

TM 08780-10

2-187

j. Using Trailer Brake Hand Control Valve

DO NOT USE TRAILER BRAKES (25) FOR PARKING, USE

PARKING BRAKES (10). TRAILER BRAKES COULD

RELEASE ALLOWING THE VEHICLE TO MOVE POSSIBLY

CAUSING INJURY.

AFTER USE, ALWAYS RETURN TRAILER BRAKE HAND

CONTROL ARM (18) TO OFF POSITION (ALL THE WAY

FORWARD) OR TRAILER BRAKES WILL DRAG, CAUSING

EXCESSIVE WEAR.

(1) The trailer brake hand control (18) will

apply trailer service brakes only.

(2) Apply trailer brakes by pulling hand control

arm (18) to the rear. Release brakes by pushing hand control arm

(18) forward.

WARNING

CAUTION

TM 08780-10

2-188

k. Off-Highway Driving

(1) Before entering an area where poor traction

conditions are likely to occur, bring vehicle to a complete stop,

place transmission in neutral and move lock lever (21) from

UNLOCK to the AXLE LOCKUP position. Indicator (26) will

come on when in this position.

(2) If the axle lockup position does not supply

the necessary traction, bring vehicle to a complete stop. Shift lock

lever to XFR CASE LOCKUP. Indicator (27) will come on in this

position.

(3) After regaining normal traction, bring

vehicle to complete stop. Move lock lever (21) to the UNLOCK

position. Indicator (26 or 27) will then shut off. It may take a few

feet of slow forward travel before all sliding clutches disengage.

I. Parking and Engine Shut Down

(1) To park vehicle, come to a complete stop

with the front wheels as straight as possible.

(2) Place transmission shifter (12) in neutral

(N).

(3) Pull parking brake valve (10) OUT to

engage parking brakes.

TM 08780-10

2-189

BEFORE SHUTTING DOWN ENGINE, RUN AT 800-1000

RPM FOR 4 TO 5 MINUTES TO ALLOW TURBOCHARGER

TO SLOW DOWN. FAILURE TO DO SO WILL RESULT IN

TURBOCHARGER DAMAGE.

• RELEASE STEERING WHEEL AND KEEP HANDS

CLEAR OF THE STEERING WHEEL UNTIL ENGINE

HAS COMPLETELY STOPPED RUNNING.

STEERING WHEEL MAY TURN SUDDENLY AND

CAB WILL JERK AFTER SHUT DOWN.

• OPERATOR AND CREW MEMBERS MUST LOOK

FOR AND DIRECT ALL PERSONNEL TO STAND

CLEAR OF THE CAB UNTIL ENGINE IS FULLY

STOPPED. CAB MAY JERK VIOLENTLY MOMENTS

AFTER ENGINE HAS STOPPED.

(4) Hold engine stop switch (28) down until

engine stops. Buzzer will sound and low oil/water indicator (29)

will come on. Turn engine START switch (13) to the OFF

position. Turn off all controls and lighting.

(5) After engine shutdown, turn steering wheel

slightly in each direction. This will relieve pressure in the steering

system.

CAUTION

WARNING

TM 08780-10

2-190

m. Slave Starting Procedure

(1) Position left side of slaving vehicle next to

the left side of vehicle being started. Stop engine of slaving

vehicle.

(2) Remove cover (29) from slave receptacle

(30) on both vehicles. Connect slave cable (31) to slaving vehicle.

Connect other end to slaved vehicle.

(3) Start engine of slaving vehicle. Refer to

section a.

TM 08780-10

2-191

(4) After engine starts and is running smoothly,

disconnect slave cable (31) from slave receptacles (30) on both

vehicles. Install cover (29) and stow cable (31).

(5) Observe battery indicator, if indicator reads

less than 24 volts in either vehicle, notify Organizational

Maintenance.

n. Priming Fuel System

NOTE

It may be necessary to prime the fuel system if the vehicle has

run out of fuel.

(1) Push in knob (32) and turn counterclockwise

until knob (32) can be pulled out.

(2) Push and pull knob (32) on priming pump

(33) until a resistance is felt.

(3) Push knob (32) in and turn clockwise until

locked.

IF ENGINE FAILS TO START WITHIN 30 SECONDS, TURN

STARTER SWITCH OFF AND ALLOW STARTER MOTOR

TO COOL AT LEAST TWO MINUTES BEFORE TRYING

AGAIN. FAILURE TO DO SO COULD RESULT IN THE

STARTER BEING DAMAGED.

(4) Attempt to start engine. Refer to section b in

this paragraph. If engine fails to start, repeat steps (1) thru (3) as

necessary.

CAUTION

TM 08780-10

2-192

2-14. OPERATION OF VEHICLE LIGHTS

a. Operating Lighting Systems. The following

illustrations explain the functions and positions for operation of the

lighting system.

Depending on operating conditions, switch (1) must be placed in

one of five positions: STOP LIGHTS, SERVICE DRIVE, OFF,

BLACKOUT MARKER, or BLACKOUT DRIVE. Then switch

(3) must be turned to provide desired lighting.

Operate switch as follows:

TM 08780-10

2-193

NOTE

To move main switch (1) from OFF to any ON position except

blackout marker, unlock switch (2) must be lifted to "unlock"

position.

(1) Pull unlock switch (2) up and move main

switch (1) to desired function.

(2) Release unlock switch (2). This will lock

main switch (1) in position.

(3) Move auxiliary switch (3) to desired

function.

Service Drive

TM 08780-10

2-194

Off

TM 08780-10

2-195

b. Operating Auxiliary Lights. The following lights

will be operational only when the main switch (1) is in the Service

Drive or Stop Light positions:

All Auxiliary Lights

• Clearance Lights

• Dome Lights

• Work Lights

• Beacon Light

TM 08780-10

2-196

2-15. POWER UNIT AND TRAILER SEPARATION

a. Uncoupling Power Unit From Trailer

AFTER POWER UNIT AND TRAILER ARE SEPARATED,

POWER UNIT MUST BE OPERATED WITH EXTREME

CARE. DRIVE ONLY ON LEVEL TERRAIN AT SPEEDS

LESS THAN 5 MPH (8.0 KM). DO NOT APPLY BRAKES

SUDDENLY OR DRIVE OVER UNEVEN TERRAIN. POWER

UNIT MAY ROLL FORWARD ONTO ITS CAB.

(1) Select a firm, level surface to work on.

Allow enough room to maneuver power unit after separation.

(2) Apply parking brake valve (1) and place

transmission shifter (2) in (N) neutral.

(3) Turn off engine and place transfer case

shifter (3) in neutral. This is halfway between DIRECT (HIGH)

and LOW range.

(4) On MK17 trailers, lower the rear landing leg

(4) as follows:

WARNING

TM 08780-10

2-197

REAR LANDING LEG IS HEAVY. CARE MUST BE TAKEN

WHEN SWINGING INTO POSITION TO AVOID INJURY.

(a) Remove quick release retainer (5)

and pull pin (6) out.

(b) Lower landing leg (4) and insert pin

(6) in rear bracket hole (7). Install retainer (5) in pin (6).

(c) Remove quick release retainer (8)

and pull pin (9) out. Allow leg (10) to lower to ground.

(d) Adjust leg (10) so holes align. Insert

pin (9) in leg and install retainer (8).

WARNING

TM 08780-10

2-198

LANDING LEGS ARE HEAVY. STAY CLEAR OF LEG

WHEN SWINGING INTO POSITION TO AVOID INJURY.

(7) Lower landing legs (11) into place as

follows:

(a) Remove clip (12). Pull crank handle

(13) from its stowed position and place in cranking position.

(b) Turn crank handle (13) to loosen

landing leg (11).

(c) Have helper raise landing leg (11)

out of its stowage bracket (14). Turn crank handle (13) to allow

landing leg (11) to clear bracket (14). Lower leg until it is just

above the ground.

(d) Repeat steps (a) thru (c) for

remaining leg.

NOTE

• Install support braces between landing legs first.

• Flat side of support braces go against mounting pins.

WARNING

TM 08780-10

2-199

(e) On the MK14/14A1, MK15/15A1

and MK17/17A1, remove support braces (15) from right frame

rail. On the MK16/16A1, remove support braces (15) in front of

the winch. Install braces (15) between landing legs (11) as shown.

(f) Turn crank handle (13) until support

pad (16) touches ground. Then turn crank handle three more turns

to support trailer's load.

• IF TRAILER IS HEAVILY LOADED AT THE REAR,

IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO PLACE SUPPORTS

BEHIND NO. 4 AXLE. THIS WILL PREVENT

TRAILER FROM TIPPING BACK AFTER

SEPARATION.

CAUTION

TM 08780-10

2-200

• AFTER ALL AIR LINES HAVE BEEN SEPARATED,

MAKE SURE THEY ARE IN FRONT OF THE

PROPELLER SHAFT SUPPORT CHAIN. AIR LINES

COULD CATCH ON CHAIN AND CAUSE DAMAGE

TO LINES.

(8) Separate all airlines (17) by pulling back on

quick disconnect sleeves (18). Cover all openings with plugs (19).

(9) Unscrew electrical cable (20), ABS cable

(21) and separate from receptacle. Cover receptacle opening with

cover (22).

NOTE

• Clean quick disconnect sleeves with solvent before

disconnecting.

• Only two hydraulic lines are present on the MK17/17A1.

(10) On the MK15/15A1, MK16/16A1 and

MK17/17A1, disconnect hydraulic lines (22) by pulling back on

TM 08780-10

2-201

quick disconnect sleeves (23). Clean ends of hydraulic lines (22)

and inside of quick disconnect sleeves (23) with solvent. Cover

openings with plugs (24).

(11) Remove eight nuts (25), lockwashers (26)

and capscrews (27) to separate propeller shafts (28 and 29). Allow

propeller shaft (29) to rest on support chain (30).

FAILURE TO USE LOCKOUT STRUTS COULD CAUSE

POWER UNIT TO ROLL FORWARD ONTO ITS CAB AFTER

SEPARATION.

WARNING

TM 08780-10

2-202

NOTE

Lockout struts are located on each side of the MK48/48A1 just

above No. 2 Axle.

(12) Working at No. 2 Axle, install both lockout

struts (31) as follows:

(a) Remove sensor cap (32).

(b) Remove clips (33) and pins (34)

from struts (31).

DO NOT OVEREXTEND LOCKOUT STRUT TURNBUCKLES.

THE STRUT COULD SEPARATE DURING UNCOUPLING

MANEUVERS.

(c) Swing struts (31) off bracket (35).

Adjust turnbuckle (36) so that strut (31) will reach axle bracket

(37) and clips (33).

(d) Insert pins (34) to hold strut (31) in

brackets (37).

WARNING

TM 08780-10

2-203

(e) Turn turnbuckle (36) clockwise to

eliminate slack. Tighten turnbuckle again one more complete turn

with an adjustable wrench. Keep adjustment of both sides equal.

TO PREVENT SEVERE INJURY, KEEP ALL PERSONNEL

AWAY FROM VEHICLE. DO NOT ALLOW ANYONE TO

STAND NEAR ARTICULATION JOINT WHEN STARTING

ENGINE OR WHEN SEPARATING POWER UNIT FROM

TRAILER.

(13) Remove five nuts (38) and eight capscrews

(39) from each side of the vehicle.

WARNING

TM 08780-10

2-204

ENSURE ALL AIR LINES, HYDRAULIC LINES AND

ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR ARE COMPLETELY

DISCONNECTED FROM REAR MODULE PRIOR TO

SEPARATION. FAILURE TO COMPLY COULD RESULT IN

DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.

(14) Start engine and build air pressure to 120

psi.

(15) Release PARKING BRAKE valve (1).

(16) Place transfer case shifter (3) in LOW range.

(17) Place Drive Line Lockup control (40) in

TRANSFER CASE LOCKUP.

(18) Place transmission shifter (2) in D - 1.

DO NOT FORCE SEPARATION BY INCREASING ENGINE

RPM ABOVE 1000. IF SUDDEN SEPARATION OCCURS

AND BRAKES ARE APPLIED HARD, THE POWER UNIT

MAY ROLL FORWARD ONTO ITS CAB.

CAUTION

CAUTION

TM 08780-10

2-205

(19) Slowly increase engine speed to 800 - 900

rpm while turning steering wheel back and forth 1/4 turn each way.

Movement of steering wheel will cause articulation joint to move.

This aids separation.

(20) If power unit will not separate from trailer,

perform the following procedures:

(a) Make sure all nuts (38) and

capscrews (39) are removed.

(b) Change adjustments slightly on

lockout struts (31) or landing gear (11). Attempt to pull away after

each adjustment change.

MAKE SURE ALL AIR, ELECTRICAL AND HYDRAULIC

LINES ARE CLEAR OF COUPLING MATING SURFACE

BEFORE BACKING UP.

b. Coupling Power Unit To Trailer

(1) Clean mating pins (41) and sockets (42).

Then coat stinger (43) with grease (item 4, appendix D).

CAUTION

TM 08780-10

2-206

DO NOT PULL HYDRAULIC SELECTOR VALVE OUT

WHEN SEPARATED FROM TRAILER. DAMAGE TO

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM WILL RESULT.

NOTE

It may be necessary to adjust the Landing Legs of the trailer to

aid in alignment.

(2) Start engine. Back power unit up to trailer

until pins (41) engage socket (42). Turn steering wheel slightly to

aid alignment. Continue to back power unit up until pins (41) are

fully seated.

(3) After pins (41) are fully seated, shift

transmission shifter (2) to (N) neutral, apply parking brake valve

(1) and stop engine.

CAUTION

TM 08780-10

2-207

(4) Place transfer case shifter (3) in neutral.

(5) Place DRIVE LINE LOCKUP control (40)

in UNLOCK POSITION.

(6) Install eight capscrews (39) and five nuts

(38) on each side of the vehicle. Tighten capscrews (39) as much

as possible. Have Organizational Maintenance lubricate and

torque capscrews to 375 foot-pounds (508.5 N*m) as soon as

possible.

(7) Connect propeller shafts (28 and 29). Install

and tighten eight capscrews (27), lockwashers (26) and nuts (25).

Tighten nuts securely. Have Organizational Maintenance replace

lockwashers (26) as soon as possible.

TM 08780-10

2-208

(8) Drain all air reservoirs. Refer to paragraph

3-5.

(9) Remove plugs (19) and connect all airlines

(17). Remove cover (22) from receptacle opening and place in

stowed position as shown.

(10) Screw electrical cable (20) and ABS cable

(21) onto receptacles.

NOTE

• Ensure quick disconnect couplings are clean before

connecting.

• Only two hydraulic lines are present on the MK17/17A1.

(11) On the MK15/15A1, MK16/16A1 and

MK17/17A1, remove plugs (24) and connect hydraulic lines (22).

TM 08780-10

2-209

(12) Stow lockout struts as follows:

(a) Eliminate tension from struts (31) by

turning turnbuckle (36) counterclockwise.

(b) Remove clip (33) and pin (34).

(c) Swing strut (31) up and adjust

turnbuckle (36) so strut will fit on stowage bracket (35). Install pin

(34) and clip (33).

(d) Connect sensor caps (32).

(13) Stow landing leg as follows:

TM 08780-10

2-210

TO AVOID INJURY, STAY CLEAR OF LEG WHEN LIFTING

INTO POSITION IN CASE LEG ACCIDENTALLY SWINGS

DOWNWARD.

(a) Remove support braces (15) and

stow in position as shown.

(b) Turn crank handle (13) to fully

retract landing leg (11).

WARNING

TM 08780-10

2-211

(c) Have helper raise landing leg (11) up

to its bracket (14). Support pad (16) must be hooked on bracket

(14). Turn crank handle (13) to secure landing leg (11) in its

bracket (14).

IF EXCESSIVE FORCE IS NECESSARY TO STOW CRANK

HANDLE, RETRACT LANDING LEG (11) BY TURNING

CRANK HANDLE (13) BACK ONE TURN.

(d) Place crank handle (13) in its stowed

position. Install clip (12).

(e) Repeat steps (b) thru (d) to stow

remaining landing leg.

(14) On MK17/17A1 trailer, stow the rear

landing leg as follows:

TO AVOID INJURY, STAY CLEAR OF LEG WHEN LIFTING

INTO POSITION IN CASE LEG ACCIDENTALLY SWINGS

DOWNWARD.

CAUTION

WARNING

TM 08780-10

2-212

(a) Remove retainer (8) and pin (9).

Push leg (10) up into stowed position and install pin (9) and

retainer (8).

(b) Remove retainer (5) and pin (6).

Push leg (10) up and install pin (6) in rear bracket hole.

(c) Install retainer (5).

ENSURE ALL HYDRAULIC LINES ARE CONNECTED TO

REAR MODULE PRIOR TO STARTING ENGINE. FAILURE

TO COMPLY COULD RESULT IN DAMAGE TO

EQUIPMENT.

CAUTION

TM 08780-10

2-213

(15) Start engine and build air pressure to 120

psi. Leave parking brake valve (1) set.

(16) Check turn signal, brake and tail light

operation on the trailer if tactical conditions allow.

(17) Check lockout sensor light (44) to verify

that struts are in stowed position.

(18) Place transfer case shifter (3) in DIRECT

(HIGH) range.

(19) Release parking brake valve (1). Check for

proper service brake operation before driving.

2-16. MK15 CRANE OPERATION

a. General Description. While the vehicle is moving,

the Material Handling Crane (MHC) is secured in its folded

position by a pin. When unfolded, the crane has four basic

functions. They are the main boom, folding boom and two

extension booms. The main boom column can rotate 350 degrees,

TM 08780-10

2-214

with a 10 degree dead spot at the main control panel. The crane

can lift 9,000 pounds (4,082.4 kg) when extended 15 feet (4.512

M) outward (see lifting capacity chart located at control panel for

further information). The crane is operated by hydraulics supplied

by the MK48/48A1 through the main control panel. The main

control panel provides the controls to manually operate all

functions of the crane and stabilizers. Each control is proportional.

The more pressure, the faster the selected crane movement.

Besides the main controls, the crane may also be operated by a

remote control unit with the same operating functions, except for

stabilizer controls, as the main control. Left and right stabilizers

are provided to stabilize, support and level the vehicle while the

crane is operating. An additional set of stabilizer controls is

provided, separate from the main control panel, on the left side of

the vehicle. Built within the hydraulic system of the crane are

several safety features that protect the equipment and operating

personnel. They are as follows:

• Check valves, in the event of pressure loss due to hydraulic

line failure, prevent a load from falling.

• A suspended load on the crane can be lowered when

hydraulic pressure is lost at the MK48/48A1 if external hydraulic

lines from another MK48/48A1/15 Wrecker/Recovery vehicle are

attached to the crane's trailer. Should a hydraulic failure occur in

crane's trailer, the suspended load can be lowered by adjusting the

cylinder hold valve. This procedure should only be done by

Organizational Maintenance personnel.

• The crane is equipped with an overload protection system

that prevents lifting greater loads, at a given distance, than the

crane can handle. All functions that decrease overload remain

functional.

TM 08780-10

2-215

b. Pre-Operational Safety Checks

(1) When possible, position vehicle on firm

level ground.

(2) Place transmission shifter (1) in neutral (N),

pull parking brake valve (2) OUT.

(3) Shutdown engine. Turn engine start switch

to ON. Engine's warning buzzer will sound. This is normal.

TM 08780-10

2-216

DO NOT ATTEMPT TO MOVE VEHICLE WITH SELECTOR

IN THE AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS POSITION. STEERING

WILL NOT WORK. INJURY OR DEATH COULD RESULT.

(4) Pull selector valve (3), mounted on right

fender of power unit, to AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS position.

Make sure valve is fully engaged.

WARNING

TM 08780-10

2-217

(5) Remove remote control (6) and cable (7)

from stowage compartment (8).

(6) Connect one end of the remote control cable

(7) to receptacle (12) and secure with latch (13). Close stowage

compartment door.

TM 08780-10

2-218

(7) Connect other end of cable (7) to remote

control receptacle (20) and secure with latch (21)

(8) Turn control switch (5) to REMOTE. Red

indicator light (22) on remote control (6) should be ON indicating

control is ready for operation.

NOTE

One of the two deadman switches (23) must be depressed to

activate remote control.

(9) Depress one of the two deadman switches

(23) on remote control. Green indicator light (24) should be ON

indicating connection between the remote control and main control

panel has been made.

(10) Depress one of the deadman switches (23)

and hold. Check that control levers (14, 15, 16, 17, 18 and 19) are

locked into the center (neutral) position and that these levers are in

a straight line. If any lever will not lock or does not line up, notify


(11) While depressing deadman switch (23),

move control levers (25, 26, 27, 28, 29 and 30) of the remote

control in both directions. Make sure main control panel levers

agree with the remote control and are functioning properly. If

controls do not agree or are not functioning properly, notify


(12) Turn control switch (5) OFF.

NOTE

Any failure of the remote control Pre-Operational check will not

prevent the use of crane. This, however, prevents the use of any

remote control operation until repairs have been made.

TM 08780-10

2-219

c. Deploying Stabilizers

NOTE

All crane controls, manual and remote, are proportional

controls. The more travel of the control, the faster the selected

crane movement.

(1) Start engine and turn control switch (5) to

MANUAL.

TM 08780-10

2-220

TO AVOID BEING CRUSHED, STAY CLEAR OF

STABILIZERS WHILE IN OPERATION.

(2) Using control station (31) at right rear of

trailer, deploy right stabilizer as follows:

(a) Place STABILIZER EXT lock valve

(32) in the UNLOCK position.

(b) Using NEAR SIDE STABILIZER

control (33), slowly extend outrigger beam (34) fully.

(c) Place STABILIZER EXT lock valve

(32) in the LOCK position.

WARNING

TM 08780-10

2-221

(d) Place Stabilizer Cylinder lock valve


(e) Pull retaining pin (36) to free quick

release cable (37).

NOTE

There must be a minimum of one to two inches of slack in cable

to allow stabilizer to rotate into the working position.

(f) Using NEAR SIDE STABILIZER

control (33), slowly extend stabilizer cylinder (38) until there is

approximately one to two inches (25 to 50 mm) of slack in quick

release cable (37).

TM 08780-10

2-222

TO AVOID PERSONAL INJURY, STAY CLEAR OF

STABILIZER WHEN PULLING TOWARDS REAR OF

VEHICLE.

(g) Remove quick release pin (39) from

vertical stabilizer lock pin (40). Remove lock pin (40). Pull

stabilizer towards rear of vehicle to start stabilizer in the downward

position.

(h) Using NEAR SIDE STABILIZER

control (33), slowly retract stabilizer cylinder (38) fully. Stabilizer

will rotate into position.

WARNING

TM 08780-10

2-223

(i) Using cable release handle (41),

remove quick release cable (37) from stabilizer cylinder (38).

(j) Install stabilizer cylinder lock pin

(40) and quick release pin (39).

(k) Using NEAR SIDE STABILIZER

control (33), extend stabilizer cylinder (38) until it is

approximately three inches (76 mm) above the ground.

(3) At main control panel (4), deploy left

stabilizer as follows:

(a) Place STABILIZER EXT LOCK

VALVE (42) in the UNLOCK position.

TM 08780-10

2-224



(c) Place STABILIZER EXT LOCK

VALVE (42) in the LOCK position,

(d) Place vertical stabilizer cylinder lock

valve (45) in the UNLOCK position.


release cable (47).

TM 08780-10

2-225

NOTE





approximately one to two inches (25 to 50 mm) of slack in quick

release cable (47).

TM 08780-10

2-226



VEHICLE.


stabilizer lock pin (50). Remove lock pin (50). Pull stabilizer

cylinder toward rear of vehicle to start stabilizer into the downward

position.




WARNING

TM 08780-10

2-227



(j) Install vertical stabilizer lock pin


(k) Using NEAR SIDE stabilizer control

(43), extend stabilizer cylinder (48) until stabilizer is

approximately three inches (76 mm) above the ground.

NOTE

To provide greater stability, never lift any tire off of the ground.

(l) Using both NEAR SIDE and FAR

SIDE stabilizer controls (43 and 52), extend stabilizer cylinders

until both rear springs are off their spring seats.

TM 08780-10

2-228

(m) Place both stabilizer cylinder lock

valves (35 and 45) in the LOCK position.

d. Unstowing Crane

CRANE OPERATIONS HAVE INHERENT HAZARDS THAT

CANNOT BE MECHANICALLY SAFEGUARDED.

OPERATOR AND ASSISTING PERSONNEL ARE

REQUIRED TO WEAR HARD HATS AND SAFETY SHOES.

EXTENSION BOOMS MUST BE FULLY RETRACTED

BEFORE UNSTOWING CRANE. EXTENSION BOOM CAN

CAUSE CRANE DAMAGE BY STRIKING CRANE BASE.

WARNING

CAUTION

TM 08780-10

2-229

NOTE

• If any unwanted crane movement (creep) occurs during

operation, notify Organizational Maintenance that the

crane requires adjustment.

• Use manual controls to unstow crane.

(1) Remove retaining pin (53) and stowage pin

(54) from crane.

(2) Using Folding Boom control (16), lift

folding boom (55) off of boom rest (56). Folding boom brackets

(57) must be off of rest (56) so that crane can be unstowed.

TM 08780-10

2-230

TM 08780-10

2-231

(3) Push main boom control (17) up to raise

main boom (58) to 86 degrees as indicated by indicator (59) on

main boom (58).

(4) Use Folding Boom control (16) to raise

folding boom (55) to clear any objects when crane is rotated.

NOTE

Crane can now be operated from the manual controls or from the

remote control. To select remote control, refer to step (10).

TM 08780-10

2-232

(5) Use main boom control (17) to position

main boom (58) at 45 degrees as indicated by indicator (59) on

main boom. For maximum lifting capacity, refer to capacity

information data plate located on main control panel, folding boom

and remote control.


folding boom (55) into the horizontal position. This is the

maximum lifting position.

TM 08780-10

2-233

BE CAREFUL WHEN RETRACTING EXTENSION BOOMS

IF FOLDING BOOM IS ABOVE THE HORIZONTAL

POSITION. LOAD MAY SWING AND CONTACT THE

CRANE.

(7) Use Extension Boom control (15) to extend

or retract extension booms (60).

(8) Use Rotation control (18) to rotate crane


(9) Unstow hook (61) by pulling back on latch

(62) and lifting off of pin (63).

(10) Use of remote control.

CAUTION

TM 08780-10

2-234

(a) Turn control switch (5) to REMOTE.

Place strap (64) over head around neck. Hook buckle (65) on belt.

Adjust strap (64) as necessary.

NOTE

One of two deadman switches (23) must be depressed to activate

remote controls.

TM 08780-10

2-235

(b) Depress one of the two deadman

switches (23).

(c) Move extension boom control (27)

up to extend or down to retract extension booms.

(d) Move folding boom control (28) up

to raise or down to lower folding boom.

(e) Move main boom control (29) up to

raise or down to lower main boom.

(f) Move rotation control (30) up to

rotate crane clockwise or down to rotate crane counterclockwise.

e. Emergency Operating Procedures

NOTE

Manual controls must be used to operate crane when an

electrical failure has occurred.

(1) Electrical Failure. In the event of electrical

failure, all crane movement will stop. Operate crane as follows:

(a) Turn control switch (5) to OFF.

(b) Pull emergency manual shut down

valve (66) CLOSED.

(c) Complete crane operation with

manual controls.

(d) Notify Organizational Maintenance

immediately.

(2) Hydraulic Failure. If hydraulic failure

occurs, notify Organizational Maintenance immediately.

TM 08780-10

2-236

f. Stowing Crane

(1) Lift hook (61) and secure on stowage pin

(63). Make sure latch (62) closes so hook is secure.

NOTE

Use manual controls to stow crane.

(2) Using Rotation Control (18), rotate crane to

align boom stowage plates (67).

TM 08780-10

2-237


BEFORE STOWING CRANE. EXTENSION BOOM CAN

CAUSE CRANE DAMAGE BY STRIKING CRANE BASE.

(3) Use Boom Extension control (15) to fully

retract both extension booms (60).

CAUTION

TM 08780-10

2-238

(4) Use main boom control (17) to raise main-

boom (58) to 86 degrees as indicated on indicator (59).

(5) Use Folding Boom control (16) to slowly

fold boom (55). Hold control down until folding boom will not

travel any further.

(6) Use Main Boom control (17) to slowly

lower main boom (58) to stowed position.

(7) Turn control switch (5) to OFF.

(8) With control switch in the OFF position, lift

Folding Boom control (16) so that brackets (57) are down on boom

rest (56).

(9) Push controls (15, 16, 17, and 18) up and

down all the way to release hydraulic pressure.

TM 08780-10

2-239

(10) Install stowage pin (54) and retaining pin

(53).

g. Stowing Stabilizers

(1) Turn control switch (5) to MANUAL.

(2) Unlock Left and Right stabilizer cylinder

lock valves (35 and 45).

TM 08780-10

2-240

(3) At main control panel (4), use Near side and

Far side stabilizer controls (43 and 52) to fully retract stabilizer

cylinders (38 and 48).

FAILURE TO REMOVE SAFETY PIN (40) BEFORE

RETRACTING STABILIZER WILL CAUSE CABLE (37) TO

BREAK.

CAUTION

TM 08780-10

2-241

(4) Remove quick release pin (39) and safety

pin (40) from Right side stabilizer (38).

(5) Turn cable release handle (41) and insert

stabilizer cable (37). Make sure cable is secure on handle pin.

(6) At Right side control station (31), use

NEAR SIDE STABILIZER control (33) to extend stabilizer (38).

Stabilizer will swing into stowed position.

(7) Install stabilizer safety pin (40) and quick

release pin (39).

(8) Use Near side stabilizer control (33) to

retract stabilizer (38).

TM 08780-10

2-242

(9) Place stabilizer cylinder lock out valve (35)

in the LOCK position.

(10) Secure quick release cable (37) with

retaining pin (36) as shown. Pull down on quick release cable (37)

so that all cable slack is below retaining pin (36).

(11) Place NEAR SIDE STABILIZER EXT lock

out valve (32) in the UNLOCK position.

(12) Using NEAR SIDE STABILIZER control

(33), retract outrigger beam (34).

TM 08780-10

2-243

TO PREVENT SEVERE VEHICLE DAMAGE MAKE SURE

STABILIZER EXT LOCK OUT VALVE (32) IS IN THE LOCK

POSITION BEFORE MOVING VEHICLE.

(13) Place STABILIZER EXT lock out valve



RETRACTING STABILIZER WILL CAUSE CABLE (47) TO

BREAK.

(14) Remove quick release pin (49) and safety

pin (50).


quick disconnect cable (47). Make sure cable is secure on handle

pin.

CAUTION

CAUTION

TM 08780-10

2-244

(16) Use NEAR SIDE STABILIZER control (43)

to extend stabilizer cylinder (48). It will swing into the stowed

position.


release pin (49).


to retract stabilizer (48).

(19) Place STABILIZER lock out valve (45) in

the LOCK position.

TM 08780-10

2-245

(20) Secure stabilizer cable (47) with retaining

pin (46) as shown. Pull down on quick release cable (47) so that

all cable slack is below retaining pin (46).

TM 08780-10

2-246

(21) Place STABILIZER EXT lock out

valve (42) in the UNLOCK position.


to retract outrigger beam (44).

TM 08780-10

2-247

TO PREVENT SEVERE VEHICLE DAMAGE MAKE SURE






(25) Push controls (52 and 43) up and down (all

the way) to release hydraulic pressure.

(26) Push selector valve (3) to the STEERING

position. Make sure valve is fully engaged.

(27) If remote control (6) was used, coil up cable

(7) approximately one foot in diameter. Place cable (7) and remote

control (6) in stowage compartment as shown. Secure

compartment door.

CAUTION

TM 08780-10

2-248

2-17. MK15A1 MATERIAL HANDLING CRANE (MHC)

OPERATION

a. General Description. During operation, the material

handling crane (MHC) has four basic functions: telescoping,

outriggers, swing and hoist. The boom can rotate 318 degrees with

a 42 degree dead spot at the main control panel. The crane has a

lifting capacity of 9,000 lbs (4,086 kgs) at 15 feet (4.6m) (see

lifting capacity chart located at control panel for further

information).

The crane is operated by hydraulics supplied by the MK48/48A1

through the crane's main control panel. The main control panel

provides the controls to manually operate all functions of the crane

and outrigger jacks.

Each control on the crane's main control panel is proportional. The

more travel of the control, the faster the selected crane movement.

The crane may also be operated by a remote control unit with the

same operating functions, except for outrigger jack cylinder

controls, as the main control. Left and right retractable outrigger

jack cylinders are provided to stabilize, support and level the

vehicle while the crane is operated. An additional outrigger jack

cylinder control is provided, separate from the main control panel,

on the passenger (right) side of the vehicle. Built within the

TM 08780-10

2-249

crane's hydraulic system are several safety features that protect the

equipment and operating personnel. They are as follows:

• Hold valves will prevent a load from falling in the event of

pressure loss because of hydraulic line failure.


hydraulic pressure is lost at the MK48A1 if external

hydraulic lines from the MK48/15A1 Wrecker/Recovery

vehicle are attached to the quick disconnect couplings at

the front of the crane trailer. Should hydraulic failure occur

in the crane's trailer, the suspended load can be lowered by

adjusting the cylinder hold valve. This procedure should be

done by Organizational Maintenance personnel.

• An overload protection system that prevents lifting greater

loads, at a given distance, than the crane can handle. All

functions that decrease overload remain functional: hoist

down, telescope in and swing left or right.

b. Determine Required Crane Settings from Range

Diagram

(1) Use Area Definition Chart below or on

MHC main control panel to determine position of crane.

TM 08780-10

2-250

(2) Use Load Chart below or on MHC main

control panel for load capacities.

NOTE

When either boom length or load radius or both are between

values listed below, the smallest load shown at either the next

larger boom length or radius must be used.

ON OUTRIGGERS

FRONT, SIDE & REAR - 318˚

RADIUS

FT (M)

BOOM LENGTH FT (M)

7.33

(2.23)

14.25

(4.34)

15.25

(4.65)

16.50

(5.03)

18.42

(5.81)

4.00

(1.22)

11000

(4988)

7.00

(2.13)

11000

(4988)

8.00

(2.44)

11000

(4988)

11000

(4988)

9.00

(2.74)

11000

(4988)

11000

(4988)

10000

(4535)

10.00

(3.05)

11000

(4988)

11000

(4988)

10000

(4535)

9000

(4082)

12.00

(3.66)

10000

(4535)

10000

(4535)

10000

(4535)

9000

(4082)

14.00

(4.27)

9400

(4264)

9400

(4264)

9000

(4082)

8000

(3628)

15.00

(4.57)

9000

(4082)

8400

(3810)

7900

(3583)

16.00

(4.88)

8000

(3628)

7500

(3401)

18.20

(5.55)

5900

(2676)

Capacities in Pounds (Kilograms)

Load Chart

c. Prepare Crane for Use

(1) Start engine.

(2) Position vehicle on level ground so all

loading and unloading can be done from one position.

TM 08780-10

2-251

(3) Place transmission shifter (1) in N (Neutral).

(4) Pull parking brake valve (2) OUT. Chock

wheels as necessary to secure vehicle.

(5) Shut down engine. Turn engine start switch

to ON. Engine warning buzzer will sound. This is normal.


VALVE IN THE AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS POSITION.

STEERING WILL NOT WORK. INJURY OR DEATH COULD

RESULT.

(6) Pull selector valve (3) mounted on right

fender of MK48/48A1 power unit to AUXILIARY

HYDRAULICS position. Make sure valve is fully engaged.

(7) Start engine.

(8) Position MHC MAIN POWER switch (4) to

ON.

(9) Position MHC TILT ALARM switch (5) to

ON.

WARNING

TM 08780-10

2-252

d. Deploying Outrigger Jacks

ENSURE AREA IS CLEAR ON BOTH SIDES OF VEHICLE

BEFORE EXTENDING OUTRIGGER BEAMS AND JACKS.

FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO

PERSONNEL OR DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.

WARNING

TM 08780-10

2-253

(1) Move O/R EXT lever (6) to OUT position

until outriggers are fully extended.

NOTE

Both outrigger pads are installed on outriggers the same way.

Right side is shown.

(2) Remove two outrigger pads (7) from

brackets located under tool stowage box (8).

(3) Remove two retaining pins (9) from

outrigger pad (7).

(4) Clear all dirt and debris from socket (10) in

outrigger pad (7) and from the end of the outrigger jack cylinder

(11).

(5) Position the outrigger pad (7) directly below

the outrigger jack cylinder (11).

TM 08780-10

2-254

(6) Perform steps (3) (4) and (5) to set up

outrigger pad (7) on other side.

• KEEP HANDS AND FEET CLEAR OF OUTRIGGERS

DURING OPERATION. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY

RESULT IN INJURY TO PERSONNEL.

• THE ENGINE DURING OPERATION WILL CREATE

BLOWING DUST. EYE PROTECTION MUST BE

WORN WHILE OPERATING CRANE CONTROLS.


PERSONNEL.

WARNING

TM 08780-10

2-255

(7) Move LH O/R JACK lever (12) to DOWN

position and lower outrigger jack cylinder (11) until ball end is

seated in outrigger pad (7).

(8) Install retaining pins (9) on outrigger pad

(7).

(9) Move RH O/R JACK lever (13) to down




(7).

CRIBBAGE AND/OR BLOCKAGE SHOULD NOT BE USED

UNDER THE OUTRIGGER PADS TO PREVENT SINKING

INTO THE SOIL. FAILURE OF SUCH DEVICES COULD

RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH.

WARNING

TM 08780-10

2-256

NOTE

• To provide greater stability, never lift any tire off the

ground.

• Lower outrigger jacks individually as necessary to level

the truck side-to-side.

(11) Using both LH O/R JACK and RH O/R

JACK levers (12 and 13), lower jack cylinders until both rear

springs are off their spring seats.

e. Unstowing Crane

(1) Move BOOM lever (14) to UP position and

HOIST lever (15) to DOWN position until boom (16) is at a

45-degree angle as indicated on boom angle indicator (17).

TM 08780-10

2-257

(2) Ensure hook block (18) is disconnected from

stowage hook (19).

KEEP BOOM CLEAR OF ALL ELECTRICAL LINES AND

OTHER OBSTACLES WHILE OPERATING CRANE.

FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN INJURY OR

DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

NEVER TELESCOPE BOOM AND LIFT LOAD UNLESS

MAST IS FULLY RAISED. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY

RESULT IN DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.

WARNING

CAUTION

TM 08780-10

2-258

NOTE

Operate BOOM lever and MAST lever at the same time to

maintain boom at approximately a 30-degree angle.


MAST lever (20) to UP position until mast (21) is fully raised.

Hold MAST lever (21) in UP position for 2-3 seconds to ensure

erection cylinder (22) is fully erected.

f. Connect Remote Control

THE CRANE MUST BE OPERATED WITH REMOTE

CONTROL IF OPERATOR IS NOT ABLE TO KEEP LOAD IN

SIGHT AT ALL TIMES DURING OPERATION. FAILURE

TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN INJURY OR DEATH TO

PERSONNEL.

(1) Remove crane remote control (23) and cable

(24) from stowage box (25).

WARNING

TM 08780-10

2-259

NOTE

REMOTE CONTROL UNIT straps may be crisscrossed in either

front or rear for operator comfort.


OFF.

(3) Connect cable (24) to crane remote control

(23).

(4) Connect other end of cable (24) to

REMOTE CONTROL HOOK UP receptacle (26).


ON.

TM 08780-10

2-260

(6) Position EMERGENCY STOP switch (27)

on crane remote control (23) to ON.

g. Rotate and Telescope Boom

• KEEP BOOM CLEAR OF ALL ELECTRICAL LINES

AND OTHER OBSTACLES WHILE OPERATING THE

CRANE. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN

INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

• ENSURE THAT AREA IS CLEAR OF PERSONNEL

BEFORE ROTATING BOOM. BOOM MUST BE

WARNING

TM 08780-10

2-261

ROTATED SLOWLY ENOUGH SO OPERATOR HAS

COMPLETE CONTROL OF LOAD. IF OPERATOR

CANNOT SEE LOAD DURING OPERATION,

OPERATE CRANE WITH REMOTE CONTROL.


DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

ENSURE CRANE DOES NOT CONTACT A-FRAME WHILE

ROTATING OR OPERATING CRANE. FAILURE TO

COMPLY MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO CRANE OR

VEHICLE.

NOTE

Operate crane control levers using even pressure. Moving lever

slightly will cause slow movement of crane. Moving lever to full

travel will cause faster movement of the crane.

(1) Move SWING lever (28) to CW

(Clockwise) position to move boom (16) to the right.

(2) Move SWING lever (28) to CCW (Counter-

Clockwise) position to move boom (16) to the left.

CAUTION

TM 08780-10

2-262

OPERATOR MUST KEEP CONTROL OF LOAD AT ALL

TIMES. ATTACH GUIDE LINES TO LOAD AS REQUIRED.


DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

KEEP HOOK ASSEMBLY AT LEAST 2 FT (0.6M) FROM

END OF BOOM. IF HOOK ASSEMBLY HITS END OF

BOOM, CRANE WILL LOSE POWER FOR SEVERAL

SECONDS AND CABLE OR HOOK ASSEMBLY MAY BE

DAMAGED.

NOTE

Operate HOIST lever and TELESCOPE lever at the same time.

WARNING

CAUTION

TM 08780-10

2-263

(3) Move HOIST lever (15) to DOWN position

to pay out cable (29) and TELESCOPE lever (30) to OUT position

to extend boom (16).

h. Raise and Lower Load

(1) Refer to range diagram on MHC main

control panel to determine correct boom angle setting.

(2) Move BOOM lever (14) to UP position until

boom angle indicator (17) shows correct boom angle as determined

in step (1).

TM 08780-10

2-264

• DO NOT ALLOW EXCESSIVE SLACK TO BUILD-UP

WHEN PAYING OUT CABLE. FAILURE TO COMPLY

MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.

• DO NOT ALLOW THE WEIGHT OF THE HOOK TO

BE REMOVED FROM THE CABLE. FAILURE TO

COMPLY MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO

EQUIPMENT

• USE ONLY A STRAIGHT PULL WHEN LIFTING

LOAD. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN


(3) Operate SWING lever (28) and

TELESCOPE lever (30) to center end of boom (16) directly over

load.

(4) Remove safety pin (31) from hook assembly

latch (32).

CAUTION

TM 08780-10

2-265

(5) Operate HOIST lever (15) to pay in or pay

out cable (29) and connect hook block (18) to load.

• ENSURE THAT HOOK LATCH IS CLOSED AND

SAFETY PIN IS INSTALLED BEFORE ATTEMPTING

TO RAISE LOAD. A HOOK LATCH THAT IS NOT

CLOSED AND LOCKED IN POSITION COULD

ALLOW LOAD TO BECOME DISENGAGED FROM

HOOK, ALLOWING LOAD TO FALL. INJURY OR

DEATH COULD RESULT.

• USE EXTREME CARE WHEN ATTEMPTING TO

RAISE LOAD WITH DAMAGED HOOK LATCH OR

SAFETY PIN. HAVE ORGANIZATIONAL

MAINTENANCE REPAIR DAMAGED PARTS AS

SOON AS MISSION IS COMPLETED.

(6) Install safety pin (31) in hook assembly

latch (32).

ENSURE THERE ARE AT LEAST TWO WRAPS OF CABLE

ON HOIST DRUM AT ALL TIMES. FAILURE TO COMPLY

MAY RESULT IN INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

WARNING

WARNING

TM 08780-10

2-266

• DO NOT JERK HOIST LEVER. LOAD MAY BOUNCE

AND RESULT IN DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT OR

LOAD.

• DO NOT LIFT MORE THAN MAXIMUM LOAD

RATING FOR CRANE. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY


• ENSURE BOOM AND LOAD ARE CLEAR OF

VEHICLE SIDES WHEN LOADING AND

UNLOADING CARGO. HITTING SIDE OF VEHICLE

WITH BOOM OR LOAD MAY DAMAGE CRANE,

LOAD, OR VEHICLE.

• DO NOT LOWER BOOM BELOW HORIZONTAL

WITH A LOAD SUSPENDED FROM THE HOOK, OR

RAISE A LOAD FROM BELOW HORIZONTAL USING

THE BOOM. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT

IN DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.

(6) Move HOIST lever (15) to UP position to

lift load. Move BOOM lever (14) to UP position to lift load higher

as required.


to lower load. Move BOOM lever (14) to DOWN position to

lower load further as required.

(8) When lifting operations are completed,

disconnect hook block (18) from load and install safety pin (31) in

hook assembly latch (32).

CAUTION

TM 08780-10

2-267

i. Stow Crane

BOOM MUST BE POSITIONED IN LINE WITH

OUTRIGGER BEAM AND FULLY RETRACTED BEFORE

LOWERING. OBSERVE BOOM DURING LOWERING TO

ENSURE NO CONTACT IS MADE WITH RIGHT REAR

FENDER. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN


NOTE

• Operate HOIST lever and TELESCOPE lever at the same

time.

• Reel in cable until approximately 2 ft. (0.6m) of cable

hangs from boom.


reel in cable (29) and TELESCOPE lever (30) to IN position to

retract boom (16).

CAUTION

TM 08780-10

2-268

NOTE

Position boom so that cable and hook assembly are on

passenger's side of vehicle.

(2) Operate SWING lever (28) to position boom

(16) in line with outrigger beam (33).

(3) Operate BOOM lever (14) so that boom

angle indicator (17) reads approximately 30-degrees.

TM 08780-10

2-269

NOTE

Operate BOOM lever and MAST lever at the same time so that

30-degree reading is maintained on boom angle indicator.

(4) Move MAST lever (20) to DOWN position

and fully lower mast (21).


raise boom (16) until boom angle indicator (17) reads

approximately 45 degrees.

(6) Move HOIST lever (15) to UP position until

hook block (18) is near stowage hook (19).

OBSERVE HOOK BLOCK DURING LOWERING TO

ENSURE THAT HOOK BLOCK REMAINS ATTACHED TO

STOWAGE HOOK. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN


CAUTION

TM 08780-10

2-270

NOTE

Operate HOIST lever and BOOM lever at the same time to keep

hook block attached to stowage hook.

(7) Move boom lever (14) to DOWN position

and HOIST lever (15) to UP position and fully lower boom (16).

j. Disconnect Remote Control


on crane remote control (23) to OFF.


OFF.

(3) Remove cable (24) from RH REMOTE

CONTROL HOOK UP receptacle (26).

(4) Remove cable (24) from crane remote

control (23).

TM 08780-10

2-271

(5) Stow cable (24) and crane remote control

(23) in stowage box.

NOTE

Perform step (6) if crane operation is still required.

(6) Position MHC MAIN POWER switch (4)

and TILT ALARM switch (5) to ON.

k. Stow Outrigger Beams/Jack Cylinders and Shut

Down Crane

(1) Remove two retaining pins (9) from both

outrigger pads (7).

NOTE

Operate LH O/R JACK lever and RH O/R JACK lever at the

same time.

(2) Move LH O/R JACK lever (12) and RH O/R

JACK lever (13) to UP position until outrigger jack cylinders (11)

are fully retracted.

(3) Install two retaining pins (9) in outrigger

pads (7).

(4) Stow two outrigger pads (7) on brackets

located on bottom of tool stowage boxes (8).

TM 08780-10

2-272

(5) Move O/R EXT lever (6) to IN position until

outrigger beams are fully retracted.

(6) Position MAIN POWER switch (4) to OFF.

(7) Position crane TILT ALARM switch (5) to

OFF.

TM 08780-10

2-273

2-18. MK15/15A1 A-FRAME LIFT AND TOW

OPERATIONS

a. General Description. The A-Frame is used to lift

and tow all LVS series vehicles from the front or rear, loaded or

unloaded. It is also capable of lifting and towing the following

vehicles: HMMWV and MTVR. Refer to paragraph 2-38 for front

flat towing and limited rear flat towing procedures.

The Hydraulic Cylinder is the A-frame's means of lifting. It is

operated by a control located with the crane controls. The

Hydraulic Cylinder may also be operated by the remote control.

TM 08780-10

2-274

On LVSA1 vehicles, the Hydraulic Cylinder can only be operated

manually from the auxiliary control panel located on the left rear

fender.

b. Basic Lift and Tow Precautions

WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO LIFT AND TOW A DISABLED

VEHICLE, CERTAIN PRECAUTIONS AND PROCEDURES

MUST BE FOLLOWED TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO THE

VEHICLE OR COMPONENTS. FAILURE TO USE

STANDARD TOWING PRECAUTIONARY MEASURES

WHILE LIFTING AND TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE

COULD RESULT IN AN UNSAFE OPERATING CONDITION.

(1) Except in an extreme emergency, do NOT

lift and tow an LVS vehicle without first disconnecting and

securing the driveline of the disabled vehicle being lifted and

towed. Refer to paragraph 2-42, section e, Preparation for Towing.

EXCEEDING THE 5 MILES PER HOUR (8 KPH) SPEED

LIMIT OR THE ONE HALF MILE (.8 KM) TOWING LIMIT

WITH DISABLED VEHICLE'S DRIVELINE STILL

CONNECTED WILL RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE

VEHICLE'S TRANSMISSION.

(2) In emergencies when time or tactical

situation does not permit disconnecting the driveline of the

disabled vehicle, limited lifting and towing can be performed. In

such instances, the disabled vehicle must not be lifted and towed

more than one half a mile (.8 km). Also, towing speed must not

exceed 5 miles per hour (8 kph).

WARNING

CAUTION

TM 08780-10

2-275

LIFT AND TOW OPERATIONS MUST ALWAYS BE

CONDUCTED AT A SPEED WHICH THE OPERATOR

DETERMINES TO BE SAFE UNDER EXISTING

CONDITIONS. IN NO EVENT SHOULD THE OPERATOR

EXCEED 15 MPH (24 KPH) WHEN LIFTING AND TOWING

A DISABLED VEHICLE.

(3) After preparation for lift and tow is made

and the drive train components are disconnected and properly

secured, do not tow at speeds over 15 mph (24 kph).

(4) Prepare A-frame for lift and tow. See

paragraph 2-18, section d.

(5) Front Lift and Tow. On vehicles to be lifted

and towed from the front, install articulation joint roll stops and

lockout strut (paragraph 2-18, Section e), tow bar (paragraph 2-18,

section f) and pivot beam (paragraph 2-18, section g).

(6) Rear Lift and Tow. On vehicles to be lifted

and towed from the rear, install articulation joint roll stops and

lockout strut (paragraph 2-18, section e) and tow bar (paragraph

2-18, section f).

c. Preparation for Lift and Tow

Equipment damage could occur if the following GCW (Gross

Combination Weight) ratings are exceeded.

On Highway Off Highway

154,000 lbs. 105,000 lbs.

(69916 kg) (47670 kg)

WARNING

CAUTION

TM 08780-10

2-276

(1) Prepare the disabled vehicle for lift and tow.

Refer to paragraph 2-42, section e.

(2) Position rear of wrecker directly in line with

disabled vehicle. Allow adequate working space.

(3) Place transmission shifter (1)in neutral (N)

and apply parking brake valve (2).

d. A-frame Preparation for Lift and Tow

(1) Remove and stow retaining strap (3).

TM 08780-10

2-277

(2) Remove two tie down rings (4) from the

vehicle's frame. Install and tighten the two tie down rings (4) into

cargo bed as shown.

NOTE

A-frame support chains must be hooked to the cargo bed first,

rather than the A-frame. Otherwise, the A-frame support chains

cannot be installed.

(3) Remove two A-frame support chains (5)

from stowage compartment. Attach hooked ends of chains (5) to

tie down rings (4) as shown.

TM 08780-10

2-278

NOTE

A-frame must be in the most upright position in order to attach

support chains.

(4) Remove one A-frame support strap (6) from

A-frame (7).

(5) Remove pin (8) and shackle (9) from A-

frame (7). Place shackle (9) through the free end of A-frame

support chain (5) and attach to A-frame (7) with pin (8).

(6) Repeat steps (4) and (5) to install the other

A-frame support chain (5).

TM 08780-10

2-279

(7) Remove pin (10).


frame cylinder (13). Place shackle (12) through the large eyes of

small lifting chains (14). Install shackle (12) and chains (14) on

cylinder (13) with pin (11).

TM 08780-10

2-280

e. Articulation Joint Roll Stop and Lockout Strut

Installation

(1) Install both articulation joint roll stops (15)

at the articulation joint (16).

TM 08780-10

2-281

To avoid equipment damage, lockout strut must be installed before

the disabled vehicle is lifted either from the front or rear.

NOTE

• Lockout strut (17) is installed at the articulation joint on

the left side of the vehicle being lifted and towed.

• Disabled vehicle could have to be repositioned in order to

install lockout strut (17).

• Perform step (2.1) only when operating an LVSA1 series

vehicle.

(2) Remove articulation joint lockout strut (17)

from the front of vehicle being lifted and towed.

(2.1) Remove sensor cap (17.1).

(3) Position lockout strut (17) on lockout

mounts (18) located at the articulation joint on the left side of the

vehicle being lifted and towed. Secure lockout strut (17) with pin

(19) and retainer (20).

CAUTION

TM 08780-10

2-282

f. Tow Bar Installation

TOW BAR IS HEAVY AND SHOULD BE HANDLED BY TWO

PEOPLE TO AVOID INJURY.

(1) Remove tow bar assembly (21) from

position on top of rear stowage compartment. Remove brace (22)

from side stowage compartment.

NOTE

For lifting and towing, the tow bar (21) should not be extended.

(2) Install brace (22) on tow bar (21). Secure

brace with pins (23) and retaining pins (24).

WARNING

TM 08780-10

2-283

(3) Attach clevises (25) to upper tow eyes (26)

of wrecker using pins (27) and retaining pins (28).

(4) Attach towbar (21) to clevises (25) using pins (29) and

retaining pins (30).

TM 08780-10

2-284



STEERING WILL NOT WORK.

(5) Start engine. Pull selector valve (31) out to

the AUXILIARY HYDRAULIC position. Make sure valve is

fully engaged.

WARNING

TM 08780-10

2-285

NOTE

• A-frame can be operated by either the manual or remote

control.

• LVSA1 A-frame cylinder can only be operated by manual

control. Steps (6), (7) and (8) not required on LVSA1

vehicles.

(6) Choose the method of operating the A-frame

cylinder by placing control switch (32) in either the MANUAL or

REMOTE position.

(7) If using the REMOTE position, remove

remote control unit (33) from stowage compartment and connect.

While depressing one of the two deadman switches (34 or 35),

move control (36) to left to raise cylinder or right to lower.

TM 08780-10

2-286

(8) If using the MANUAL position, move

control (37) up to raise cylinder or down to lower.

NOTE

Perform step (8.1) on LVSA1 series vehicles only.

(8.1) Move control (37.1) up to raise cylinder or

down to lower.

(9) Using control (36 or 37), lower A-frame

cylinder (13) enough to wrap and secure small lift chains (14)

around tow bar brace (22). Raise A-frame cylinder (13) to remove

slack.

NOTE


TM 08780-10

2-287

(9.1) Using control (37.1), lower A-frame

cylinder (13) enough to wrap and secure small lift chains (14)

around tow bar brace (22). Raise A-frame cylinder (13) to remove

slack.

g. Install Pivot Beam

PIVOT BEAM IS HEAVY AND SHOULD BE HANDLED BY

TWO PEOPLE TO AVOID INJURY.

(1) Remove pivot beam (38) from position in

front stowage compartment on wrecker cargo body.

WARNING

TM 08780-10

2-288

(2) Install pivot beam (38) on front tow eyes

(39) of the disabled vehicle. Secure beam to eyes with pins (40)

and retaining pins (41).

h. Front Lift and Tow of Disabled Vehicle


position.

TM 08780-10

2-289

COUPLING A DISABLED VEHICLE FOR LIFT AND

TOWING REQUIRES AN EXPERIENCED OPERATOR AND

A GROUND GUIDE. OPERATOR MUST BACK IN SLOWLY,

USING EXTREME CARE. FULL ATTENTION MUST BE

PAID TO THE GROUND GUIDE. OPERATOR AND

GROUND GUIDE MUST BOTH AGREE ON AND

UNDERSTAND TWO HAND SIGNALS-ONE THAT MEANS

BACK UP SLOWLY AND ONE THAT MEANS STOP.

(2) Back up wrecker until tow bar (21) lunette is

approximately one foot (.3M) from center of pivot beam (38).

(3) Pull selector valve (31) out to the

AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS position. Adjust tow bar (21)

WARNING

TM 08780-10

2-290

height using A-frame control (36 or 37) so that tow bar (21) is

aligned with pivot section of the pivot beam (38).

NOTE


(3.1) Pull selector valve (31) out to the

AUXILIARY HYDRAULIC position. Adjust tow bar (21) height

using A-frame control (37.1) so that tow bar (21) is aligned with

pivot section of the pivot beam (38).

(4) Install pivot beam shackle (42) through the

lunette on the tow bar (21).

NOTE

Adjust tow bar height as needed to align parts.

(5) Extend the tow bar (21) by removing

retaining pins (43) and pins (44). Guide the lunette into the pivot

section of the pivot beam (38), making sure holes in pivot beam

and pivot beam shackle (42) are aligned.

TM 08780-10

2-291

(6) Install shackle pin (45) from the bottom and

secure with retaining pin (46)

DO NOT RETRACT THE A-FRAME CYLINDER AS

DAMAGE TO THE TOW BAR BRACE (22) CAN OCCUR.

(7) Extend A-frame cylinder (13) enough to

unhook small lifting chains (14).

DO NOT STAND BETWEEN VEHICLES. VEHICLES

COULD ROLL, CRUSHING YOU BETWEEN THEM.

(8) On direction of the ground guide, the

wrecker must be backed up slowly until the tow bar (21) is fully

compressed.

NOTE

Recovery vehicle will have to be repositioned slightly to align pin

holes in tow bar (21).

CAUTION

WARNING

TM 08780-10

2-292

(9) Align pinholes in tow bar (21) and install

pins (44) and retaining pins (43).

(10) Remove long lifting chains (47) from

stowage. Thread grab hook end of long lifting chains (47) up

between the disabled vehicles skid plate (48) and the pivot beam

(38). Hook the grab hooks in the angle pockets on the pivot beam

(38).

NOTE

Due to terrain and load conditions, a second lift may be required

to obtain the maximum lift height needed to attach towing cable.

TM 08780-10

2-293


hook the small lifting chains (14) to the long lifting chains (47).

Hook the small chain at the 13th link from the grab hook ends of

the long lifting chains (47).

(12) Install scuff pad (49) on the disabled

vehicle's skid plate (48). Attachment hooks (50) fit on the upper

inside edge of skid plate (48).

DO NOT STAND BETWEEN VEHICLES WHILE LIFTING.

TOWED VEHICLE COULD ROLL FORWARD, CRUSHING

YOU BETWEEN THE VEHICLES.

WARNING

TM 08780-10

2-294

TO AVOID EQUIPMENT DAMAGE, LOCK OUT STRUT

MUST BE IN PLACE BEFORE LIFT IS MADE.

(13) Fully retract the A-frame cylinder (13).

NOTE

Use shackles (51) and pins (52) from the lower tow eyes of the

wrecker.

(14) Attach towing cable (53) ring ends to lifting

eyes on the pivot beam (38) using shackles (51) and pins (52).

(15) Extend the A-frame cylinder (13) fully,

allowing full weight of disabled vehicle to be supported by towing

cable (53).

(16) Unhook, remove and stow long lifting

chains (47).

CAUTION

TM 08780-10

2-295

(17) Remove pin (11), shackle (12) and small

lifting chains (14) from A-frame cylinder (13).

(18) Reattach shackle (12) to A-frame cylinder

(13) and secure with pin (11). Retract A-frame cylinder (13) and

secure in place with pin (10).

NOTE

Step (19) not required for LVSA1 series vehicles.

(19) Turn control switch (32) to the OFF position.

TM 08780-10

2-296

TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO SEALS, MAKE SURE GLAD

HANDS ARE FREE OF DIRT BEFORE COUPLING.

NOTE

• If the disabled vehicle's air system is inoperable, the

brakes must be manually released. Refer to paragraph 2-

37.

• Ball valve (57) must be open to release disabled vehicle's

parking brakes.

(20) If the disabled vehicle's air or brake system

is operable, connect air lines (54) to glad hands (55) at rear of

wrecker. Insert air lines (54) through the front grille of the disabled

vehicle and wrap them about 2 1/2 times to prevent lines from

dragging on the ground. Connect air lines (54) to front glad hands

(56) of disabled vehicle. Service-to-service (blue-to-blue).

Emergency-to-emergency (red-to-red). Open ball valve (57).

CAUTION

TM 08780-10

2-297


position.

(22) Push TRAILER AIR SUPPLY valve (58)

and parking brake valve (2) in to charge towed vehicle's air

system.

NOTE

Do not exceed 15 MPH (24 km) when towing a disabled vehicle.

(23) Push disabled vehicle's parking brake valve

into release parking brakes. Place transmission shifter (1) in Drive

TM 08780-10

2-298

- 3. Place transfer case shifter (59) in LOW range. Vehicle is now

ready to tow.

i. Lowering Vehicle





WILL NOT WORK.

WARNING

TM 08780-10

2-299


AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS position. Insure valve is fully

engaged.






TM 08780-10

2-300

(5) Pull TRAILER AIR SUPPLY valve (58)

out.

(6) Remove air lines (54) from glad hands (55)

on wrecker and glad hands (56) on disabled vehicle.


stowage. Thread grab hook end of chains (47) up between the

disabled vehicles skid plate (48) and the pivot beam (38). Hook

the grab hooks in the angle pockets on the pivot beam (38).

NOTE

Step (8) not required on LVSA1 series vehicles.

(8) Turn control switch (32) to either MANUAL

or REMOTE.


cylinder (13) until small lifting chains (14) can be hooked to long

lifting chains (47) at the 13th link from the grab hook end.

NOTE


TM 08780-10

2-301

(9.1) Using control (37.1) lower A-frame cylinder

(13) until small lifting chains (14) can be hooked to long lifting

chains (47) at the 13th link from the grab hook end.


(11) Remove towing cable (53) from pivot beam

(38) by removing pins (52) and shackles (51). Stow shackles and

pins.

TM 08780-10

2-302

(12) Extend A-frame cylinder (13) and lower

disabled vehicle to the ground. Unhook and stow long lifting

chains (47).

(13) Remove and stow scuff pad (49).

(14) Using control (36 or 37), adjust A-frame

cylinder (13) height to allow small lifting chains (14) to be

wrapped around tow bar brace (22). Remove slack from chains.

TM 08780-10

2-303

NOTE


(14.1) Using control (37.1), adjust A-frame




position.

(16) Remove and stow retaining pin (46) and

shackle pin (45).

TM 08780-10

2-304

NOTE


(17) Turn control switch (32) to the OFF position.

(18) Release parking brake valve (2) and drive

wrecker forward.

(19) Remove and stow pivot beam shackle (42).

(20) Remove and stow all towing equipment.

Refer to paragraph 2-18, section r.

TM 08780-10

2-305

j. MK48/48A1/14/14A1 Rear Lift and Tow

NOTE

After removing air line retaining clamp (60) mounting hardware,

replace mounting hardware on clamps to avoid loss.

(1) Remove air line retaining clamp (60)

mounting hardware and allow air lines (61) and wire harness (62)

to hang.

TM 08780-10

2-306

(2) Install long lifting chains (47) making sure

the grab hooks are outside of the gussets on the rear crossmember

(63).





AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS position. Ensure valve is fully

engaged.

NOTE



or REMOTE.

(5) Adjust tow bar (21) height using A-frame

control (36 or 37) so that tow bar (21) is the same height as the

disabled vehicle's pintle hook (64).

WARNING

TM 08780-10

2-307

NOTE


(5.1) Adjust tow bar (21) height using A-frame

control (37.1) so that tow bar (21) is the same height as the



position.

COUPLING A DISABLED VEHICLE FOR LIFTING AND






WARNING

TM 08780-10

2-308

UNDERSTAND TWO HAND SIGNALS – ONE THAT MEANS



approximately one foot (.3M) from center of pintle hook (64) of

the disabled vehicle.

(8) Install lift bracket (65) as shown.

(9) Turn pintle hook (64) on disabled vehicle so

that movable piece of the hook faces towards the ground. Unlock

and open pintle hook (64). If necessary refer to paragraph 2-33,

section e.

NOTE

Adjust tow bar (21) height as needed to align parts.

(10) Extend tow bar (21) by removing retaining

pins (43) and pins (44). Guide the lunette into the pintle hook (64).

(11) Close and lock pintle hook (64). If

necessary, refer to paragraph 2-33, section e.

TM 08780-10

2-309

DO NOT RETRACT THE A-FRAME CYLINDER (13) AS








compressed.

NOTE



(14) Align pin holes in tow bar (21) and install


CAUTION

WARNING

TM 08780-10

2-310

NOTE





Hook the small chains at the 8th link from the grab hook ends of


TM 08780-10

2-311

TO AVOID EQUIPMENT DAMAGE, LOCK OUT STRUT

MUST BE IN PLACE BEFORE LIFT IS MADE


(17) Attach towing cable (53) ends to rear tow

eyes (66) using shackles (67) and pins (68).

NOTE

Ring ends of towing cable (53) fit into slotted area in the lift

bracket (65).

(18) Fully extend A-frame cylinder (13) allowing

full weight of disabled vehicle to be supported by towing cables

(53). Ring ends of towing cables (53) must fit into slots in the lift

bracket (65).


chains (47).

CAUTION

TM 08780-10

2-312


lifting chains (14) from A-frame cylinder (13). Stow small lifting

chains (14).




TM 08780-10

2-313

NOTE


(22) Turn control switch (32) to the OFF

position.

USE EXTREME CARE LIFTING AND TOWING DISABLED

VEHICLE WHEN BRAKES ARE CAGED. IN THIS

CONDITION, ADDITIONAL REAR BRAKING FROM THE

DISABLED VEHICLE WILL NOT BE AVAILABLE.

POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH CAN OCCUR IF

CAUTION IS NOT USED.

(23) Cage disabled vehicles brakes. Refer to

paragraph 2-41, section c.

WARNING

TM 08780-10

2-314


position.

NOTE

Do not exceed 15 MPH (24 kph) when lifting and towing a

disabled vehicle.

(25) Place transmission shifter (1) in Drive-3.

Place transfer case shifter (59) in LOW range. Disabled vehicle is

now ready for rear lift and tow.

k. Lowering Vehicle



TM 08780-10

2-315



WILL NOT WORK.



engaged.






WARNING

TM 08780-10

2-316



(63).

NOTE



or REMOTE.

TM 08780-10

2-317

(7) Using control (36 or 37) lower A-frame



NOTE






(9) Remove towing cable (53) from rear tow

eyes (66) by removing pins (68) and shackles (67). Stow shackles

and pins.

TM 08780-10

2-318

(10) Extend the A-frame cylinder (13) and lower

disabled vehicle to the ground. Unhook, remove and stow long

lifting chains (47).

TM 08780B-10

2-319




NOTE





(12) Unlock and open pintle hook (64). If



cylinder (13) until tow bar (21) clears pintle hook (64).

NOTE





position.

NOTE


(15) Turn control switch (32) to OFF position.

TM 08780B-10

2-320

(16) Release parking brake valve (2). Place

transmission shifter (1) in Drive and drive wrecker forward.

(17) Remove and stow lift bracket (65).

TM 08780B-10

2-321

(18) Install airline retaining clamp (60) mounting

hardware holding airlines (61) and wire harness (62) to rear

crossmember (63).



TM 08780B-10

2-322

l. MK48/48A1/15/15A1 Rear Lift and Tow

NOTE

After removing air line retaining clamp (69) mounting hardware

and marker light bracket (70) replace mounting hardware to

avoid loss.


mounting hardware and marker light bracket (70) from rear

crossmember (71).

(2) Hook strap (72) ends on glad hand chain

(73) and brace (74). Pull strap tight to hold marker light bracket

(70) in position.

TM 08780B-10

2-323

(3) Install tong lifting chains (47) making sure


(71) of the disabled vehicle.




WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-324



engaged.

NOTE



or REMOTE.


control (36 or 37) so that tow bar (20) is at the same height as the


NOTE



control (37.1) so that tow bar (20) is at the same height as the


TM 08780B-10

2-325

(7) Push selector valve (31) to STEERING

position.



GROUND GUIDE. OPERATOR MUST BACK IN SLOWLY,




UNDERSTAND TWO HAND SIGNALS - ONE THAT MEANS


(8) Back up wrecker until tow bar(21) lunette is





and open pintle hook (75). If necessary, refer to paragraph 2-33,

section e.

NOTE




WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-326








COULD ROLL, CRUSHING YOU ALL BETWEEN THEM.



compressed.

NOTE



CAUTION

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-327

(14) Align pinholes in tow bar (21) and install


NOTE







TM 08780B-10

2-328

TO AVOID EQUIPMENT DAMAGE, LOCKOUT STRUT



(17) Attach towing cable (53) ring ends to rear

tow eyes (76) using shackles (77) and pins (78).



(53).

CAUTION

TM 08780B-10

2-329

(19) Unhook, remove and stow the long lifting

chains (47).

(20) Remove pin (11), shackle (12), and small


chains (14).




TM 08780B-10

2-330

NOTE



position.




WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-331







position.

NOTE

Do not exceed 15 MPH (24 KPH) when lifting and towing a

disabled vehicle.




TM 08780B-10

2-332

m. Lowering Vehicle





WILL NOT WORK.



engaged.

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-333








(71).

TM 08780B-10

2-334

NOTE



or REMOTE.




NOTE




lifting chains (47) at the 8th link from the grab hook end,

TM 08780B-10

2-335




and pins.

TM 08780B-10

2-336


disabled vehicle to the ground. Unhook, remove, and stow long


TM 08780B-10

2-337

(11) Using control (36 or 37) adjust A-frame



NOTE


(11.1) Using control (37.1), adjust A-frame cylinder

(13) height to allow small lifting chains (14) to be wrapped around

tow bar brace (22). Remove slack from chains.





NOTE





position.

TM 08780B-10

2-338

NOTE


(15) Turn control switch (32) to the off position.



TM 08780B-10

2-339

(17) Remove and stow strap (72).

(18) Install marker light bracket (70) and air line

retaining clamp (69) mounting hardware on disabled vehicles rear

crossmember (71).



n. MK48/48A1/16/16A1 Rear Lift and Tow

NOTE


replace mounting hardware to avoid loss.

TM 08780B-10

2-340

(1) Remove airline retaining clamp (79)

mounting hardware from rear cross-member (80) on disabled

vehicle. Allow air lines (81) and wire harness (82) to hang.




TM 08780B-10

2-341






engaged.

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-342

NOTE



or REMOTE.

(5) Adjust tow bar (21) height using A-frame so

that tow bar (21) is the same height as the disabled vehicle's pintle

hook (83).

NOTE


(5.1) Adjust tow bar (21) using control (37.1) so

that tow bar (21) is the same height as the disabled vehicle's pintle

hook (83).


position.

TM 08780B-10

2-343



GROUND GUIDE. OPERATOR MUST BACK IN SLOWLY,




UNDERSTAND TWO HAND SIGNALS - ONE THAT MEANS





WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-344




section e.

NOTE














compressed.

NOTE





CAUTION

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-345

NOTE







TM 08780B-10

2-346

TO AVOID EQUIPMENT DAMAGE LOCKOUT STRUT







(53).


chains (47).

CAUTION

TM 08780B-10

2-347



chains (14).




TM 08780B-10

2-348

NOTE



position.







WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-349




position.

NOTE


disabled vehicle.




TM 08780B-10

2-350

o. Lowering Vehicle





WILL NOT WORK.



engaged.

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-351









TM 08780B-10

2-352

NOTE



or REMOTE.




NOTE





TM 08780B-10

2-353




and pins.


disabled vehicle to the ground. Unhook, remove, and stow long





TM 08780B-10

2-354

NOTE





TM 08780B-10

2-355





NOTE





position.

NOTE



position.



TM 08780B-10

2-356

(17) Install air line retaining clamp (79)

mounting hardware on rear crossmember (80) of disabled vehicle.

(18) Remove and stow all towing equipment


TM 08780B-10

2-357

p. MK48/48A1/17/17A1 Rear Lift and Tow

(1) Deploy rear landing leg (87). Refer to

paragraph 2-15.

NOTE


replace mounting hardware to avoid loss.


mounting hardware from rear crossmember (89) of the disabled

vehicle. Allow air lines (90) and wire harness (91) to hang.

LANDING LEG IS HEAVY AND SHOULD BE HANDLED BY


(3) Remove cotter pins (92), washers (93), pin

(94), and remove rear landing leg (87). Replace cotter pins,

washers, and pin in landing leg. Stow landing leg.

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-358







WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-359



engaged.

NOTE



or REMOTE.




NOTE


TM 08780B-10

2-360





position.







UNDERSTAND TWO HAND SIGNALS-ONE THAT MEANS

BACK UP SLOWLY, AND ONE THAT MEANS STOP.




WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-361




section e.

NOTE






FOR LVSA1 SERIES VEHICLES ONLY, REAR MARKER

LIGHTS MAY BE DAMAGED DURING TOWING

OPERATION AND MUST BE REMOVED.

CAUTION

TM 08780B-10

2-362

(12.1) Remove two capscrews (95.1), lockwashers

(95.2) and rear marker light mounting bracket (95.3) from crane.

Secure rear marker light mounting bracket (95.3) as needed.









compressed.

CAUTION

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-363

NOTE





NOTE


to obtain the maximum lift height needed to attach tow cable.





TM 08780B-10

2-364

TO AVOID DAMAGE TO GLAD HANDS, MAKE SURE LONG

LIFTING CHAINS (47) CLEAR GLAD HANDS BEFORE

LIFTING DISABLED VEHICLE.




CAUTION

TM 08780B-10

2-365



(53).

TM 08780B-10

2-366


chains (47).



chains (14).




NOTE



position.

TM 08780B-10

2-367










position.

NOTE


disabled vehicle.




WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-368

q. Lowering Vehicle





WILL NOT WORK.

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-369


AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS position.


(4) Remove pin (11) and shackle (12) from

A-frame cylinder (13). Place shackle (12) through the large eyes

of small lifting chains (14). Install shackle (12) and chains (14) on

cylinder 0 3) with pin (11).

TM 08780B-10

2-370



(89).

NOTE


(6) Turn switch (32) to either MANUAL or

REMOTE.




NOTE





TM 08780B-10

2-371




and pins.

TM 08780B-10

2-372



chains (47).




NOTE


TM 08780B-10

2-373








NOTE





position.

NOTE



position.

TM 08780B-10

2-374



NOTE


(16.1) Install rear marker light mounting bracket

(95.3) to crane with two capscrews (95.1), and lockwashers (95.2).

TM 08780B-10

2-375

NOTE

Be sure air line clamp nearest landing leg is installed on top of

the crossmember (89) with head of bolt on bottom of

crossmember.

(17) Install air line retaining clamp (88)

mounting hardware on rear crossmember (89) of the disabled

vehicle.

LANDING LEG IS HEAVY AND SHOULD BE HANDLED BY


(18) Install landing leg (87) using pin (94),

washers (93), and cotter pins (92).



WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-376

r. Removal of Towing Equipment

NOTE

Perform step (1.1) only if operating an LVSA1 series vehicle.

(1) Remove retainers (20), pins (19), and

lockout strut (17) from mounts (18).

(1.1) Connect sensor cap (17.1).

TM 08780B-10

2-377

(2) Remove both articulation joint roll stops

(15) from the articulation joint (16).

PIVOT BEAM IS HEAVY AND SHOULD BE HANDLED BY


NOTE

Perform step (3) only if disabled vehicle was lifted and towed

from the front.

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-378

(3) Remove retaining pins (41), pins (40), and

pivot beam (38).

(4) Lower A-frame cylinder (13) and unhook

small lifting chains (14).






TM 08780B-10

2-379



(7) Remove retaining pins (30), pins (29) and

tow bar (21).

(8) Remove retaining pins (23) and pins (24).

Remove brace (22) from tow bar (21).

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-380

(9) Remove retaining pins (28), pins (27) and

clevises (25).

(10) Install one A-frame support strap (6) on A-

frame (7). Take up all slack in strap (6) to support weight of A-

frame.

(11) Remove pin (8), shackle (9) and support

chain (5) from the side of the A-frame that is not being supported

by strap.

(12) Install pin (8), and shackle (9) back on

A-frame (7). Install remaining support strap (6) and support A-

frame (7) by eliminating all slack.

(13) Remove strap (6) that was used to first

support the A-frame (7) for removing support chain (5).

TM 08780B-10

2-381

(14) Remove pin (8), shackle (9), and support

chain (5) from A-frame (7).

(15) Install pin (8) and shackle (9) back on A-

frame. Install last support strap (6) and take up all slack to support

A-frame (7).

(16) Install retaining strap (3) as shown.

(17) Remove hooked ends of support chains (5)

from ties down rings.

(18) Remove tie down rings (4) from cargo bed

and install back on vehicle's frame.

TM 08780B-10

2-382

(19) Stow and secure all chains and towing

equipment.

2-19. LIFT TOWING THE 7-TON TRUCK BY THE LVS

WRECKER

a. General Description

(1) The LVS Wrecker can flat tow and lift and

tow the 7-Ton Truck. The A-frame of the wrecker is used to lift

and tow vehicles from the front or rear loaded or unloaded.

(2) The following procedures are provided to

give specific details for lift towing the 7-Ton Truck with the LVS

Wrecker. The additional items required to perform rear lift and

tow are the LVS Towing Kit P/N 3250986 which includes the Tow

Bar Adapter P/N 3205644, Pin P/N 1377810, and Snapper Pin P/N

3364032. The items required to perform front lift and tow are the

7-Ton Truck Adapter P/N 3406259, Pin P/N 3390992, and Klik

Pin P/N 3406240. The 7-Ton Truck Wire Rope Assembly

(Towing Cable) NSN 4010-01-498-1903 is used in both

procedures.

TM 08780B-10

2-383


(1) Follow the same procedures outlined in this

manual for the LVS except for the special procedures that are

resident to the 7-Ton Truck only:

EQUIPMENT DAMAGE MAY OCCUR IF THE FOLLOWING

GROSS COMBINED WEIGHT (GCW) RATINGS ARE

EXCEEDED.


154,000 lbs 105,000 lbs

(69,916 kg) (47,670 kg)

(2) Front Lift and Tow. When lifting and

towing a 7-Ton Truck from the front, the 7-Ton Truck towing

cable, and the heavy duty tow bar must be installed on the LVS

Wrecker and the pivot beam must be installed on the 7-Ton Truck.

(3) Rear Lift and Tow. When lifting and towing

a 7-Ton Truck from the rear, the light duty tow bar, and the 7-Ton

towing cable must be installed on the LVS Wrecker.

c. Preparation of 7-Ton Truck to be Front Lifted and

Towed

Turn battery disconnect switch of disabled vehicle to OFF position

(Refer to TM 10629-10).

EXCEPT IN AN EXTREME EMERGENCY, DO NOT FRONT

LIFT AND TOW A DISABLED 7-TON TRUCK WITHOUT

FIRST DISCONNECTING THE PROP SHAFT BETWEEN

THE TRANSFER CASE AND AXLE NO. 2 DRIVELINE OF

THE DISABLED VEHICLE. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY


CAUTION

CAUTION

TM 08780B-10

2-384

3

d. Front Lift and Tow of Disabled Vehicle

(1) When installing the pivot beam, the

following caution must be applied.

SHACKLE PIN (18) SHOULD BE INSTALLED FROM TOP

ONLY ON 7-TON TRUCK. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY


(2) Install shackle pin (18) on tow bar (11) and

pivot beam (3) from top and secure with retaining pin (19).

(3) Install 7-Ton Truck towing cable to

A-frame assembly before hooking up cable. (7-Ton Truck

towing cable is longer than the LVS towing cable.)

(4) Extend A-frame cylinder (20)

enough to hook small lifting chains (21) to long lifting

chains (7). Hook small chain at the 18th link from the grab

hook ends of long lifting chains (7).

CAUTION

TM 08780B-10

2-385

NOTE

At this point, the vehicle should be hooked up, lifted and waiting

installation of airlines and safety chains.






PERSONNEL.

(5) If disabled vehicle’s air system is

inoperable, brake chambers on axles No. 2 and No. 3 must be

caged.

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-386

ENSURE INTER-VEHICLE AIRLINES ARE NOT CROSSED.


DEATH TO PERSONNEL AND DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.

• WHEN CONNECTED, AIRLINES MUST ALLOW FOR

ALL POTENTIAL MOVEMENT BETWEEN THE

TOWING VEHICLE AND THE DISABLED VEHICLE.

• IF AIRLINES HAVE EXCESSIVE SLACK WHEN

CONNECTED, THEY SHOULD BE LOOSELY

WRAPPED AROUND TOW BAR OR BUMPER TO

TAKE UP A PORTION OF THE SLACK.

(6) Install two shackles (32.1) and pins (32.2)

on lower tie down eyes (32.3) of wrecker.

WARNING

CAUTION

TM 08780B-10

2-387

WHEN SECURING HOOK OF SAFETY CHAIN TO A LINK

OF THE SAFETY CHAIN, THE OPEN SIDE OF THE HOOK

MUST POINT DOWN. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT


NOTE

• When connecting safety chains, ensure safety chains

cross between wrecker and disabled vehicle.

• When routing safety chain around lower control arm of

disabled vehicle and securing chain to itself, keep chain

as tight as possible.

(7) Wrap one end of 16 ft (5 m) safety chain

(32.4) around lower right control arm (32.5) of disabled vehicle

and secure hook (32.6) of safety chain (32.4) to safety chain (32.4)

using small shackle (32.7).

NOTE

Adjust safety chain slack so safety chain just touches ground.

(8) Route other end of safety chain (32.4)

through left rear shackle (32.1) of wrecker and secure hook (32.8)

of safety chain (32.4) to appropriate link of safety chain (32.4)

using small shackle (32.7).

(9) Repeat steps (6) and (7) for opposite sides of

disabled vehicle and wrecker.

(10) Position loose end of long lifting chain (7)

up under disabled vehicle to prevent long lifting chain (7) from

dragging on ground.

CAUTION

TM 08780B-10

2-388

e. Lowering Vehicle

NOTE

When lowering the vehicle, follow the same procedures as

outlined in this manual except apply the following steps that are

specific to the 7-Ton Truck only.

(1) Remove two small shackles (32.7) from

hooks (32.6 and 32.8). Remove two safety chains (32.4) from

lower control arms (32.5) of disabled vehicle and shackles (32.1)

of wrecker and stow.

(2) Remove and stow two pins (32.2) and

shackles (32.1) from lower tie down eyes (32.3) of wrecker.

TM 08780B-10

2-389

f. Preparation of 7-Ton Truck for Rear Lift and Tow

NOTE

Follow the same procedures outlined in this manual except for

the special instructions that are resident to the 7-Ton Truck only.

(1) Turn off battery disconnect switch of

disabled vehicle. (Refer to TM 10629-10).

EXCEPT IN AN EXTREME EMERGENCY, DO NOT REAR

LIFT AND TOW A DISABLED 7-TON TRUCK WITHOUT

FIRST DISCONNECTING THE PROP SHAFT BETWEEN

THE TRANSFER CASE AND AXLE NO. 1 OF THE

DISABLED VEHICLE. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY


(2) Install steering column lock (refer to

TM 10629-10).

g. Rear Lift and Tow Procedure

LIGHT DUTY TOW BAR MUST BE USED FOR REAR LIFT

AND TOW OF 7-TON TRUCK. THE 7-TON TOWING CABLE

MUST BE ATTACHED TO THE A-FRAME PULLEY FOR

THIS PROCEDURE. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT

IN DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT OR SEVERE INJURY OR

DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

(1) Attach two adapters (50) to rear upper tow

eyes (51) with two pins (52) and snap pins (53).

(2) Install light duty tow bar (54) and two

adapters (50) with two pins (55) and snap pins (56).

CAUTION

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-390

ENSURE STEERING COLUMN LOCK IS INSTALLED ON 7-

TON TRUCK PRIOR TO PERFORMING REAR LIFT AND

TOW (REFER TO TM 10629-10). FAILURE TO COMPLY


NOTE

After removing receptacle mounting hardware, replace hardware

on receptacle to help prevent loss.

(3) Remove two locknuts (57), screws (58), and

receptacle (59) from cross member (60). Push receptacle and

attached wires in towards center of vehicle.

CAUTION

TM 08780B-10

2-391

WHEN INSTALLING LIFTING CHAINS, ENSURE HOOKS

DO NOT CATCH OR PINCH ANY WIRES. FAILURE TO

COMPLY MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.


grab hooks are hooked on gussets of rear cross member (60).

(5) Attach 7-Ton Truck Towing Cable (24) end

to rear tow eyes (63 and 68) using two shackles (64) and pins (65).


full weight of disabled vehicle to be supported by 7-Ton Truck

towing cable (24).

CAUTION

TM 08780B-10

2-392

(7) Attach two shackles (32.1) and pins (32.2)

on lower tie down eyes (32.3) of wrecker.

TM 08780B-10

2-393

WHEN SECURING HOOK OF SAFETY CHAIN TO A LINK

OF THE SAFETY CHAIN, THE OPEN SIDE OF THE HOOK

MUST POINT DOWN. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT


NOTE

• When routing safety chain around the rear axle lower

control arm of disabled vehicle and securing chain to

itself, keep chain as taught as possible.

• When connecting safety chains, ensure safety chains

cross between wrecker and disabled vehicle.

(8) Wrap one end of 16 ft (5 m) safety chain

(32.4) around lower right control arm (62.1) of disabled and secure

hook (32.6) of safety chain (32.4) to safety chain (32.4) using

small shackle (32.7).

CAUTION

TM 08780B-10

2-394

(9) Route one end of safety chain (32.4) through

right rear shackle (32.1) of wrecker and secure hook (32.8) of

safety chain (32.4) to appropriate link of safety chain (32.4) using

small shackle (32.7).

(10) Secure hook (32.6) of safety chain (32.4) to

appropriate link of safety chain (32.4) so both runs of chain have

enough slack so it just touches the ground.

(11) Repeat steps (9) and (10) for opposite sides

of disabled vehicle and wrecker.

h. Lowering Vehicle

NOTE

After following the procedures in the manual to lower the

vehicle, the following procedures apply.

(1) Remove two small shackles (32.7) from

hooks (32.6 and 32.8).

(2) Remove and stow two safety chains (32.4)

from lower control arms (62.1) of disabled vehicle and shackles

(32.1) of wrecker.

(3) Remove and stow two pins (32.2) and

shackles (32.1) from lower tie down eyes (32.3) of wrecker.

TM 08780B-10

2-395

(4) Remove long lifting chains (7) from gussets

of rear cross member (60).

(5) Remove 7-Ton Truck towing cable (24)

from rear tow eyes (63 and 68) by removing pins (65) and shackles

(64). Stow shackles and pins.

TM 08780B-10

Change 1 2-395.1

2-19.1. LIFT TOWING THE LVSR BY THE LVS

WRECKER

a. General Description.

(1) The LVS Wrecker can lift and tow the

LVSR. The A-frame of the wrecker is used to lift and tow vehicles

from the front or rear while unloaded.

(2) The following procedures are provided to

give specific details for lift towing the LVSR with the LVS

Wrecker. The items required to perform front lift and tow are the

LVS to LVSR Adapter P/N 3699844, Pin P/N 3390992, and Klik

Pin P/N 3406240. The additional items required to perform rear

lift and tow are the LVS Towing Kit P/N 3250986 which includes

the Tow Bar Adapter P/N 3205644, Pin P/N 1377810, and Snapper

Pin P/N 3364032. The LVS towing cable PN 1591680 (short

cable) is used in both procedures.




resident to the LVSR only:

EQUIPMENT DAMAGE COULD OCCUR IF THE

FOLLOWING GCW(GROSS COMBINATION WEIGHT)

RATINGS ARE EXCEEDED.


154,000 lbs 105,000

(69916 kg) (47670 kg)

(2) Front Lift and Tow. When lifting and

CAUTION

TM 08780B-10

2-395.2 Change 1

towing a LVSR from the front, the LVS towing cable, and the

heavy duty tow bar must be installed on the LVS wrecker and the

LVS to LVSR adapter NSN 2510-01-568-7223 must be installed

on the LVSR.

(3) Rear Lift and Tow. When lifting and towing

a LVSR from the rear, the heavy duty tow bar, and the LVS

towing cable must be installed on the LVS Wrecker.

c. Preparation of LVSR to be Front Lifted and Towed

Turn battery disconnect switch of disabled vehicle to OFF position

(Refer to TM 11313-OR).

EXCEPT IN AN EXTREME EMERGENCY, DO NOT FRONT

LIFT AND TOW A DISABLED LVSR WITHOUT FIRST

DISCONNECTING THE PROP SHAFT BETWEEN THE

TRANSFER CASE AND AXLE NO. 3 OF THE DISABLED

VEHICLE. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN


d. Front Lift and Tow of Disabled Vehicle

(1) Install LVS to LVSR adapter (38) on front

tow eyes (39) of the disabled vehicle. Secure beam to eyes with


CAUTION

TM 08780B-10

Change 1 2-395.3

SHACKLE PIN (18) SHOULD BE INSTALLED FROM TOP

ONLY ON LVSR. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN


(2) Install shackle pin (18) on tow bar (11) and

LVS to LVSR Adapter (3) from top and secure with retaining pin

(19).

(3) Install LVS towing cable to A-frame

assembly before hooking up cable.





hook small lifting chains (14) to long lifting chains (47). Hook

small chain at the appropriate link from the grab hook ends of long


CAUTION

TM 08780B-10

2-395.4 Change 1

(6) Install limp home strut on #2 axle of

disabled vehicle (Refer to TM 11313-OR).

(7) Remove propeller shaft between transfer

case and axle No. 3 of disabled vehicle (Refer to TM 11313-OR).

(8) Disconnect ABS system on disabled vehicle


(9) Release parking brake on disabled vehicle


(10) Place transfer case of disabled vehicle in

neutral position (Refer to TM 11313-OR).

TM 08780B-10

Change 1 2-395.5

DO NOT STAND BETWEEN VEHICLES WHILE LIFTING.

TOWED VEHICLE COULD ROLL FORWARD, CRUSHING

YOU BETWEEN THE VEHICLES.


NOTE

Use shackles (51) and pins (52) from the lower tow eyes of the

wrecker.

(12) Attach towing cable (53) ring ends to lifting

eyes on the LVS to LVSR Adapter (38) using shackles (51) and

pins (52).

NOTE



(13) Extend the A-frame cylinder (13) fully,

allowing full weight of disabled vehicle to be supported by towing

cable (53).

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-395.6 Change 1


chains (47).




chains (14).




TM 08780B-10

Change 1 2-395.7



NOTE

If the disabled vehicle's air system is inoperable, the brakes must

be manually released. Refer to TM 11313-OR.



wrecker. Connect air lines (54) to front glad hands (56) of disabled

vehicle. Service-to-service (blue-to-blue). Emergency-to-

emergency (red-to-red). Ensure air lines are suspended at least 18

inches off the deck. Open ball valve (57).

(19) Connect intravehicular electrical cable.

CAUTION

TM 08780B-10

2-395.8 Change 1

NOTE



position.


position.

(21) Push TRAILER AIR SUPPLY valve (58)

and parking brake valve (2) in to charge towed vehicle's air

system.

TM 08780B-10

Change 1 2-395.9

NOTE

Do not exceed 15 MPH (24 km) on road or 5 MPH (1.6 km) off

road when towing a disabled LVSR.

(22) Place transmission shifter (1) in Drive - 3.

Place transfer case shifter (59) in LOW range. Vehicle is now

ready to tow.

e. Lowering Vehicle


and apply parking brake valve (2). Pull TRAILER AIR SUPPLY

valve (58) out.

TM 08780B-10

2-395.10 Change 1



WILL NOT WORK.



engaged.


WARNING

TM 08780B-10

Change 1 2-395.11





(5) Remove air lines (54) from glad hands (55)






stowage. Thread grab hook end of chains (47) up between the

disabled vehicles skid plate (48) and the LVS to LVSR Adapter

(38). Hook the grab hooks in the angle pockets on the LVS to

LVSR Adapter (38).

TM 08780B-10

2-395.12 Change 1

NOTE



or REMOTE.



lifting chains (47) at the appropriate link from the grab hook end.

NOTE


(9.1) Using control (37.1) lower A-frame cylinder

(13) until small lifting chains (14) can be hooked to long lifting

chains (47) at the appropriate link from the grab hook end.

TM 08780B-10

Change 1 2-395.13


(11) Remove towing cable (53) from LVS to

LVSR Adapter (38) by removing pins (52) and shackles (51). Stow

shackles and pins.

(12) Extend A-frame cylinder (13) and lower


chains (47).

TM 08780B-10

2-395.14 Change 1





NOTE





TM 08780B-10

Change 1 2-395.15


position.

(16) Remove and stow retaining pin (46) and

shackle pin (45).

NOTE



position.

(18) Release parking brake valve (2) and drive

wrecker forward.

(19) Remove and stow LVS to LVSR Adapter

shackle (42).

(20) Remove and stow all towing equipment used

for the lift and tow of the LVSR.

TM 08780B-10

2-395.16 Change 1

f. LVSR Rear Lift and Tow

REAR LIFT AND TOW PROCEDURES ARE FOR SHORT

DISTANCES ONLY. LIMIT REAR LIFT AND TOW TO

DISTANCES OF LESS THAN ONE MILE (1.6 KM) OR

DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT COULD RESULT.

TURNING RADIUS IS REDUCED WHEN PERFORMING

REAR LIFT AND TOW. AVOID SHARP TURNING

OPERATIONS OR DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT COULD

RESULT.

(1) Remove rear work light (Refer to TM

11313-OR) and stow in cab of disabled vehicle.



(63).

CAUTION

TM 08780B-10

Change 1 2-395.17






engaged.

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-395.18 Change 1

NOTE



or REMOTE.




NOTE






position.

32

TM 08780B-10

Change 1 2-395.19







UNDERSTAND TWO HAND SIGNALS – ONE THAT MEANS







and open pintle hook (64). If necessary refer to paragraph 2-33,

section e.

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-395.20 Change 1

NOTE










DO NOT STAND BETWEEN VEHICLES. VEHICLES COULD

ROLL, CRUSHING YOU BETWEEN THEM.



WARNING

CAUTION

TM 08780B-10

Change 1 2-395.21

compressed.

NOTE





(14) Remove front drive shaft of disabled vehicle


(15) Disconnect ABS system of disabled vehicle


(16) Cage #3 axle brakes if required (Refer to

TM 11313-OR).

(17) Release parking brake on disabled vehicle


(18) Place transfer case of disabled vehicle in

neutral (Refer to TM 11313-OR).

NOTE




TM 08780B-10

2-395.22 Change 1


Hook the small chains at the appropriate link from the grab hook

ends of the long lifting chains (47).

FAILURE TO SECURE THE STEERING WHEEL COULD

RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

(20) Secure the steering wheel of the disabled

vehicle with a cargo strap. Ensure that the wheels on the disabled

vehicle are pointing straight ahead.


(22) Attach LVS towing cable (53) ends to rear


WARNING

TM 08780B-10

Change 1 2-395.23

NOTE

Ring ends of towing cable (53) fit into slotted area in the lift

bracket (65).



(53). Ring ends of towing cables (53) must fit into slots in the lift

bracket (65).


TM 08780B-10

2-395.24 Change 1

chains (47).



chains (14).




NOTE



position.

TM 08780B-10

Change 1 2-395.25








position.

NOTE

Do not exceed 15 MPH (24 km) on road or 5 MPH (1.6 km)off

road when lifting and towing a disabled LVSR.


WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-395.26 Change 1



g. Lowering Vehicle





WILL NOT WORK.



engaged.

WARNING

2

TM 08780B-10

Change 1 2-395.27








(63).

TM 08780B-10

2-395.28 Change 1

NOTE



or REMOTE.




NOTE





TM 08780B-10

Change 1 2-395.29




and pins.


TM 08780B-10

2-395.30 Change 1

disabled vehicle to the ground. Unhook, remove and stow long





NOTE









TM 08780B-10

Change 1 2-395.31

NOTE





position.

NOTE


(15) Turn control switch (32) to OFF position.



TM 08780B-10

2-395.32 Change 1

(17) Remove and stow all towing equipment used

for the lift and tow of the LVSR.

TM 08780B-10

2-396

2-20. MK15/15A1 WINCH OPERATION

a. General Description. On LVS vehicles, the

recovery winch is controlled and operated by either the manual

control, located at the crane control panel, or by the remote unit.

On LVSA1 series vehicles, the recovery winch can be operated by

remote control only. On both LVS and LVSA1 series vehicles, the

recovery winch has two speeds that are determined automatically

by the weight of the load. The winch is capable of a straight line

pull of 60,000 pounds (27,240 kg) or an angled pull of 10,000

pounds (4,540 kg). See data plate on left rear fender for further

load information. A side pull relief valve, mounted on main

control panel, keeps hydraulic pressure within safe limits when

TM 08780B-10

2-397

making side pulls. This prevents damage to equipment. Bottom

and side rollers on the A-frame support the winch cable during

operation. The operator and equipment are also protected by the

following safety features:

• A brake valve that applies a braking force on the winch and

prevents loads from falling or becoming uncontrolled

during operation.

• A fail-safe brake within the winch that applies

automatically anytime hydraulic pressure is lost.

b. Preparation for Winch Operation

HEARING PROTECTION MUST BE WORN DURING

WINCHING OPERATION.

(1) When possible, position rear of vehicle in

direct line with load or object being winched.

(2) Move shifter (1) to N (neutral). Engage

parking brake (2). Shut off engine. Turn engine start switch (3) to

ON.

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-398

(3) Chock front and back of wheels on the

number four axle.



WILL NOT WORK.



engaged.

(5) Install lockout strut. Refer to paragraph 2-

18.f.

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-399

c. Selection of Controls

NOTE

All winch controls, manual or remote, are proportional controls.

The more pressure on the control, the faster the selected winch

movement.

(1) Use manual controls as follows:


(b) Work manual deck winch control (6)

up and down. Make sure it has full travel.

(c) Start engine. Turn control switch (5)

to MANUAL. Winch is now ready for operation. Refer to section

d.

(2) Use remote controls as follows:


Remove remote control (7) from stowage compartment.

TM 08780B-10

2-400

NOTE

One of two deadman switches must be depressed to activate

remote control.

(b) With control switch (5) in REMOTE,

depress one of the deadman switches (8 or 9), and use remote deck

winch control (10) to operate control (6). Make sure mechanical

linkage has full travel. If not, notify Organizational Maintenance.

(c) Turn control switch (5) to OFF.

(d) Start engine. Turn control switch (5)

to remote. Winch is now ready for operation.

d. Selection of Controls (MK15A1 Series Vehicles

Only)

NOTE

The recovery winch on LVSA1 series vehicles is controlled by

remote control only.

(1) Remove remote control (1) from stowage

compartment (2).

(2) Plug remote control cable (3) into receptacle

(4) located on auxiliary hydraulics control panel (5).

(3) Start engine. Winch is now ready to

operate.

TM 08780B-10

2-401

e. Attaching and Pulling Load

• DO NOT HANDLE WINCH CABLE UNLESS

NECESSARY AND NEVER WITH BARE HANDS.

ALWAYS WEAR LEATHER GLOVES WHEN

HANDLING CABLES. NEVER ALLOW CABLE TO

RUN THROUGH HANDS. BROKEN WIRES CAN

CAUSE INJURIES.

• DO NOT HOLD ONTO WINCH CABLE IF TENSION

IS REQUIRED TO GUIDE THE CABLE BACK ON

THE SPOOL. THE ASSISTANT WILL HOLD THE

CLEVIS, NOT THE CABLE. NEITHER THE

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-402

OPERATOR NOT THE ASSISTANT SHOULD STAND

WITHIN ARMS LENGTH OF THE SPOOL WHEN

THE CABLE IS BEING RETRIEVED.

• DO NOT OPERATE WINCH WITH LESS THAN FIVE

COILS OF CABLE. CABLE CLAMP WILL NOT HOLD

UNDER DIRECT STRAIN.

(1) Using manual control (6) or remote control

(7), pay out winch cable while assistant pulls cable to object being

winched.

NOTE


(1.1) Using remote control (7.1), pay out winch

cable while assistant pulls cable to object being winched.

(2) To rig load, attach utility chains or cable

slings to shackles or pintle on load being recovered. Rig the load

carefully to prevent possible damage to load when winch cable is

rewound.

NOTE

On LVSA1 series vehicles, the relief valve is located on the

auxiliary hydraulic control panel. Operation has not changed.

TM 08780B-10

2-403

(3) Note position of winch cable. If cable is

more than 10 degrees right or left of vehicle center line as shown,

side pull relief valve (11) must be used. Do not exceed 23 degrees

on a downward pull.

(4) Place relief valve (11) up for straight pulls

and down for side pulls. Do not exceed 60,000 pounds (27,240 kg)

for straight pulls and 10,000 pounds (4,540 kg) for side pulls.

DIRECT ALL PERSONNEL TO STAND CLEAR OF WINCH

CABLE AND LOAD DURING WINCHING OPERATION. A

SNAPPED CABLE OR SHIFTING LOAD CAN BE

EXTREMELY DANGEROUS.

(5) Start winch pull. If wrecker does not hold, it

will be necessary to install ground spades. Shut down engine and

refer to section e.

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-404

TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO STOW HOOK, DO NOT

OVERWIND WINCH CABLE.

(6) After winching operation is complete, use

winch control (6) or (10) to rewind cable. Stow winch cable on

stow hook and take up slack in winch cable.

NOTE


(6.1) After winching operation is complete, use

winch control (7.1) to rewind winch cable. Stow winch cable on

stow hook and take up slack in winch cable.

CAUTION

TM 08780B-10

2-405

NOTE




position.

(9) Remove wheel chocks.

(10) Clean and stow any other equipment used.

TM 08780B-10

2-406

f. Ground Spade Operations

(1) Remove two tie down rings (12) from the

vehicle's frame. Install the two tie down rings (12) into cargo bed.

NOTE

A-frame support chains must be hooked to the cargo bed first,

rather than the A-frame. Otherwise, the A-frame support chains

cannot be installed.

(2) Remove two A-frame support chains (13)

from stowage compartment. Attach hooked ends of chains (13) to

tie down rings (12).

NOTE

A-frame must be in the most upright position possible in order to

attach support chains.

(3) Remove one A-frame support strap (14)

from A-frame (15).


frame (15). Place shackle (17) through the free end of A-frame

support chain (13) and attach to A-frame (15) with pin (16).

TM 08780B-10

2-407

(5) Repeat steps (3) and (4) to install the other

A-frame support chain (13).


GROUND SPADES AND TUBES ARE VERY HEAVY. TO

PREVENT INJURY, USE TWO PEOPLE TO HANDLE

SPADES.

(7) Remove left and right spades (19) from on

top of rear stowage compartment.

(8) Remove two ground spade tubes (20) from

the back of rear stowage compartment.

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-408

(9) Install clevises (21) on spade tubes (20)

using pins (22) and retainers (23).

(10) Install clevises (21) on wrecker tow eyes

(24) using pins (25) and retainers (26).

(11) Connect spades (19) to tubes (20) using pins

(27) and retainers (28).

(12) Connect spades (19) together, using pins

(29) and retainers (30).

TM 08780B-10

2-409

(13) Using two short chains (31) and two lifting

shackles (32), install the two lifting shackles (32) onto the large

eyelets (33) of the chains. Connect shackles to holes provided in

spades (19) with pins (34).

(14) Start engine.

TM 08780B-10

2-410

NOTE

• A-frame can be operated by either the manual or the

remote control.

• LVSA1 A-frame can only be operated by manual control.

Steps (15) through (17) not required on LVSA1 series

vehicles.

(15) Choose the method of operating the A-frame

cylinder by placing control switch (5) in either the MANUAL or

REMOTE position.

(16) If using the REMOTE position, depress one

of the two deadman switches (8 or 9), move control (35) to the left

to raise cylinder and right to lower.

(17) If using the MANUAL position, move

control (36) up to raise cylinder or down to lower.

NOTE


(17.1) Using control (36.1) located on the auxiliary

hydraulic control panel (36.2), move control up to raise the

cylinder or down to lower.

TM 08780B-10

2-411

(18) Using control (35 or 36), lower wrecker

cylinder (37) about half of the cylinder travel. Remove pin (38)

and shackle (39) from cylinder (37). Using two long chains (40)

with large eyelets and hooks, connect eyelets to shackle (39) on


NOTE


(18.1) Using control (36.1), lower wrecker cylinder

(37) about half of the cylinder travel. Remove pin (38) and

shackle (39) from cylinder (37). Using two long chains (40) with

large eyelets and hooks, connect eyelets to shackle (39) on cylinder

(37) with pin (38).

(19) Connect hooked ends of chains (40) from

wrecker cylinder to ground spade chains (31). Install two small

shackles (41) on hooks so that the attached chains will not come

apart.

TM 08780B-10

2-412

(20) Install chain spreader bar (42) three links

down from wrecker cylinder on both chains (40).

(21) Start winching procedures. If back of

wrecker lifts off ground, reposition ground spades. Release

tension on winch cable. Raise wrecker cylinder to raise ground

spades.

(22) Lower wrecker cylinder (37) and ground

spades (19). Make pull. Repeat steps (11) and (12) as necessary.

(23) Complete winching operation.

TM 08780B-10

2-413

g. Stowage of Ground Spades After Operation

(1) Lower wrecker cylinder (37) and remove

spreader bar (42) from between lifting chains (40).

(2) Remove two small shackles (41) from lifting

chains (40). Separate chains (40 and 31).

(3) Remove pin (38) and shackle (39). Remove

chains (40) from shackle (39). Reinstall pin (38) and shackle (39)

on cylinder (37).

(4) Remove two pins (34), shackles (32), and chains

(31-) from spade assembly.

TM 08780B-10

2-414

(5) Remove retainers (30) and pins (29) holding

spades (19) together.

(6) Remove two retainers (28) and pins (27)

holding spade tubes (20) to ground spades (19). Stow spades (19)

on cargo body.

(7) Remove tubes (20) and shackles (21) from

tow eyes (24) by removing retainers (26) and pins (25).

(8) Remove shackles (21) from tubes (20) by

removing retainers (23) and pins (22). Stow parts.

h. Stowage of A-frame for Travel

(1) Install one A-frame support strap (14) on A-

frame and winch (16). Take up all slack in strap (14) to support

weight of A-frame.

TM 08780B-10

2-415


chain (13) from the side of the A-frame that is not being supported

by strap.

(3) Install pin (16) and shackle (17) back on A-

frame (15). Install remaining support strap (14) and support A-

frame (15) by eliminating all slack.

(4) Remove strap (14) that was used to first

support the A-frame (15) for removing support chain (13).


chain (13) from A-frame (15).

TM 08780B-10

2-416

(6) Install pin (16), and shackle (17) back on A-

frame. Install last support strap (14) and take up all slack to

support A-frame (15).

(7) Remove hooked ends of support chains (13)

from tie down rings (12).

(8) Remove tie down rings (12) from cargo bed

and install back on vehicle's frame.

(9) Stow and secure all chains and equipment.

(10) Remove lockout strut. Refer to paragraph 2-

18 i.

TM 08780B-10

2-417

2-21. MK15/15A1 AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS FOR TOOL

USAGE

a. Preparation for Use

(1) Pull hydraulic hose (1) out to length needed.

Then slowly allow hose to retract several inches. This will apply

the hose reel lock.

(2) Match up quick disconnect couplings (2 and

3) with tool ends (4 and 5).

(3) Push couplings (2 and 3) onto tool ends (4

and 5). Couplings will click when they are securely attached.

TM 08780B-10

2-418

NOTE

If coupling sleeves cannot be rotated, the couplings are not fully

engaged with tool.

(4) Rotate safety lock sleeves (6 and 7). This

will prevent hoses from being accidentally disconnected.

(5) Place transmission shifter (8) in (N) neutral,

apply PARKING BRAKE valve (9), and start engine.

TM 08780B-10

2-419



WILL NOT WORK.

(6) Pull SELECTOR VALVE (10) out.

b. Setting Controls

NOTE


(1) Move crane control switch (11) to

MANUAL.

NEVER EXCEED GALLON PER MINUTE (GPM) RATING

MARKED ON TOOLS. DAMAGE TO TOOL WILL RESULT.

NOTE

Before setting flow control valve, check the following table for

the tools required GPM range.

WARNING

CAUTION

TM 08780B-10

2-420

TABLE 2-9. TOOL GPM FLOW RANGES

TOOL REQUIRED

FLOW

OPTIMUM

FLOW

ONE INCH IMPACT

7-9 GPM

9 GPM

HALF-INCH IMPACT

4-12 GPM

10 GPM

HALF-INCH DRILL

4-12 GPM

–

CHAIN SAW

7-9 GPM

8 GPM

TM 08780B-10

2-421

(2) Set flow control valve (12) as follows:

(e) Rotate thumb screw (13)

counterclockwise.

(f) Move handle (14) to the required

GPM range for the tool being used. This is indicated on dial plate

(15), which reads 0-10 GPM and corresponds with the tool.

(g) Lock handle (14) at desired setting

by turning thumb screw (13) clockwise. Do not over tighten

thumb screw (13).

(3) Push AUXILIARY CIRCUIT control (16)

fully up to its detent position, labeled pressure.

NOTE

• On LVSA1 series vehicles, AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS

lever is on the auxiliary control panel located on the

driver side (left) rear fender.

• Perform step (3.1) on LVSA1 series vehicles only.

(3.1) Push AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS lever

(16.1) up to ON position.

TM 08780B-10

2-422

c. Tool Operation

• ALWAYS WEAR EYE PROTECTION WHEN

OPERATING HYDRAULIC POWER TOOLS.

• USE GLOVES WHEN OPERATING POWER TOOLS.

TOOLS WILL BECOME HOT AFTER A SHORT

PERIOD.

• DO NOT OPERATE HYDRAULIC TOOLS NEAR

ELECTRICAL POWER SOURCES OR ELECTRIC

POWER LINES. CONTACT OR NEAR CONTACT

WITH ELECTRICAL POWER SOURCES OR

ELECTRIC POWER LINES COULD CAUSE SERIOUS

INJURY OR DEATH BY ELECTROCUTION.

(1) One inch drive, impact

(a) Set controls. Refer to section b.

(b) Push lever (18) up for clockwise

rotation. Push lever (18) down for counterclockwise rotation.

(c) To operate impact, pull trigger (17).

(d) To stop impact, release trigger (17).

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-423

(2) Half-inch drive impact


(b) To operate impact, pull trigger (19).

(c) Push spool (20) right for clockwise

rotation, and left for counterclockwise rotation.

(d) To stop impact, release trigger (19).

(e) To install adapter (21), pull outward

on retainer sleeve (22) and insert adapter (21). Release sleeve (22)

to lock adapter.

(3) Half-inch drill


(b) Push spool (24) right for clockwise

rotation, and left for counterclockwise rotation.

(c) To operate drill, pull trigger (23).

(d) To stop drill, release trigger (23).

TM 08780B-10

2-424

(4) Chain saw

USE EXTREME CARE WHEN HANDLING AND

OPERATING CHAIN SAW. KEEP ALL PERSONNEL CLEAR

OF OPERATING AREA.

NOTE

Chain saw will not operate until safety catch is depressed.


(b) To operate saw, grasp handle so that

safety catch (22) will be depressed.

(c) Pull trigger (23).

(d) To stop chain saw, release trigger

(23).

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-425

d. After Operations

(1) Pull AUXILIARY CIRCUIT control (16)

down.

NOTE


(1.1) Pull AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS lever

(16.1) down to OFF position.

TM 08780B-10

2-426

(2) Rotate thumb screw (13) counterclockwise

and move handle (14) to 0 GPM. Rotate thumb screw clockwise to

lock handle.

NOTE


(3) Move control switch (11) to OFF.

(4) Shut down engine.

(5) Push SELECTOR VALVE (10) in.

(6) Rotate safety lock sleeves (6 and 7).

Remove couplings (2 and 3) from tool.

TM 08780B-10

2-427

NEVER ALLOW HOSE TO FREELY WIND ON REEL BY

ITSELF. DAMAGE TO REEL WILL RESULT.

(7) Pull hydraulic hose (1) out several inches,

and slowly walk hose in on reel.

2-22. MK15 AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS FOR

ADDITIONAL CRANE USAGE

a. Preparation for Coupling

WHEN SUPPLYING HYDRAULICS TO ANOTHER

VEHICLE, THE HYDRAULIC FLUID OF BOTH VEHICLES

WILL MIX. THE FLUID LEVEL IN THE HYDRAULIC

CAUTION

CAUTION

TM 08780B-10

2-428

RESERVOIR MUST, THEREFORE, BE CHECKED SO THAT

IT DOES NOT BECOME OVER FILLED.

(1) Position vehicle as close as possible to

trailer requiring hydraulics.

(2) Pull hydraulic hose (1) out to length needed.

Then slowly allow hose to retract several inches. This will apply

the hose reel lock.

(3) Remove adapters (2 and 3) from stowage

compartment.

(4) Match up quick disconnect couplings (4 and

5) with adapters (2 and 3).

(5) Push couplings (4 and 5) onto adapters (2

and 3). The couplings will click when they are securely attached.

TM 08780B-10

2-429

(6) Rotate safety lock sleeves (6 and 7). This

will prevent hoses from being accidentally disconnected.

(7) Remove hydraulic hoses (8 and 9), between

front power unit and trailer, as follows:

(a) Pull back on quick disconnect

coupling sleeve (10). Grasp hose (8) and pull away.

(b) Repeat step (a) for remaining

hydraulic hose (9).

(c) Insert protective plugs (11) in quick disconnect

couplings (10).



WILL NOT WORK.

(8) Attach hydraulic hose (1) to trailer hoses (8

and 9). Make sure that the hydraulic hoses are properly engaged

and secure

(9) Pull SELECTOR VALVE (12) out.

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-430

(10) Place transmission shifter (13) in (N)

neutral. Apply PARKING BRAKE valve (14), and start engine.

b. Setting Controls

NOTE

Step (1) not required on LVSAI series vehicles. (1) Move control

switch (15) to MANUAL.

TM 08780B-10

2-431

(2) Set flow control valve (16) as follows:

(a) Rotate thumb screw (17)

counterclockwise.

NOTE

Increasing the flow control valve setting does not increase

hydraulic power.

(b) Move handle (18) to 5 as indicated

on dial plate (19).

(c) Lock handle (18) in the setting by

turning thumb screw (17) clockwise. Do not over tighten thumb

screw (17).

(3) Push AUXILIARY CIRCUIT control (20)

fully up to its detent position, labeled PRESSURE.

TM 08780B-10

2-432

NOTE

• On LVSA1 series vehicles, AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS

lever is part of the auxiliary control panel, located on the

left rear fender.

• Perform step (3.1) on LVSA1 series vehicles only.

(3.1) Push AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS lever

(20.1) up to the ON position.

(4) If an electrical failure has occurred in the

trailer being slaved, the crane's Emergency Manual Shut Down

Valve must be closed as shown.

CLOSE THIS VALVE IF AN ELECTRICAL FAILURE

HAS OCCURRED ON THE MK15 BEING SLAVED.

TM 08780B-10

2-433

CLOSE THIS VALVE IF AN ELECTRICAL FAILURE

HAS OCCURRED ON THE MK17 BEING SLAVED.

NOTE


(4.1) If an electrical failure has occurred in the

trailer being slaved, push and hold the crane's MANUAL

OVERRIDE pushbutton switch.

TM 08780B-10

2-434

PUSH AND HOLD THIS VALVE CLOSED IF AN

ELECTRICAL FAILURE HAS OCCURRED ON

THE MK15A1 BEING SLAVED.

PUSH AND HOLD THIS VALVE CLOSED IF AN

ELECTRICAL FAILURE HAS OCCURRED ON

THE MK17A1 BEING SLAVED

c. After Operations

(1) Pull AUXILIARY CIRCUIT control (20)

down.

NOTE


TM 08780B-10

2-435

(1.1) Pull AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS lever

(20.1) down to OFF position.

(2) Rotate thumb screw (17) counterclockwise

and move handle (18) to 0. Rotate thumb screw (17) clockwise to

lock handle.

NOTE


(3) Move control switch (15) to OFF.

(4) Push SELECTOR VALVE (12) in. Shut

engine down.

TM 08780B-10

2-436

(5) Remove hydraulic hose (1) from trailer

hoses (8 and 9) by pulling back on adapter sleeves.

(6) Remove protective plugs (11) from quick

disconnect couplings (10) and insert trailer hoses (8 and 9).

(7) Remove adapters (2 and 3) from hydraulic

hose (1) by rotating safety locks (6 and 7), then pulling back on

quick disconnect sleeves.

TM 08780B-10

2-437

NEVER ALLOW HOSE TO FREELY WIND ON REEL BY

ITSELF. DAMAGE TO REEL WILL RESULT.

(8) Pull hydraulic hose (1) out several inches

and slowly walk hose in on reel.

2-23. MK16/16A1 FIFTH WHEEL OPERATION

a. General Description. The fifth wheel accepts a

3-1/2 inch (88.9 mm) kingpin and is rated at 46,000 pounds

(20,884 kg). It has primary and secondary locks that provide

positive trailer locking in any one of the three following

conditions:

TO PREVENT VEHICLE DAMAGE, NEVER USE THE

FULLY LOCKED OUT MODE WHEN OPERATING IN OFF-

HIGHWAY CONDITIONS.

(1) Fully Locked Out. This mode is only

intended for use when the center of gravity of the towed vehicle is

significantly above the surface of the fifth wheel and operating on

highway conditions where highway speeds of 55 MPH may be

attained.

CAUTION

CAUTION

TM 08780B-10

2-438

(2) Fully Oscillating. This is the primary

operating mode and is intended for use in all applications where

the center of gravity of the load is at or below the surface of the

fifth wheel. It is also used in all off-highway conditions.

(3) Half Oscillation. This mode is used at the

discretion of the operator and is intended for unique situations

where the side-to-side articulation needs to be limited to 30

degrees on each side.

b. Pivot Lock Adjustment

(1) Highway adjustment (fully locked out).

(a) Loosen four capscrews (1) on left

cover plate (2).

(b) Rotate lockplate (3) in position with

rib on fifth wheel (4).

(c) Tighten four capscrews (1) securely.

(d) Repeat steps (a) thru (c) on right side

cover plate.

TM 08780B-10

2-439

(2) Off-highway adjustment (fully oscillating).

(a) Loosen four capscrews (1) on left

cover plate (2).

(b) Rotate lockplate (3) to clear fifth

wheel rib (4).

(c) Tighten four capscrews (1) securely.

(d) Repeat steps (a) thru (c) for right

side lockplate.

TM 08780B-10

2-440

(3) Limited Adjustment (half oscillation).

(a) Remove four capscrews (1),

lockwashers (5), washers (6), and left cover plate (2).

(b) Remove left lockout plate (3).

(c) Turn lockout plate (3) so that lower

step (7) on the plate engages fifth wheel rib (4).

(d) Install four capscrews (1),

lockwashers (5), washers (6), and cover plate (2). Tighten

capscrews (1).

(e) Repeat steps (a) thru (d) for right

side.

TM 08780B-10

2-441

c. Preparation for Coupling

(1) Position vehicle so that coupler jaws are

directly in line with the semi-trailer kingpin. Place transmission in

neutral and engage PARKING BRAKE.

(2) Adjust landing gear of semi-trailer so that

semi-trailer is slightly lower than fifth wheel.

(3) Chock wheels of semi-trailer.

(4) Open secondary (7) and primary (8) fifth

wheel locks by pulling handles OUT. Handles will lock in the

open position by lifting up.

d. Coupling

USE GROUND GUIDE WHEN COUPLING TO SEMI-

TRAILER. DAMAGE COULD RESULT TO VEHICLE AND

TRAILER IF NOT PROPERLY GUIDED.

CAUTION

TM 08780B-10

2-442

(1) Release PARKING BRAKE and shift

transmission to R (reverse). Slowly back vehicle until semi-trailer

starts up fifth wheel ramps (9). Stop vehicle. Engage PARKING

BRAKE, and shift transmission to N (neutral).

• BE SURE VEHICLE AIR LINES ARE PROPERLY

CONNECTED. VEHICLE SERVICE AIR LINE (BLUE

TAG) CONNECTS TO SEMI-TRAILER SERVICE AIR

LINE (BLUE TAG). VEHICLE EMERGENCY AIR

LINE (RED TAG) CONNECTS TO SEMI-TRAILER

EMERGENCY AIR LINE (RED TAG).

• TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO SEALS, MAKE SURE

GLAD HANDS ARE FREE OF DIRT BEFORE

COUPLING.

(2) Connect air lines (10 and 11) to semi-trailer

air lines-service to service, emergency to emergency.

CAUTION

TM 08780B-10

2-443

TM 08780B-10

2-444

(3) Charge semi-trailer air system by pushing in

TRAILER AIR SUPPLY VALVE (12).

(4) Release PARKING BRAKE, shift

transmission to R (reverse), and apply semi-trailer service brakes

with TRAILER HAND VALVE (13). Back vehicle under semi-

trailer until coupler laws close around semi-trailer kingpin.

(5) Test fifth wheel connection by performing

the following steps:

(a) Pull out TRAILER AIR SUPPLY

VALVE (12) to discharge trailer air system and lockup trailer

brakes.

(b) Place transmission in D-1 gear and

slightly depress accelerator pedal. The vehicle will NOT move

forward if fifth wheel is properly connected to semi-trailer.

(c) Repeat steps (3) and (4) above if

semi-trailer is not properly connected.


if coupling failure is repeated.

(e) If coupling test proves the semi-

trailer is securely connected to the fifth wheel, shift transmission to

"N" (neutral), engage vehicle PARKING BRAKE, and recharge

the semi-trailer air system by again pushing in the TRAILER AIR

SUPPLY VALVE (12).

(6) Check to see that primary and secondary

lock handles (7 and 8) are no longer in the unlocked position.

TM 08780B-10

2-445

(7) Plug the inter-vehicle electrical cable (14)

into the receptacle on semi-trailer.

(8) Raise semi-trailer landing gear.

(9) Test all trailer lights for proper operation.

(10) Test brake system for proper operation

before driving.

e. Preparation for Uncoupling

(1) Chock wheels of semi-trailer.

(2) Engage vehicle PARKING BRAKE, and

shift transmission to N (neutral).

TM 08780B-10

2-446

(3) Lower semi-trailer landing gear until semi-

trailer just starts to raise from fifth wheel.

(4) Disconnect inter-vehicle electrical cable

(14), and secure on vehicle.

f. Uncoupling

(1) Pull secondary lock handle (7) OUT, lifting

up on handle until it locks in OUT position.

(2) Pull primary lock handle (8) OUT, lifting up

on handle until it locks in OUT position.

(2.1) Install fifth wheel support blocks (8.1) under

fifth wheel (8.2).

(3) Release PARKING BRAKE, shift

transmission to D (drive), and slowly move vehicle forward until

TM 08780B-10

2-447

fifth wheel is clear of kingpin. Close air supply valves (11.1)

located on crossmember underneath fifth wheel assembly.

Disconnect air lines (10 and 11) from semi-trailer connections.

Secure air lines on vehicle. Slowly drive vehicle out from under

semi-trailer.

(4) Remove and stow fifth wheel support blocks

(8.1) in brackets.

2-24. MK16 WINCH OPERATION

a. General Description. The heavy duty recovery

winch is controlled and operated by a remote control unit. The

winch has two speeds that are determined automatically by the

weight of the load. The winch is capable of a straight line pull of

60,00 pounds (27,240 kg) and an angled pull of 10,000 pounds

(4,540 kg). (See data plate on winch for further load information).

A side pull relief valve, mounted on the winch, keeps hydraulic

pressure within safe limits, preventing equipment or winch

TM 08780B-10

2-448

damage. The side pull rollers are used to support the winch cable

during operations. These rollers are adjustable. Rollers should be

in the inboard position for winching the MK48/48A1 and

MK16/16A1 to the M870/M870A1/M870A2 trailer. The rollers

should be in the outboard position during other operations. The

following safety features also protect the operator and equipment

from injury and damage. They are:

• A brake valve that applies a braking force on the winch,

preventing loads from falling or becoming uncontrolled

during operation.

• A fail-safe brake, within the winch, that applies

automatically anytime hydraulic pressure is lost.

b. Preparation for Winch Operation

(1) When possible, position rear of vehicle in

direct line with load or object being winched.

(2) Shift transmission (1) to N (neutral).

(3) Chock front and back of wheels on the

trailer.

TM 08780B-10

2-449

(4) Remove remote control (3) from stowage

compartment. Remove cap (4) from receptacle (5). Plug remote

control (3) into receptacle (5).




WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-450

(5) Pull selector valve (b) out to the

AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS position.

c. Attaching Load

• HEARING PROTECTION MUST BE WORN WHILE

OPERATING WINCH.

• DO NOT HANDLE CABLE WITH BARE HANDS.

WEAR LEATHER GLOVES WHEN HANDLING

CABLE. DO NOT ALLOW CABLE TO RUN

THROUGH HANDS. BROKEN WIRES OR FRAYED

CABLE CAN CAUSE INJURIES.

(1) Using winch OUT switch (7), pay out winch

cable while assistant pulls cable to object being winched.

(2) Rig the load as necessary.

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-451

d. Pulling load

DIRECT ALL PERSONNEL TO STAND CLEAR OF WINCH

CABLE AND LOAD DURING WINCHING. A SNAPPED

CABLE OR SHIFTING LOAD CAN BE EXTREMELY

DANGEROUS.

• WHEN PULLING A LOAD, DO NOT OPERATE

WINCH WITH LESS THAN FIVE TURNS OF CABLE

ON WINCH DRUM. THE WINCH CABLE CLAMP

ALONE WILL NOT HOLD AGAINST A LOAD.

• TO AVOID CABLE DAMAGE, BE SURE ROLLERS

ARE INSTALLED IN OUTBOARD SET OF HOLES.

(1) If winch cable (8) is outside black lines (9),

turn side pull relief valve (10) to ON. Winch is restricted to

10,000 pounds (4,540 kg) with valve (10) in the ON position.

(2) Using winch IN switch (11), take up slack in

cable. Begin winch pull.

WARNING

CAUTION

TM 08780B-10

2-452

• DO NOT HOLD ON TO THE WINCH CABLE. IF

TENSION IS REQUIRED TO GUIDE THE CABLE

BACK ON THE SPOOL, THE ASSISTANT WILL

HOLD THE CLEVIS, NOT THE CABLE. NEITHER

THE OPERATOR NOR ASSISTANT SHOULD STAND

WITHIN ARMS LENGTH OF THE SPOOL WHEN

THE CABLE IS BEING RETREIVED.

• DO NOT HANDLE CABLE UNLESS NECESSARY

AND NEVER WITH BARE HANDS. ALWAYS WEAR

LEATHER GLOVES WHEN HANDLING CABLE.

NEVER ALLOW CABLE TO RUN THROUGH HANDS.

BROKEN WIRES CAN CAUSE INJURIES.

TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO STOW HOOK DO NOT OVER

WIND WINCH CABLE.

CAUTION

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-453

(3) After winching operation is complete,

rewind winch cable and attach clevis (13) to stowage hook (12).

Take up slack in winch cable.

(4) Disconnect remote control cable from

receptacle (5). Install cap (4) on receptacle. Stow remote control

(3) in stowage compartment.

(5) Push selector valve (6) into the STEERING

POSITION.

(6) Remove wheel chocks.

(7) Clean and stow any other equipment used,

including slings or utility chains.

TM 08780B-10

2-454

2-25. MK17 CRANE OPERATION

a. General Description. While the vehicle is moving,

the Material Handling Crane (MHC) is secure in its folded position

by a pin. When unfolded, the crane has four basic functions. They

are the main boom, folding boom, and two extension booms. The

main boom column can rotate 350 degrees with a 10 degree dead

spot at the main control panel. The crane can lift 9,000 pounds

(4,086 kg) when extended 15 feet (4.51 m) outward (see lifting

capacity chart located at control panel for further information).


through the main control panel. The main control panel provides

the controls to manually operate all functions of the crane and

stabilizer.

Each control is proportional. The more travel of the control, the

faster the selected crane movement. The crane may also be

operated by a remote control unit with the same operating

functions, except for stabilizer controls, as the main control. Left

and right stabilizers are provided to stabilize, support, and level the

TM 08780B-10

2-455

vehicle while the crane is operating. An additional stabilizer

control is provided, separate from the main control panel, on the

left side of the vehicle. Built within the hydraulic system of the

crane are several safety features that protect the equipment and

operating personnel. They are as follows:

• Check valves will prevent a load from falling in the event

of pressure loss because of hydraulic line failure.


hydraulic pressure is lost at the MK48/48A1 if external

hydraulic lines from the MK48/48A1/15/15A1 Wrecker/

Recovery vehicle are attached to the quick disconnect

couplings at the front of the crane trailer. Should a

hydraulic failure occur in crane's trailer, the suspended load

can be lowered by adjusting the cylinder hold valve. This

procedure should only be done by Organizational

Maintenance personnel.

• The crane is equipped with an overload protection system

that prevents lifting greater loads, at a given distance, than

the crane can handle. All functions that decrease overload

remain functional.

TM 08780B-10

2-456

b. Pre-operational Safety Checks

(1) When possible, position vehicle on firm,

level ground.

(2) Place transmission shifter (1) in N (neutral).

Pull PARKING BRAKE valve (2) OUT.





WILL NOT WORK. INJURY OR DEATH COULD RESULT.

(4) Pull selector valve (3), mounted on right

fender of power unit, to AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS position.

Make sure valve is fully engaged.

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-457

(5) Remove remote control (6) and cable (7)

from stowage compartment (8).

(6) Connect one end of the remote control cable

(7) to receptacle (10) and secure with latch (4). Close stowage

compartment door.

TM 08780B-10

2-458

(7) Connect other end of cable (7) to remote

control receptacle (18) and secure with latch (19).

(8) Turn control switch (5) to REMOTE. Red

indicator light (20) on remote control (6) should be ON indicating

control is ready for operation.

NOTE

• One of the two deadman switches (21) must be depressed

to activate remote control.

• Any failure of the remote control Pre-Operational check

will not prevent the use of crane. This, however, prevents

the use of any remote control operation until repairs have

been made.

TM 08780B-10

2-459

TM 08780B-10

2-460

(9) Depress one of the two deadman switches

(21) on remote control. Green indicator light (22) should be ON

indicating connection between the remote control and main control

panel has been made.

(10) Depress one of the deadman switches (21)

and hold. Check that control levers (14, 15, 16 and 17) are locked

into the center (neutral) position, and that these levers are in a

straight line. If any lever will not lock or does not line up, notify


(11) While depressing deadman switch (21),

move control levers (23, 24, 25, and 26) of the remote control in

both directions. Make sure main control panel levers agree with

the remote control and are functioning properly. If controls do not

agree or are not functioning properly, notify Organizational

Maintenance.

(12) Turn control switch (5) OFF.

TM 08780B-10

2-461

c. Deploying Stabilizers

NOTE

All crane controls, manual and remote, are proportional. The

more travel of the control, the faster the selected crane

movement.

(1) Start engine and turn control switch (5) to

MANUAL.

TM 08780B-10

2-462

STAY CLEAR OF STABILIZERS WHILE IN OPERATION TO

AVOID BEING CRUSHED.

(2) Using control station (27) at right rear of

trailer, deploy right stabilizer as follows:







(d) Place Stabilizer Cylinder lock valve


WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-463


release cable (33).

NOTE





approximately one to two inches (25-50 mm) of slack in quick

release cable (33).

TM 08780B-10

2-464


STABILIZERS WHEN PULLING TOWARDS REAR OF

VEHICLE.


stabilizer cylinder lock pin (36). Remove lock pin (36). Pull

stabilizer (34) towards rear of vehicle to start stabilizer in the

downward position.






(j) Install stabilizer cylinder lock pin


(k) Using NEAR SIDE STABILIZER

control (29), extend stabilizer cylinder (34) until it is

approximately three inches above the ground.

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-465

(6) At main control station (4), deploy left

stabilizer as follows:



(b) Using NEAR SIDE stabilizer control

(39), slowly extend outrigger beam (40) fully.



TM 08780B-10

2-466

(d) Place stabilizer cylinder lock valve



release cable (43).

TM 08780B-10

2-467

NOTE





approximately one to two inches (25-50 mm) of slack in quick

release cable (43).



VEHICLE.


stabilizer lock pin (46). Remove lock pin (46). Pull stabilizer (44)

towards rear of vehicle to start stabilizer in the downward position.




WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-468



(j) Install stabilizer lock pin (46) and

quick release pin (45).

(k) Using NEAR SIDE stabilizer control

(34), extend stabilizer cylinder (44) until it is approximately three

inches above the ground.

TM 08780B-10

2-469

IF THE MK48/48A1/17/17A1 HAS A CARGO LOAD IN

EXCESS OF 31,000 LBS (14,074 KG), STABILIZER SHOULD

BE EXTENDED ONLY UNTIL ENGINE LABORS OR

INCREASES IN RPMS. THIS MAY OR MAY NOT RESULT

IN REAR SPRINGS COMING OFF OF THEIR SEATS AS

INDICATED IN STEP (l), BELOW. IN SUCH CASES,

UNLOAD HALF OF THE CARGO AND REPEAT STEP (1)

BEFORE UNLOADING REMAINDER OF THE CARGO.

NOTE

To provide greater stability never lift any tire off of the ground.

(l) Using both NEAR SIDE and FAR

SIDE stabilizer controls (39 and 48), extend stabilizer cylinder

until both rear springs are off their spring seats.

(m) Place both stabilizer cylinder lock

valves (31 and 41) in the LOCK position.

CAUTION

TM 08780B-10

2-470

d. Unstowing Crane

CRANE OPERATIONS HAVE INHERENT HAZARDS THAT

CANNOT BE MECHANICALLY SAFE-GUARDED.

OPERATOR AND ASSISTING PERSONNEL ARE

REQUIRED TO WEAR HARD HATS AND SAFETY SHOES.


BEFORE UNSTOWING CRANE. EXTENSION BOOM CAN

DAMAGE CRANE BY STRIKING CRANE BASE.

NOTE

• If any unwanted crane movement (creep) occurs during

operation, notify Organizational Maintenance that the

crane requires adjustment.

• Use manual controls to unstow crane.

WARNING

CAUTION

TM 08780B-10

2-471

(1) Remove retaining pin (49) and stowage pin

(50).

(2) Use Folding Boom control (15) to lift

folding boom (51) off of boom rest (52). Folding boom brackets

(53) must be off of rest (52) so that crane can be unstowed.

(3) Use main boom control (16) to raise main

boom (54) to 86 degrees as indicated by indicator (55) on main

boom (54).

TM 08780B-10

2-472


folding boom (51), to clear any objects when crane is rotated.

NOTE

Crane can now be operated from the manual controls or from the

remote control. To select remote control, refer to step (10) below.

(5) Use main boom control (16) to position

main boom (54) at 45 degrees, as indicated by indicator (55) on

main boom, for maximum lifting capacity. Refer to one of the

capacity information data plates. They are located on the main

control panel, folding boom, and remote control.

(6) Use Folding Boom control (15) to raise or

lower folding boom (51) in the horizontal position. This is the

maximum lifting position.

BE CAREFUL WHEN RETRACTING EXTENSION BOOMS

IF FOLDING BOOM IS ABOVE THE HORIZONTAL

POSITION. LOAD MAY SWING AND CONTACT THE

CRANE.

CAUTION

TM 08780B-10

2-473

(7) Use Extension Boom control (14) to extend

or retract extension booms (56).

(8) Use Rotation control (17) to rotate crane


(9) Unstow hook (57) by pulling back on latch

(58) and lifting off of pin (59).

TM 08780B-10

2-474

(10) Use of remote control.

(a) Place strap (60) over head-around

neck. Hook buckle (61) on belt. Adjust strap (60) as necessary.

NOTE

One of the two deadman switches (21) must be depressed to

activate remote controls.

(b) Depress one of the two deadman

switches (21).

(c) Move extension boom control (23)

up to extend or down to retract extension booms.

(d) Move folding boom control (24) up

to raise or down to lower folding booms.

TM 08780B-10

2-475

(e) Move main boom control (25) up to

raise or down to lower main boom.

(f) Move rotation control (26) up to

rotate crane clockwise or down to rotate crane counterclockwise.

NOTE

When the MK48/48A1/17/17A1 is towing a trailer, always unload

the vehicle payload first and then unload the trailer payload.

Always load the trailer payload first and then load the vehicle

payload.

e. Emergency Operating Procedures

NOTE

Manual controls must be used to operate crane when an

electrical failure has occurred.

(1) Electrical Failure. In the event of electrical

failure, all crane movement will stop. Operate crane as follows:


(b) Pull Emergency Manual Shut Down

valve (62) CLOSED.

(c) Complete crane operation with

manual controls.

TM 08780B-10

2-476


immediately.

(2) Hydraulic Failure. If hydraulic failure

occurs, notify Organizational Maintenance immediately.

f. Stowing Crane

(1) Lift hook (57) and secure on stowage pin

(59). Make sure latch (58) closes so hook is secure.

TM 08780B-10

2-477

NOTE

Use manual controls to stow crane.

(2) Use Rotation Control (17) to align boom

stowage plates (63).


BEFORE STOWING CRANE. EXTENSION BOOM CAN

DAMAGE CRANE BY STRIKING CRANE BASE.

CAUTION

TM 08780B-10

2-478

(3) Use Boom Extension control (14) to fully

retract both extension booms (56).

(4) Use main boom control (16) to raise main

boom (54) to 86 degrees as indicated on indicator (55).

(5) Use Folding Boom control (15) to slowly

fold boom (51). Hold control down until folding boom will not

travel any further.

(6) Use Main Boom Control (16) to slowly

lower main boom (54) to stowed position.


TM 08780B-10

2-479

(8) With control switch (5) in the OFF position,

lift Folding Boom Control (15) so that brackets (53) are down on

boom rest (52).

(9) Push controls (14, 15, 16 and 17) all the way

up and down to release hydraulic pressure.

(10) Install stowage pin (50) and retaining pin

(49).

g. Stowing Stabilizers

(1) Turn control switch (5) to MANUAL.

TM 08780B-10

2-480

(2) Unlock left and right Stabilizer Cylinder

lock out valves (31 and 41).

(3) At main control panel (4), use NEAR SIDE

and FAR SIDE stabilizer controls (39 and 48) to fully retract

stabilizer cylinders (34 and 44).


RETRACTING STABILIZER CYLINDER WILL CAUSE

CABLE (33) TO BREAK.

(4) Remove quick release pin (35) and stabilizer

lock pin (36) from right side stabilizer (34).

CAUTION

TM 08780B-10

2-481



pin.

(6) At Right side control station, use NEAR

SIDE STABILIZER control (29) to extend stabilizer cylinder (34).

Stabilizer cylinder (34) will swing into stowed position.

(7) Install stabilizer lock pin (36) and quick-

release pin (35).

(8) Use Near side stabilizer control (29) to

retract stabilizer cylinder (34).

(9) Place Stabilizer Cylinder lock out valve (31)

in the LOCK position.




(11) Place NEAR SIDE STABILIZER EXT

lockout valve (31) in the UNLOCK position.

TM 08780B-10

2-482

(12) Using NEAR SIDE STABILIZER control

(29), retract outrigger beam (30).

TO PREVENT SEVERE VEHICLE DAMAGE, MAKE SURE






RETRACTING STABILIZER CYLINDER WILL CAUSE

CABLE (34) TO BREAK.

(14) Remove quick release pin (45) and stabilizer

lock pin (46).

CAUTION

CAUTION

TM 08780B-10

2-483



pin.


to extend stabilizer cylinder (44). Stabilizer will swing into the

stowed position.


release pin (45).


to retract stabilizer cylinder (44).

TO PREVENT SEVERE VEHICLE DAMAGE, MAKE SURE



CAUTION

TM 08780B-10

2-484

(19) Place STABILIZER lock out valve (41) in

the LOCK position.







to retract outrigger beam (40).




(25) Push controls (39 and 48) all the way up and

down to release hydraulic pressure.

TM 08780B-10

2-485


POSITION. Make sure valve is fully engaged.

(27) If remote control (6) was used, coil up cable

(7) approximately one foot in diameter. Place cable (7) and remote

control (6) in stowage compartment as shown. Secure

compartment door.

2-26. MK17A1 MATERIAL HANDLING CRANE (MHC)

OPERATION

a. General Description. During operation, the material

handling crane (MHC) has four basic functions: telescoping,

outriggers, swing and hoist. The boom can rotate 318 degrees with

a 42 degree dead spot at the main control panel. The crane has a

lifting capacity of 9,000 lbs (4,086 kgs) at 15 feet (4.6m) (see

lifting capacity chart located at control panel for further

information).


through the crane's main control panel. The main control panel

provides the controls to manually operate all functions of the crane

and outrigger jacks.

Each control on the crane's main control panel is proportional. The

more travel of the control, the faster the selected crane movement.

The crane may also be operated by a remote control unit with the

TM 08780B-10

2-486

same operating functions, except for outrigger and mast controls,

as the main control. Left and right retractable outrigger jack

cylinders are provided to stabilize, support, and level the vehicle

while the crane is operated. An additional outrigger jack cylinder

control is provided, separate from the main control panel, on the

passenger (right) side of the vehicle. Built within the crane's

hydraulic system are several safety features that protect the

equipment and operating personnel. They are as follows:

• Hold valves will prevent a load from falling in the event of

pressure loss because of hydraulic line failure.


hydraulic pressure is lost at the MK48A1 if external

hydraulic lines from the MK48/15A1 Wrecker/Recovery

vehicle are attached to the quick disconnect couplings at

the front of the crane trailer. Should hydraulic failure occur

in the crane's trailer, the suspended load can be lowered by

adjusting the cylinder hold valve. This procedure should be

done by Organizational Maintenance personnel.

• An overload protection system that prevents lifting greater

loads, at a given distance, than the crane can handle. All

functions that decrease overload remain functional: hoist

down, telescope in, and swing left or right.

b. Determine Required Crane Settings from Range

Diagram

(1) Use Area Definition Chart below or on

MHC main control panel to determine position of crane.

TM 08780B-10

2-487

(2) Use Load Chart below or on MHC main

control panel for load capacities.

NOTE

When either boom length or load radius or both are between

values listed below, the smallest load shown at either the next

larger boom length or radius must be used.

ON OUTRIGGERS

FRONT, SIDE & REAR - 318˚

RADIUS

FT (M)

BOOM LENGTH FT (M)

7.33

(2.23)

14.25

(4.34)

15.25

(4.65)

16.50

(5.03)

18.42

(5.81)

4.00

(1.22)

11000

(4988)

7.00

(2.13)

11000

(4988)

8.00

(2.44)

11000

(4988)

11000

(4988)

9.00

(2.74)

11000

(4988)

11000

(4988)

10000

(4535)

10.00

(3.05)

11000

(4988)

11000

(4988)

10000

(4535)

9000

(4082)

12.00

(3.66)

10000

(4535)

10000

(4535)

10000

(4535)

9000

(4082)

14.00

(4.27)

9400

(4264)

9400

(4264)

9000

(4082)

8000

(3628)

15.00

(4.57)

9000

(4082)

8400

(3810)

7900

(3583)

16.00

(4.88)

8000

(3628)

7500

(3401)

18.20

(5.55)

5900

(2676)

Capacities in Pounds (Kilograms)

Load Chart

TM 08780B-10

2-488

c. Prepare Crane for Use

(1) Start engine.

(2) Position vehicle on level ground so all

loading and unloading can be done from one position.

(3) Place transmission shifter (1) in N (Neutral).

(4) Pull parking brake valve (2) OUT. Chock

wheels as necessary to secure vehicle.





STEERING WILL NOT WORK. INJURY OR DEATH COULD

RESULT.

(6) Pull selector valve (3) mounted on right

fender of MK48 power unit to AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS

position. Make sure valve is fully engaged.

(7) Start engine.

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-489


ON.

(9) Position MHC TILT ALARM switch (5) to

ON.

d. Deploying Outrigger Jacks

ENSURE AREA IS CLEAR ON BOTH SIDES OF VEHICLE

BEFORE EXTENDING OUTRIGGER BEAMS AND JACKS.



WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-490

(1) Move O/R EXT lever (6) to OUT position

until outriggers are fully extended.

NOTE

Both outrigger pads are installed on outriggers the same way.

Left side is shown.

(2) Remove two outrigger pads (7) from

brackets located under tool stowage box (8).

(3) Remove two retaining pins (10) from

outrigger pad (7).

(4) Clear all dirt and debris from socket (9) in

outrigger pad (7) and from the end of the outrigger jack cylinder

(11).

(5) Position the outrigger pad (7) directly below

the outrigger jack cylinder (11).

TM 08780B-10

2-491

(6) Perform steps (3) (4) and (5) to set up

outrigger pad (7) on other side.

• KEEP HANDS AND FEET CLEAR OF OUTRIGGERS

DURING OPERATION. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY


• THE ENGINE DURING OPERATION WILL CREATE

BLOWING DUST. EYE PROTECTION MUST BE

WORN WHILE OPERATING CRANE CONTROLS.


PERSONNEL.

(7) Move LH O/R JACK lever (12) to DOWN




(7).

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-492

(9) Move RH O/R JACK lever (13) to down




(7).

CRIBBAGE AND/OR BLOCKAGE SHOULD NOT BE USED

UNDER THE OUTRIGGER PADS TO PREVENT SINKING

INTO THE SOIL. FAILURE OF SUCH DEVICES COULD

RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH.

NOTE

• To provide greater stability never lift any tire off the

ground.

• Lower outrigger jacks individually as necessary to level

the truck side-to-side.

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-493

(11) Using both LH O/R JACK and RH O/R

JACK levers (12 and 13), lower jack cylinders until both rear

springs are off their spring seats.

e. Unstowing Crane

DO NOT DISCONNECT CABLE FROM STOWAGE RING

UNTIL BOOM IS RAISED TO A 45-DEGREE ANGLE. HOOK

ASSEMBLY COULD FALL. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY


WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-494


WHEN PAYING OUT CABLE. CABLE MAY GET

TANGLED ON DRUM. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY


• DO NOT ALLOW WEIGHT OF HOOK TO BE

REMOVED FROM THE CABLE. FAILURE TO

COMPLY MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO

EQUIPMENT.

NOTE

Operate HOIST lever and BOOM lever at the same time until

hook is suspended freely over the stowage ring.


and BOOM lever (15) to UP position until boom (16) is at a

45-degree angle as indicated on boom angle indicator (17).

(2) Remove safety pin (18) from hook assembly

latch (19).

(3) Disconnect hook block (20) from stowage

ring (21).

CAUTION

TM 08780B-10

2-495

KEEP BOOM CLEAR OF ALL ELECTRICAL LINES AND

OTHER OBSTACLES WHILE OPERATING CRANE.


DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

NEVER TELESCOPE BOOM AND LIFT LOAD UNLESS

MAST IS FULLY RAISED. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY


NOTE

Operate BOOM lever and MAST lever at the same time to

maintain boom at approximately a 30-degree angle.

(4) Move BOOM lever (15) to DOWN position and

MAST lever (22) to UP position until boom angle is approximately

30-degrees.

WARNING

CAUTION

TM 08780B-10

2-496


MAST lever (22) to UP position until mast (23) is fully raised.

Hold mast lever (22) in UP position for 2-3 seconds to ensure

erection cylinder is fully erected.

TM 08780B-10

2-497

f. Connect Remote Control

THE CRANE MUST BE OPERATED WITH REMOTE

CONTROL IF OPERATOR IS NOT ABLE TO KEEP LOAD IN

SIGHT AT ALL TIMES DURING OPERATION. FAILURE


PERSONNEL.

(1) Remove crane remote control (24) and cable

(25) from stowage box (26).


OFF.

(3) Connect cable (25) to crane remote control

(24).

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-498

(4) Connect other end of cable (25) to

REMOTE CONTROL HOOK UP receptacle (27).


ON,


on crane remote control (24) to ON.

TM 08780B-10

2-499

g. Rotate and Telescope Boom

• KEEP BOOM CLEAR OF ALL ELECTRICAL LINES

AND OTHER OBSTACLES WHILE OPERATING THE

CRANE. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN

INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

• ENSURE THAT AREA IS CLEAR OF PERSONNEL

BEFORE ROTATING BOOM. BOOM MUST BE

ROTATED SLOWLY ENOUGH SO OPERATOR HAS

COMPLETE CONTROL OF LOAD. IF OPERATOR

CANNOT SEE LOAD DURING OPERATION,

OPERATE CRANE WITH REMOTE CONTROL.


DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

NOTE

Operate crane control levers using even pressure. Moving lever

slightly will cause slow movement of crane. Moving lever to full

travel will cause faster movement of the crane.

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-500

(1) Move SWING lever (29) to CW position to

move boom (16) to the right.

(2) Move SWING lever (29) to CCW position

to move boom (16) to the left.

OPERATOR MUST KEEP CONTROL OF LOAD AT ALL

TIMES. ATTACH GUIDE LINES TO LOAD AS REQUIRED.


DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

KEEP HOOK ASSEMBLY AT LEAST 2 FT (0.6M) FROM

END OF BOOM. IF HOOK ASSEMBLY HITS END OF

BOOM, CRANE WILL LOSE POWER FOR SEVERAL

SECONDS AND CABLE OR HOOK ASSEMBLY MAY BE

DAMAGED.

NOTE

Operate HOIST lever and TELESCOPE lever at the same time.

WARNING

CAUTION

TM 08780B-10

2-501


to pay out cable (30) and TELESCOPE lever (31) to OUT position

to extend boom (16).

h. Raise and Lower Load

(1) Refer to range diagram on MHC main

control panel to determine correct boom angle setting.

(2) Move BOOM lever (15) to UP position until

boom angle indicator (17) shows correct boom angle as determined

in step (1).

TM 08780B-10

2-502


WHEN PAYING OUT CABLE. FAILURE TO COMPLY


• USE ONLY A STRAIGHT PULL WHEN LIFTING

LOAD. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN


(3) Operate SWING lever (29) and

TELESCOPE lever (31) to center end of boom (16) directly over

load.

(4) Operate HOIST lever (14) to pay in or pay

out cable (30) and connect hook block (20) to load.

CAUTION

TM 08780B-10

2-503

• ENSURE THAT HOOK LATCH IS CLOSED AND

SAFETY PIN IS INSTALLED BEFORE ATTEMPTING

TO RAISE LOAD. A HOOK LATCH THAT IS NOT

CLOSED AND LOCKED IN POSITION COULD

ALLOW LOAD TO BECOME DISENGAGED FROM

HOOK, ALLOWING LOAD TO FALL. INJURY OR

DEATH COULD RESULT.

• USE EXTREME CARE WHEN ATTEMPTING TO

RAISE LOAD WITH DAMAGED HOOK LATCH OR

SAFETY PIN. HAVE ORGANIZATIONAL

MAINTENANCE REPAIR DAMAGED PARTS AS

SOON AS MISSION IS COMPETED.


latch (19).

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-504

ENSURE THERE ARE AT LEAST TWO WRAPS OF CABLE

ON HOIST DRUM AT ALL TIMES. FAILURE TO COMPLY

MAY RESULT IN INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

• DO NOT JERK HOIST LEVER. LOAD MAY BOUNCE

AND RESULT IN DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT OR

LOAD.

• DO NOT LIFT MORE THAN MAXIMUM LOAD

RATING FOR CRANE. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY


• ENSURE BOOM AND LOAD ARE CLEAR OF

VEHICLE SIDES WHEN LOADING AND

UNLOADING CARGO. HITTING SIDE OF VEHICLE

WITH BOOM OR LOAD MAY DAMAGE CRANE,

LOAD, OR VEHICLE.

• DO NOT LOWER BOOM BELOW HORIZONTAL

WITH A LOAD SUSPENDED FROM THE HOOK, OR

RAISE A LOAD FROM BELOW HORIZONTAL USING

THE BOOM. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT



lift load. Move BOOM lever (15) to UP position to lift load higher

as required.


to lower load. Move BOOM lever (15) to DOWN position to

lower load further as required.

WARNING

CAUTION

TM 08780B-10

2-505

i. Stow Crane

BOOM MUST BE POSITIONED IN LINE WITH

OUTRIGGER BEAM AND FULLY RETRACTED BEFORE

LOWERING. OBSERVE BOOM DURING LOWERING TO

ENSURE NO CONTACT IS MADE WITH RIGHT REAR

TENDER. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN


NOTE

• Operate HOIST lever and TELESCOPE lever at the same

time.

• Reel in cable until approximately 2 ft. (0.6m) of cable

hangs from boom.


reel in cable (30) and TELESCOPE lever (31) to IN position to

retract boom (16).

CAUTION

TM 08780B-10

2-506

NOTE

Position boom so that cable and hook assembly are on

passenger's side of vehicle.

(2) Operate SWING lever (29) to position boom

(16) in line with outrigger beam (34).

(3) Operate BOOM lever (15) so that boom

angle indicator (17) reads approximately 30-degrees.

TM 08780B-10

2-507

NOTE

Operate BOOM lever and MAST lever at the same time so that

45-degree reading is maintained on boom angle indicator.

(4) Move BOOM lever (15) and MAST lever

(22) to DOWN position until mast (23) is fully lowered and boom

is at 45°.


and connect hook block (20) to stowage ring (21).


latch (19).

(7) Move HOIST lever (14) to UP position and

BOOM lever (15) to DOWN position until boom (16) is fully

lowered, and all slack is removed from cable (30).

TM 08780B-10

2-508

j. Disconnect Remote Control


on crane remote control (24) to OFF.


(3) Remove cable (25) from REMOTE

CONTROL HOOK UP receptacle (27).

(4) Remove cable (25) from crane remote

control (24).

(5) Stow cable (25) and crane remote control

(24).

NOTE

Perform step (6) if crane operation is still required.

(6) Position MAIN POWER switch (4) to ON.

TM 08780B-10

2-509

k. Stow Outrigger Beams/Jack Cylinders and Shut

Down Crane

(1) Remove two retaining pins (9) from both

outrigger pads (7).

NOTE

Operate LH O/R JACK lever and RH O/R JACK lever at the

same time.

(2) Move LH O/R JACK lever (12) and RH O/R

JACK lever (13) to UP position until outrigger jack cylinders (11)

are fully retracted.

(3) Install two retaining pins (9) in outrigger

pads (7).

(4) Stow two outrigger pads (7) on bracket

located on bottom of tool stowage boxes (8).

TM 08780B-10

2-510

(5) Move O/R EXT lever (6) to IN position until

outrigger beams (34) are fully retracted.


(7) Position crane TILT ALARM switch (5) to

OFF.

2-27. MK17/17A1 CARGO SIDE PANEL OPERATION

a. Lowering and Raising Troop Seats

(1) To lower troop seats unbuckle straps (1) and

fold out seat supports (2) as shown. Place supports so that they

contact the side panels and cargo bed.

TM 08780B-10

2-511

(1.1) For LVSA1 series vehicles only, pin seat

supports (2) using quick release pins (2.1).

(2) To raise troop seats, fold up seat and

supports (2). Secure seats with straps (1).

(2.1) To raise troop seats on LVSA1 series

vehicles, remove quick release pins (2.1), and fold up seat supports

(2). Secure seats with straps (1).

b. Lowering Side Panels

TO PREVENT PERSONAL INJURY, MAKE SURE TROOP

SEATS ARE SECURED BEFORE LOWERING SIDE

PANELS.

NOTE

Side panels can be lowered individually or in groups of two.

Lowering should be done by two people.

(1) Remove lock pin (3) from corner of cargo

box.

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-512

IF VEHICLE IS PARKED ON A GRADE, SIDE PANELS MAY

SLIDE OFF HINGES AND CAUSE PERSONAL INJURY OR

PROPERTY DAMAGE.

(2) Lift latch (4) to release panel. Have

assistant help lower side panel.

(3) To lower two side panels at once, make sure

latch (4) is securing both side panels, then remove lock pins (3)

from each corner of cargo box. Carefully lower panels.

c. Raising Side Panels

(1) Raise side panel into position and install

lock pin (3).

(2) Push latch (4) down, locking both side

panels together.

(3) If two panels were lowered, raise panels and

secure with corner lock pins (3).

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-513

d. Removal and Stowage of Side Panels

(1) Lower side panels individually. Refer to

section b.

• TO PREVENT PERSONAL INJURY, MAKE SURE

TROOP SEATS ARE SECURED BEFORE REMOVING

SIDE PANELS.

• SIDE PANELS ARE HEAVY. TO PREVENT

PERSONAL INJURY, THEY SHOULD BE REMOVED

BY TWO PEOPLE.

(2) Once side panel is lowered, raise the panel

so that the hinge (5) is clear of stud (6).

(3) Slide side panel (7) off hinge pins (8).

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-514

(4) Stand side panel (7) against tailgate (9) with

hinges down and troop seat resting on tailgate.

(5) Repeat steps (3) and (4) for remaining three

side panels.

(6) Remove front gate (10) and stand against

side panels with top of gate on bed and legs up.

TM 08780B-10

2-515

NOTE

Three straps secure side panels. One long strap wraps around

panels and two short straps go around each corner.

(7) Wrap tie down strap (11) around tailgate (9)

so that hooked end and free end are in front of gate (10) as shown.

(8) Slide free end of tie down strap (11) through

slot in ratchet (12).

TM 08780B-10

2-516

(9) Attach hooked end (13) of tie down strap on

ratchet bolt (14).

(10) Pull free end of strap (11) to take up slack.

(11) Lift up ratchet handle (15) and work back

and forth until strap tightly secures panels. Close ratchet handle

(15) fully to engage safety lock.

(12) Attach hooked end of tie down strap (16) to

tailgate stake (17) as shown.

(13) Wrap strap (16) over side panels and gate.

(14) Attach hooked end of ratchet (18) on cargo

bed as shown.

(15) Slide free end of strap (16) through slot in

ratchet (18) and take up slack in strap.

TM 08780B-10

2-517

(16) Work ratchet handle (19) back and forth

until strap tightly secures panels. Close ratchet handle (19) fully to

engage safety lock.

(17) Repeat steps (12) thru (16) to

secure side panels on opposite corner of vehicle.

e. Unloading and Installation of Side Panels

(1) Pull back on ratchet release handle (20) and

fold ratchet (18) open. Create slack in strap (16).

(2) Disconnect hooked ends of ratchet (18) and

strap (16) on the bed and tailgate stake (17). Remove strap (16)

from ratchet (18).

TM 08780B-10

2-518

(3) Repeat steps (1) and (2) for the remaining

corner strap.

(4) Pullback on ratchet release handle (21) and

fold ratchet open. Create slack in strap (11).

(5) Disconnect hooked end (13) from ratchet

bolt (14). Remove strap (11) from ratchet (18).

(6) Install front gate (10).

TM 08780B-10

2-519

SIDE PANELS ARE HEAVY. TO PREVENT PERSONAL

INJURY, THEY SHOULD BE INSTALLED BY TWO PEOPLE.

(7) Remove side panel from cargo bed. Align

side panel (7) with hinge pins (8).

(8) Raise side panel so that hinge (5) will clear

stud (6). Slide side panel onto hinge pins (8).

(9) Repeat steps (7) and (8) for remaining three

side panels (7).

(10) Raise side panels. Refer to section c.

2-28. MK17/17A1 CARGO COVER KIT

a. Installation

NOTE

The following procedures for installation and removal of the

cargo cover kit require two people.

(1) On the right side of the vehicle, remove hair

pin (1) and retaining pin (2).

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-520

TO AVOID INJURY, HAVE ASSISTANT SUPPORT THE

WEIGHT OF BOWS (3) WHILE SUPPORT ROD (4) IS BEING

REMOVED.

(2) Have assistant hold bows (3) up to relieve

pressure on support rod (4). Remove support rod (4) and have

assistant lower bows.

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-521

(3) Lift the ends of each bow (3) out of the

pocket in stowage bracket (5). Set bows off to one side.

TM 08780B-10

2-522

(4) On the left side of the vehicle, remove hitch

pins (6) and end brackets (7). Remove stakes (8) from stowage

compartments (9 and 10). Set stakes off to one side.

TM 08780B-10

2-523

(5) Install stakes (8) in pocket (11) in top edge

of cargo side panels.

(6) Install bows (3) on stakes (8).

(7) Using wrenches, install capscrews (12) and

locknuts (13).

(8) Repeat steps (1) thru (3) for remaining six

bow and stake assemblies.

TM 08780B-10

2-524

(9) Pull rope (14) through top center eyelet (15),

on end curtain (16), until both ends of rope are even.

(10) Place end curtain (16) on top bow and stake

assembly (17) so stitching will be on the inside.

(11) Hold end curtain (16) while assistant laces

rope (14) around bow and stake, going through remaining eyelets

(15).

(12) Run end of rope (14) through bottom corner

eyelets and tie down hook (18) on side panel.

(13) Tie bottom ropes (19) to tie down hooks

(20) on end panel.

(14) Repeat steps (5) thru (9) to install rear end

curtain on bow and stake assembly.

TM 08780B-10

2-525

(15) Place cargo cover (21) on middle of center

bow (22).

(16) Hold cargo cover (21) steady

while assistant unfolds cargo cover to front and rear bows.

(17) Unfold cargo cover (21) one side at a time

until both sides are down.

TM 08780B-10

2-526

DO NOT TIE ROPES TOO TIGHT. CARGO COVER MAY

TEAR.

(18) Tie front corner tie down rope (22) to tie

down hook (20) as shown.

CAUTION

TM 08780B-10

2-527

(19) Pull all slack out of cargo cover (21).

(20) Repeat steps (14) and (15) on remaining

three corners.

(21) Tie remaining side ropes (23) on the

remaining tie down hooks (24) along each side of the truck.

b. Removal

(1) Untie both front corner tie down ropes (22)

from front tie down hooks (20).

(2) Untie ropes (23) from all tie down hooks

(24) on each side of truck.

(3) Remove cargo cover (21) from truck.

(4) Spread out cargo cover (21) on smooth, dry

surface so stitching is facing down.

TM 08780B-10

2-528

(5) Fold one side of cargo cover (21) toward

center in two folds. Make each fold about two feet wide.

(6) Fold other side of cargo cover (21) toward

center in two folds.

(7) Fold both sides of cargo cover (21) together.

(8) Fold one end of cargo cover (21) toward

center in two folds. Make each fold about three feet wide.

TM 08780B-10

2-529

(9) Fold other end of cargo cover (21) toward

center in two folds.

(10) Fold both sides of cargo cover (21) together.

(11) Untie bottom tie down ropes (19) from tie

down hooks (20) on both sides of truck.

(12) Untie corner tie down ropes (14) from tie

down hooks (18) on both sides of truck.

(13) Hold tailgate curtain (16) while assistant

unties rope (14) from bow and stake assembly (17) and tailgate

curtain (16). Remove tailgate curtain (16).

TM 08780B-10

2-530

(14) Repeat steps (11) thru (13) to remove rear

end curtain.

(15) Spread out end curtain (16) on smooth, dry

surface so stitching is facing down.

(16) Fold one side of curtain (16) toward center

in two folds.

(17) Fold other side of curtain (16) toward center

in two folds. Fold both sides of curtain (16) together.

TM 08780B-10

2-531

(18) Repeat steps (15) thru (17) for front end

curtain.

(19) Tie both end curtains (16) and cargo cover

(21) with straps (23).

(20) Using wrenches, remove capscrews (12) and

locknuts (13).

(21) Remove bow (3) from stakes (8).

(22) Repeat steps (20) and (21) for remaining

bows and stakes.

TM 08780B-10

2-532

(23) Pull all stakes (8) out of slots in cargo side

panel (11).

(24) From beneath the vehicle, place the ends of

each bow (3) into pocket of stowage bracket (5). Keep all bows

(3) between plates (24).

TM 08780B-10

2-533

(25) Have assistant hold the free ends of bows (3)

up. Insert support rod (4) into frame and push it in until it reaches

the other side of frame.

TM 08780B-10

2-534

(26) Have assistant lower bows (3) to rest on

support rod (4). Install hair pin (1) and retaining pin (2).

TM 08780B-10

2-535

(27) Insert eight of the fourteen stakes (8) into

compartment (9). Arrange stakes as shown.

(28) Insert the remaining six stakes (8) into

compartment (10) as shown.

NOTE

End bracket (7), with two hitch pins (6), covers compartment

(10).

TM 08780B-10

2-536

(29) Position two end brackets (7) on

compartments (9 and 10) and install hitch pins (6).

TM 08780B-10

2-537

2-29. ISO/ANSI CONTAINER LOADING PROCEDURES

TRANSPORTING, HANDLING AND LOADING OF ANY

EXPLOSIVES AND/OR HAZARDOUS MATERIAL MUST BE

DONE IN ACCORDANCE WITH LOCAL, STATE AND

FEDERAL REGULATIONS. MOTOR VEHICLE

OPERATOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES ARE PROVIDED IN THE

MOTOR VEHICLE DRIVERS HANDBOOK FOR

AMMUNITION, EXPLOSIVES AND HAZARDOUS

MATERIAL, NAVSEA SWO-20-AF-ABK-101.

a. General. Logistic Vehicle System trailers are

designed to transport standardized containers. These special

containers are manufactured to meet specifications of the

International Standards Organization/American National Standards

Institute (ISO/ANSI). There are three sizes of such containers

available for use with the LVS. They are:

• 8' X 8' X 20' containers (MK14/14A1 only)

• 8' X 8' X 10' containers (MK14/14A1 and MK17/17A1

only)

• 8' X 4' X 6' container pallets (MK14/14A1, MK15/15A1,

and MK17/17A1 only)

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-538

TO PREVENT PARTS DAMAGE, REMOVE CARGO SIDES

FROM MK48/48A1/17/17A1 BEFORE LOADING ISO/ANSI

CONTAINERS. IT IS IMPORTANT TO KNOW WHICH

CONTAINERS CAN/SHOULD BE USED WITH YOUR LVS

TRAILER. IT IS ALSO IMPORTANT TO KNOW WHERE ON

THE TRAILER BED TO INSTALL VARIOUS CONTAINERS

AND CONTAINER COMBINATIONS. TABLE 2-8 (LVS

ISO/ANSI CONTAINER LOADING COMBINATIONS)

SHOWS ALL POSSIBLE COMBINATIONS AND LOCATIONS

FOR THE VARIOUS CONTAINER LOADS.

CAUTION

TM 08780B-10

2-539

TABLE 2-10. LVS ISO/ANSI CONTAINER LOAD COMBINATIONS

VEHICLE

MODEL

CONTAINER

SIZE USE

COMBINATION/INSTALLATION

LOCATIONS

MK48/48A1/

14/14A1

20 Ft.

Container

10 Ft.

Container

6 Ft. Container

Pallets

MK48/48A1

15/15A1

6 Ft. Container

Pallets

MK48/48A1/

17/17A1

10 Ft.

Container

6 Ft. Container

Pallets

TM 08780B-10

2-540

b. Container Lockdowns. Four types of container

lockdowns are used with LVS trailers to secure containers for

travel. They are:

• Fixed Cargo Bed Container Locks (1)

• Portable Lock Assemblies (2)

• Pallet-Container Vertical Stacking Locks (3)

• Pallet-Container Horizontal Interconnecting Locks (4)

Fixed cargo bed container locks (1) are found at each corner of the

MK14/14A1 trailer bed only. Portable lock assemblies (2) are

used to install 10-foot containers and 6-foot container pallets

TM 08780B-10

2-541

directly to trailer beds. Pallet-container stacking locks (3 and 4)

are used only to secure 6-foot container pallets on top of one

another and to interconnect.

• Refer to paragraph 2-28, section c, for instructions on use

of the fixed cargo bed container locks (1)

• Refer to paragraph 2-28, section d, for instructions on use

of portable lock assemblies (2)

• Refer to paragraph 2-28, section e, for instructions on use

of pallet-container locks (3 and 4).

c. Fixed Cargo Bed Container Locks

NOTE

Fixed cargo bed container locks (1) are located at each corner of

the MK14/14A1 Container Hauler Trailer only.

(1) Lift cover plate (5) upward from cargo bed

(6).

(2) Grasp handle (7) and push up to swing fixed

cargo bed container lock (1) into an upright position.

(3) Close cover plate (5).

TM 08780B-10

2-542

(4) Repeat steps (1) thru (3) above for each

fixed lock being used during operation.

NOTE

Triangle portion (8) of fixed cargo bed container lock (1) must be

lined up with the lock base (9) before lowering ISO/ANSI

container (10).

(5) Direct ISO/ANSI container (10) to be

lowered into cargo bed (6). Make certain each corner of

ISO/ANSI container (10) lines up with each fixed cargo bed

container lock (1).

(6) With ISO/ANSI container (10) in position,

secure the container for travel by turning handle (7) one quarter

turn. Make certain handle (7) is locked in place by the handle lock

(11). Repeat this step for each lockdown being used.

TM 08780B-10

2-543

(7) To release ISO/ANSI container (10), lift

upon handle lock (11) and turn handle (7) one quarter turn.

(8) After ISO/ANSI container (10) has been

removed, lift cover plate (5). Grasp handle (7) and pull downward

to lower fixed cargo bed container lock (1) into its trailer housing.

Close cover plate (5). Repeat this step for each fixed cargo bed

container lock (1) used.

d. Portable Lock Assemblies

NOTE

Portable lock assemblies (2) are used to secure 6-foot container

pallets and 10-foot containers to the beds of MK14/14A1,

MK15/15A1 and MK17/17A1 trailers. The portable lock

assemblies (2) are used in combination with the fixed cargo bed

container lock (1) on MK14/14A1 trailers.

(1) Lower assembly lock pin (12) through keyed

fitting hole (13).

(2) Install assembly lockdown (14) into keyed

fitting hole (13). Turn assembly lockdown (14) until center tab-

lock (15) lines up with and falls into inboard key (16). From

beneath the cargo bed, grasp the underside of the assembly

lockdown (14) and pull downward, making certain center tab-lock

(15) is fully seated.

(3) Repeat the above two steps at all locations

on the trailer bed where portable lock assemblies (2) are to be

used.

TM 08780B-10

2-544

TM 08780B-10

2-545

(4) Direct the ISO/ANSI container (10) into

position on cargo bed (6). Make certain each corner of the

container lines up with the positioned lockdowns (portable lock

assemblies and/or fixed cargo bed container locks).

(5) With ISO/ANSI container (10) in position,

secure container for travel by inserting assembly lock pin (12)

through container (10) and into lockdown assembly (14). Turn

lock pin (12) so that handle points downward.

(6) To release ISO/ANSI containers (10) from

portable lock assemblies, turn assembly lock pin (12) and remove

lock pin from assembly lockdown (14).

(7) To remove portable lock assemblies (2)

from trailer beds (6), push up on tab lock (15) until assembly

lockdown (14) is released from its lock position. Turn assembly

lockdown (14) until the lockdown key lines up with key holes on

trailer bed. Lift to remove portable lock assemblies.

TM 08780B-10

2-546

e. Pallet Container Stacking and Interconnecting

Locks

NOTE

Pallet container stacking locks consist of vertical stacking locks

(3) and interconnecting locks (4). The base pallet containers (17)

are first secured to the vehicle bed using a combination of the

fixed cargo container locks and portable lock assemblies, as

required. The stacking and interconnecting locks (3 and 4) are

then used to secure pallets stacked on top of the base pallets.

DO NOT STACK PALLETS ON LVS TRAILERS MORE THAN

TWO CONTAINERS HIGH. PALLETS STACKED HIGHER

THAN TWO-HIGH WILL DANGEROUSLY AFFECT

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-547

VEHICLE STABILITY ON OR OFF THE ROAD. REFER TO

TABLE 2-10 FOR ISO/ANSI CONTAINER LOAD

COMBINATIONS USED WITH LVS.

NOTE

If required, install vertical stacking locks (3) as follows:

(1) To lock the vertical stacking locks (3):

(a) Insert lock pin (18) into hole (19)

indicated by the arrow casting (20). Push on pin. This will cause

the head of the lock to rotate, connecting the two containers

together.

(b) Remove lock pin (18) and insert at

an angle into hole (21) in container corner post.

TM 08780B-10

2-548

TM 08780B-10

2-549

(c) Back lock pin (18) into facing

container corner post hole (22) and insert into locking hole (23).

(d) Twist lock pin (18) so that curved

portion of pin rests against corner post.

TM 08780B-10

2-550

(2) To unlock the vertical stacking locks (3):

(a) Twist lock pin (18) so that curved

portion of pin is in a vertical position.

(b) Back lock pin (18) into hole in

facing corner post and remove pin (18) from locking hole (23).

(c) Move lock pin (18) forward, turn at

an angle, and remove from corner posts.

(d) Insert lock pin (18) into hole (24)

opposite arrow casting (20). Push on pin. This will cause the

head of lock to rotate.

(e) Remove lock pin (18) from hole

(24).

(3) To lock the interconnecting locks (4),

alternately turn hex head locking bolts (25) clockwise. Tighten

securely.

TM 08780B-10

2-551

(4) To unlock the interconnecting locks (4),

alternately turn right hex head locking bolts (25) counterclockwise

to fully extend horizontal brace (26). Repeat for left hex head

locking bolt.

2-30. CARGO TIEDOWN RINGS AND RATCHET

STRAPS

TRANSPORTING, HANDLING AND LOADING OF ANY

EXPLOSIVES AND/OR HAZARDOUS MATERIAL MUST BE

DONE IN ACCORDANCE WITH LOCAL, STATE AND

FEDERAL REGULATIONS. MOTOR VEHICLE

OPERATOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES ARE PROVIDED IN THE

MOTOR VEHICLE DRIVERS HANDBOOK FOR

AMMUNITION, EXPLOSIVES AND HAZARDOUS

MATERIAL, NAVSEA SWO-20-AF-ABK-101.

a. General. Cargo tiedown rings (1) can be used in

conjunction with six foot ISO/ANSI container pallets if needed or

as separate rigging rings for transportation of cargo not contained

in ISO/ANSI containers.

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-552

b. Installation

(1) Insert either wedged end (2) of cargo

tiedown ring (1) into elongated slot on trailer bed.

(2) Once inserted, twist cargo tiedown ring (1)

one quarter turn. Ring should be facing in the direction of the

cargo.

TM 08780B-10

2-553

NOTE

Rigging procedure below is one way of securing cargo for travel.

This procedure shows how ratchet straps (3) can be used with

cargo tiedown rings (1).

(3) Rig hooked end of strap (4) to tiedown ring

(1). Route strap over the cargo toward opposite tiedown ring (1).

TM 08780B-10

2-554

(4) Rig hooked end of ratchet (5) to opposite

tiedown ring and thread end of strap (4) through ratchet (5) as

shown. Pull end of strap (4) through ratchet (5) to remove all

slack.

(5) Crank ratchet (5) as required to secure

cargo.

NOTE

Tie up loose end of strap (4) as necessary to keep end of strap

from lying loose on the cargo bed.

(6) To release ratchet tension on strap (4), pull

back on handle release (6) and fully open ratchet (5) and pull strap

(4) back out of ratchet.

TM 08780B-10

2-555

2-31. RUN FLAT AND SAND TIRE KITS

a. General. Run flat or sand tires maybe used as

optional equipment. These tires are described below.

TO PREVENT TIRE DAMAGE, DO NOT EXCEED 20 MILES

PER HOUR OR A DISTANCE OF 20 MILES ON A

FLATTENED RUN FLAT TIRE.

b. Run Flat Tires. Run flat tires look and operate like

standard LVS tires. Run flat tires can be identified by the letters

RF stamped on plate clamps (1).

The space within a run flat tire is almost entirely filled by two

metal sections (2). Lubrication packets (3) are strapped to these

metal sections. When a run flat tire loses air pressure it will start

to flatten and rupture the lubrication packets. This lubrication will

allow the run flat tire to operate for a limited time until it can be

repaired. Once the lubrication packets have ruptured, the run flat

tire must be repaired by Organizational Maintenance.

CAUTION

TM 08780B-10

2-556

c. Sand Tires. The sand tire kit consists of nine sand

tires (4) with special wheels, a taller spare tire mounting bracket

(5), and an extension tube (6). Because the sand tires are so much

wider, the mounting bracket (5) and extension tube (6) are required

to stow and change the spare sand tire. When using the spare tire

hoist (paragraph 3-8b of this manual) extension tube (6) must be

inserted to remove the sand tire from its stowed position.

TM 08780B-10

2-557

2-32. REAR BODY TOW UNIT OPERATION

a. General. The rear body tow unit allows any of the

four trailers to be towed, once uncoupled from an MK48/48A1, by

vehicles of sufficient capacity. The rear of the tow unit bolts to the

trailer in the same way that the MK48/48A1 does. The front of the

tow unit attaches to the towing vehicle through the use of a pintle.

This connection allows any of the trailers to be towed fully loaded,

on or off road.

TM 08780B-10

2-558

Inter-vehicular air lines and an electrical cable are provided to

operate the towed trailer's brakes and lights. Safety chains are also

included. The bolts that attach the tow unit to the trailer are stored

in a box on the tow unit when not in use. The air lines and the

electrical cable are also stowed on the tow unit.

b. Installation

• ONLY ONE EXTRA TRAILER CAN BE TOWED WITH

THE REAR BODY TOW UNIT. THERE ARE NO

BRAKE PROVISIONS FOR ADDITIONAL TRAILERS.

• CARGO WEIGHT ON REAR TOW UNIT SHALL NOT

EXCEED 12.5 TONS (11.337 MT) AND PINTLE

WEIGHT SHALL NOT EXCEED 5,000 POUNDS (2,270

KG).

• DO NOT STAND UNDER REAR BODY TOW UNIT

WHEN IT IS SUPPORTED BY A CRANE. SERIOUS

INJURY OR DEATH WILL RESULT IF THE TOW

UNIT IT FALLS.

(1) Using a crane or suitable lifting device, lift

rear body (1) tow unit into position. Make sure mating surfaces of

tow unit and trailer are clean.

(2) Remove 12 capscrews (2) and nuts (3) from

stowage compartments (4). Using two flanged capscrews (2),

align rear body tow unit with mating surface of trailer. Install two

flanged nuts (3) on flanged capscrews (2). Hand tighten flanged

nuts.

(3) Install remaining 11 flanged capscrews (2)

and flanged nuts (3). Hand tighten flanged nuts (3).

(4) Tighten flanged capscrews as tight as

possible. Have Organizational Maintenance torque flanged

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-559

capscrews to 225-275 foot-pounds (305-373 N*m) as soon as

possible.

NOTE

Each air line has different size couplings that prevent them from

being hooked up wrong.

(5) Remove air line plug (6) from nipple (7).

Remove remaining three air line plugs (6).

(6) Remove cover (8) from electrical receptacle

by turning counterclockwise.

TM 08780B-10

2-560

(7) Pullback on quick disconnect coupling

sleeve (9) and remove airline (10).

NOTE

Air tanks of trailer have to be drained in order to hook up air

lines. This is due to high air pressure.

TM 08780B-10

2-561

(8) Pullback on coupling sleeve (9) and push

airline (10) onto nipple (7). Release coupling sleeve to lock air

line on nipple. Make sure air line fully engages.

(9) Repeat steps (7) and (8) for the remaining

three air lines.

(10) Attach electrical cable (11) to receptacle

(12) by engaging slots and turning clockwise.

(11) Matchmark companion flanges (13) at No. 3

axle. While supporting propeller shaft (14), remove eight

capscrews (15), nuts (16), and lockwashers (17).

TM 08780B-10

2-562

NOTE

If trailer towed in tandem is going to be used for an extended

period of time, remove propeller shaft (14), prepare for storage

and store.

(12) Secure propeller shaft (14) at both ends.

Refer to paragraph 2-42, step f.

(13) Back vehicle and attach tow eye to towing

vehicle. Raise or lower trailer landing legs to aid in hook up.

Attach two safety chains (18) to towing vehicle.

(14) Plug electrical cable (11) into inter-vehicle

receptacle of towing vehicle.

TM 08780B-10

2-563



(15) Remove service glad hands (19 and 20)

from tow unit. Attach glad hands (19 and 20) to towing vehicle-

RED to RED, BLUE to BLUE.

(16) Remove landing leg support braces and stow

in position on trailer. Raise and stow landing legs. If pulling the

MK17/17A1 trailer, raise and stow rear landing leg.

(17) Start the towing vehicle's engine and build

air pressure to 120 psi. Leave parking brake set.

(18) Charge the trailer air system by pushing

TRAILER AIR SUPPLY VALVE.

(19) Check turn signal, brake, and tail light

operation on trailer if tactical conditions allow.

(20) Release parking brake. Check for proper

service brake operation before driving.

CAUTION

TM 08780B-10

2-564

c. Removal

(1) Park trailer on the most level ground

available and apply parking brakes.

(2) Chock front and back of wheels on trailer.

(3) Lower landing legs and install leg braces.

On the MK17/17A1 trailer, lower rear landing leg.

(4) Disconnect glad hands (19 and 20) from

towing vehicle. Stow glad hands on tow unit.

(5) Close air supply valves (20.1) located on

crossmember.

(6) Remove electrical cable (11) from towing

vehicle.

TM 08780B-10

2-565

(7) Remove tow unit eye from vehicle's pintle.

Raise or lower trailer landing legs to aid in removal. Drive vehicle

away from trailer.

HAVE ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE REPLACE

LOCKWASHERS (17) AS SOON AS POSSIBLE. FAILURE

TO DO SO MAY CAUSE PROPELLER SHAFT TO COME

LOOSE.

(8) Align matchmark on companion flanges (13).

While supporting propeller shaft (14), install eight capscrews (15),

lockwashers (17) and nuts (16).

(9) Securely tighten capscrews (15) and nuts

(16).

CAUTION

TM 08780B-10

2-566

(10) Remove electrical cable (11) from

receptacle (12). Install cover (8) on receptacle (12).

(11) Pull back on coupling sleeve (9) and remove

air line (10) from nipple (7).

(12) Attach air line (10) to stowage nipple on tow

unit.

(13) Repeat steps (10) and (11) for remaining

three air lines.

(14) Install air line plug (6) on nipple (7). Install

remaining three air line plugs (6).

TM 08780B-10

2-567

(15) Using a crane or suitable lifting device,

support tow unit so that the mounting capscrews can be removed.

(16) Remove 12 flanged capscrews (2) and

flanged nuts (3).

(17) Separate tow unit (1) from trailer. Stow

capscrews (2) and nuts (3) in compartment (4).

TM 08780B-10

2-568

2-33. EXTENDED AND STANDARD PINTLE

OPERATION

• THE FRONT EXTENDED PINTLE IS HEAVY AND AT

LEAST THREE PEOPLE MUST BE USED TO

INSTALL IT ON A FRONT POWER UNIT.

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-569

• THE REAR EXTENDED PINTLE IS EXTREMELY

HEAVY AND MUST NOT BE INSTALLED,

REMOVED, OR STOWED WITHOUT USE OF A

CRANE OR OTHER SUITABLE LIFTING DEVICE.

NOTE

The front and rear extended pintle is used primarily by the

MK48/48A1/17/17A1 Dropside Cargo Vehicle. However, the

front extended pintle can be installed on any MK48/48A1 front

power unit.

a. General Description. The front and rear extended

pintle kit is designed for use in towing or pushing of the M198

howitzer. The front extended pintle allows the vehicle to push the

howitzer into firing position. It may also be used for loading of a

howitzer onto aircraft. The rear extended pintle allows the

howitzer to be towed from the rear of an MK17/17A1 dropside

cargo trailer.

b. Installing Front Extended Pintle

FRONT EXTENDED PINTLE (1) IS HEAVY. FOR SAFETY,

THE PINTLE SHOULD BE HELD FIRMLY ON BOTH SIDES

WHILE THIRD ASSISTANT POSITIONS AND SECURES

THE PINTLE IN PLACE.

(1) With assistants holding both sides of

extended pintle (1), position ends of horizontal mounting bars (2)

on upper tow eyes (3). Secure horizontal mounting bars (2) in

place with pins (4) and quick release pins (5).

(2) To stow for travel, remove quick release pin

(6) and pin (7).

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-570

(3) Swing extended pintle (1) upward and

secure to upper mounting bracket (8) with pin (7) and quick release

pin (6).

TM 08780B-10

2-571

c. Front Extended Pintle Operation

FRONT EXTENDED PINTLE IS HEAVY. USE HELPER

WHEN HANDLING EXTENSION KITS.

(1) Unstowing Front Extended Pintle

(a) Using two people, remove quick

release pin (6) and pin (7) from mounting bracket (8).

(b) Lower front extended pintle (1).

Raise support arm (9) to mounting bracket (8).

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-572

(c) Install pin (7) into support bracket

(8) and support arm (9). Install pin (7) and quick release pin (6).

(2) Stowing Front Extended Pintle

(a) Using two people, remove quick

release pin (6) from pin (7). Remove pin (7) from mounting

bracket (8) and support arm (9).

(b) Lower support arm (9).

(c) Raise front extended pintle (1) until

it reaches mounting bracket (8). Install pin (7) and quick release

pin (6).

TM 08780B-10

2-573

d. Rear Extended Pintle Operations

(1) Removal from Stowage Mount

(a) Assemble spare tire hoist with its

extension tube. Refer to paragraph 3-8, section b.

(b) Attach cable hook to the extended

pintle (10) as shown. Start lifting pintle until cable just becomes

tight.

(c) Remove four quick release pins (11) and

four mounting pins (12) from extended pintle (10).

EXTENDED PINTLE (10) IS EXTREMELY HEAVY. ORDER

ALL PERSONNEL CLEAR OF THE WORK AREA UNTIL

LOWERING OPERATION IS COMPLETE.

(d) Lift extended pintle (10) until it is

clear of stowage mount (13). Swing extended pintle (10) to side of

vehicle and lower.

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-574

(2) Installation

(a) Position pintle (10) so that two pins

(12) can be installed through pintle and two rear tow brackets (14).

Install pins (12) and quick release pins (15).

(b) Remove quick release pin (16) and

pin (17) from support arm (18).

(c) Raise support arm (18) to support

bracket (19). Install pin (17) and quick release pin (16).

TM 08780B-10

2-575

(3) Stowing Rear Extended Pintle

(a) Attach lifting device strap or cable to

the extended pintle (10) as shown. Start lifting pintle until

strap/cable just becomes tight.

(b) Remove quick release pin (16) and

pin (17).

(c) Remove two quick release pins (15)

from pins (12).

TM 08780B-10

2-576

(d) Remove two pins (12). Remove rear

extended pintle (10). Install pin (17) and quick release pin (16)

into support (18).

(e) Lift and position rear extended pintle

(10) over stowage mount (13).

(f) Lower extended pintle (10) onto

stowage mount. Install four pins (12) and four quick release pins

(11).

(g) Remove straps or cable used to lift

pintle.

(h) Disassemble and stow tire hoist.

Refer to paragraph 3-8, section f.

e. Operating Pintle Hook

(1) Remove cotter pin (1), pull up on pintle

latch (2), and open pintle (3).

TM 08780B-10

2-577

(2) Attach tow bar eye or other towing device to

pintle (3).

(3) Push down on latch (2) to close pintle (3).

(4) Insert cotter pin (1) to lock pintle (3).

2-34. MACHINE GUN PLATFORM AND HATCH

OPERATION

a. Platform

(1) To lower platform.

(a) Pull upward on seat back (1) and

fold it down.

(b) Slide seat (1) back to the rear

position.

TM 08780B-10

2-578

(c) Remove retainer ring (2) from stud

(3).

(d) Fold platform (4) down, placing

support leg (5) on cab floor next to seat.

(e) Fold out platform extension (6).

TM 08780B-10

2-579

(2) To raise platform.

(a) Fold in platform extension (6).

(b) Lift up platform (4) and fold in

support leg (5).

(c) Secure platform on stud (3) and

install retainer ring (2).

(d) Lift up seat back (1) and lock into

upright position.

TM 08780B-10

2-580

b. Hatch

(1) To open hatch.

(a) Using two hands, push straight up on

hatch (7) until all corners are locked in the up position.

TO AVOID DAMAGING ROOF VENT, MAKE SURE THAT IT

IS FULLY CLOSED BEFORE SLIDING HATCH OPEN.

(b) Slide hatch (7) all the way to the left.

(c) To keep hatch from sliding, push

down on nearside of the hatch, locking it down on roof.

CAUTION

TM 08780B-10

2-581

(2) Closing hatch.

(a) If hatch is locked down, pull upward

on nearside of hatch until it is locked in the up position.

(b) Slide hatch all the way to the right.

(c) Grasp straps (8) and pull downward

until hatch (7) is fully seated.

TM 08780B-10

2-582

2-35. M870/M870A1 TRAILER KIT OPERATION

a. General Description. The M870 trailer kit is

designed to allow the MK16/16A1 to utilize its on board winch to

pull the M870/M870A1 trailer up to engage the fifth wheel. The

kit consists of an adjustable set of cable guide rollers, a cable guide

plate, and two auxiliary ramp assemblies.

b. Install Cable Guide Plate

(1) Position cable guide plate (1) over pintle

hook (2).

(2) Secure cable guide plate (1) with pin (3) and


TM 08780B-10

2-583

c. Install Auxiliary Ramp Assemblies

(1) Position auxiliary ramp (1) over rear tow

eye (2).

(2) Secure auxiliary ramp (1) with pin (3) and


(3) Repeat for other auxiliary ramp (1).

TM 08780B-10

2-584

Section IV. Operation Under Unusual Conditions

2-36. INTRODUCTION. This section provides procedures that

should be followed when operating the vehicle under extreme

weather or terrain conditions. This section also includes operating

procedures that should be followed after certain systems and

components of the vehicle have failed or have been damaged.

2-37. OPERATING IN EXTREME COLD WEATHER

a. General. In extreme cold lubricants may thicken

and cause parts to fail. Refer to LI 2320-12/9 for proper lubricants.

Tires may freeze to the ground or may freeze flat on the bottom if

under-inflated. The operator should be alert to these possibilities

in order to prevent damage to the vehicle.

b. Before Starting. Perform all Before (B) operation

preventive maintenance checks and services (PMCS). Refer to

PMCS tables 2-1 thru 2-5.

c. Starting Engine

(1) For starting instructions, refer to paragraph

2-13, section c.

NOTE

Upon startup, the engine must be operated at low idle (690-700

rpm) for five minutes.

(2) After engine starts, check the following

gauges for their proper readings:

(a) Oil pressure (2) for 5-49 psi (34-337

kPa) at idle.

(b) Volt meter (3) for 26-28 volts.

(c) Air pressure gauge (4) for 120 psi

(827 kPa).

TM 08780B-10

2-585

(3) If gauges do not indicate normal readings,

shutdown engine and notify Organizational Maintenance.

d. Driving

NOTE

• In extremely cold areas it is necessary to warm gear cases,

wheel hubs and control linkages before operating the

vehicle.

• Steering may respond quicker when using lubricants

designed for cold weather.

(1) Shift transfer case (5) and transmission (6)

to desired gear ranges. If necessary, refer to paragraph 2-13,

section d.

(2) Release parking brake (7).

TM 08780B-10

2-586

(3) Drive slowly for 100 yards (91 m). This

should be enough time to warm up the gear cases and tires.

(4) Drive normally as weather and road

conditions permit.

(5) Constantly check gauges during operation

for normal reading.

e. Crane Operation

• WHEN STARTING THE CRANE IN EXTREME COLD,

PERFORM ALL FUNCTIONS SLOWLY AND AVOID

SUDDEN SHOCKS.

• DO NOT FULLY EXTEND ANY HYDRAULIC

CYLINDER WITHOUT FIRST WARMING IT.

• FOR NON-LVSA1 VEHICLES, ELECTRONIC

CIRCUITRY MUST BE PREHEATED BEFORE

OPERATION.

(1) For non-LVSA1 vehicles, set the Manual-

Off-Remote switch to the MANUAL position. Leave in the

MANUAL position for at least 10 minutes to preheat the electronic

circuitry.

(2) Extend each hydraulic cylinder several

inches and partially retract it. Continue to extend and retract each

hydraulic cylinder until each hydraulic cylinder is fully extended.

This action mixes the warm oil flow with the cold thick oil in the

cylinders.

f. Parking

(1) If possible, park on hard, dry ground. If not

possible, use planks or brush to make a raised, and relatively dry

CAUTION

TM 08780B-10

2-587

surface for vehicle's tires-guarding against worse weather and

softer ground. Keep tires out of snow, water, ice or mud, if

possible.

(2) Engage parking brake.

(3) Idle engine at 800-1,000 rpm for 4 to 5

minutes to allow turbocharger to slow down.

(4) Shut down engine.

g. After Shut-Down

(1) Perform all After (A) operation preventive

maintenance checks and services (PMCS). Refer to PMCS tables

2-1 thru 2-5.

(2) Clean vehicle of snow, ice, or mud as soon

as possible after shutdown.

(3) Fill fuel tank to guard against condensation.

(4) Check fuel separator for water. If necessary,

drain it. Refer to PMCS table 2-1.

(5) Drain water from all air reservoirs. Refer to

paragraph 3-5.

2-38. OPERATING IN HOT WEATHER

a. General. Extreme heat exists when outside

temperatures reach +95°F (+35°C) or more. The effect of extreme

heat on vehicle engine is a decrease in engine efficiency.

Operators must adjust driving to conditions when operating in

extreme heat.

TM 08780B-10

2-588

b. Before Operation

(1) Perform all Before (B) operation preventive

maintenance checks and services (PMCS). Refer to PMCS tables

2-1 thru 2-5.

(2) Check radiator (1) for insects, sand, or other

obstructions that may block air flow.

c. Driving

(1) Do not drive the vehicle continuously at

high speed. Avoid long hard pulls on steep grades.

(2) Check air filter restriction indicator (2)

frequently. If indicator shows red, park vehicle, shut off engine,

and notify Organizational Maintenance.

(3) Frequently check water temperature gauge

(3), oil pressure gauge (4), and transmission oil temperature gauge

TM 08780B-10

2-589

(5). Engine is overheating if one or more of the following

conditions exist:

• Engine coolant temperature is +230°F (+110°C) as

indicated by temperature gauge.

• Engine oil pressure drops.

• Transmission oil temperature exceeds +250°F (+121°C) as

indicated by transmission oil temperature gauge.

(4) If engine overheating occurs:

(a) Park vehicle and allow engine to

idle.

IF ENGINE TEMPERATURE CONTINUES TO RISE OR

DOES NOT SHOW SIGNS OF DECREASING AFTER 2

MINUTES OF IDLING, TURN ENGINE OFF AND NOTIFY

ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE IMMEDIATELY.

CAUTION

TM 08780B-10

2-590

(b) Observe water temperature gauge

(3), transmission oil temperature gauge (5), and engine oil pressure

gauge (4) for indications that engine is steadily cooling.

(c) Shut down engine when engine

coolant reaches normal operating range of +180°F to +200°F

(+82°C to +93°C) as indicated by water temperature gauge (4).

Boil over may result if engine is shut down earlier than this.

(d) Perform troubleshooting procedure

as listed in paragraph 3-2.

(e) Proceed with operation. Report any

overheating to Organizational Maintenance at completion of

operation.

d. Parking

(1) Park vehicle under cover whenever possible

to protect tires, canvas, paint, and batteries from sun, dust and

sand.

(2) Check batteries daily. Service as required

when operating in heat.

2-39. OPERATING IN ROUGH OR UNUSUAL TERRAIN

OFF ROAD OPERATION MUST BE LIMITED TO 30 MPH.

EMERGENCY OPERATION (SAND, MUD, OR SNOW) MUST


a. General. The operator must always be alert to

changes in terrain. The operator should be cautious when entering

an extremely rough area or an area that requires special

preparation.

CAUTION

TM 08780B-10

2-591

b. Woods and Rocky Terrain

MAKE SURE VEHICLE CAN CLEAR GROUND

OBSTRUCTIONS, SUCH AS STUMPS AND LARGE ROCKS,

BEFORE DRIVING OVER THEM. STUMPS AND ROCKS

CAN DAMAGE COMPONENTS UNDERNEATH VEHICLE.

(1) Fold side mirrors in far enough that rear of

vehicle can be seen, but mirrors will not be damaged by

obstructions.

(2) If possible, avoid driving over obstructions

such as stumps or large rocks.

MAKE SURE VEHICLE AND CARGO CAN CLEAR

OVERHANGING TREE LIMBS AND OTHER

OBSTRUCTIONS. LOW OVERHEAD OBSTRUCTIONS CAN

DAMAGE CARGO AND TOP PARTS OF VEHICLE.

(3) If possible, avoid low overhanging

obstructions such as tree limbs.

(4) Check traction and brakes. Rocks and fallen

leaves can be very slick, especially when wet.

(5) When driving over rocky terrain, be sure

spare tire on vehicle is in good repair and is properly inflated.

Refer to PMCS table 2-1.

(6) When maneuvering vehicle on a steep, rock

grade, keep vehicle pointed up and down as much as possible.

Traveling a steep, rock grade sideways may cause a loss of traction

resulting in a roll-over.

CAUTION

CAUTION

TM 08780B-10

2-592

DO NOT APPLY JACOBS BRAKE WHEN VEHICLE IS ON

SLICK SURFACE. APPLYING JACOBS BRAKE ON SLICK

SURFACES MAY CAUSE VEHICLE TO SKID, RESULTING

IN INJURY OR DEATH.

(7) Do not use Jacobs brake in rocky or wooded

areas.

c. Operating In Mud Or Sand

BLOWING SAND CAN SCRATCH GLASS SURFACES. TO

PREVENT SCRATCHING, GLASS SURFACES SHOULD BE

COVERED AS MUCH AS POSSIBLE IN THESE

CONDITIONS.

(1) Cover glass surfaces, if not needed for safe

operation. To prevent scratching surface, extreme care should be

taken when cleaning glass.

NOTE

Principles of driving in sand can also be applied to driving in

mud. The best time to drive on sand is at night or early morning

when sand is damp. Damp sand gives better traction.

(2) Check air filter restriction indicator often.

(3) Fold vehicle mirrors in so that rear of

vehicle can still be seen, but will clear any obstruction.

(4) With vehicle stopped and engine idling, shift

driveline lockup control to either AXLE LOCKUP or TRANSFER

CASE LOCKUP. Shift transfer case to LOW RANGE.

(5) Shift transmission to D (drive).

WARNING

CAUTION

TM 08780B-10

2-593

(6) Start out slowly. Do not spin wheels when

starting to move vehicle. Downshift transmission as required.

(7) Avoid straddling sand mounds, or driving

across sand mounds. Loose sand will not support vehicle.

(8) Avoid making sharp turns or sudden stops

while driving on loose sand or mud.

(9) If vehicle starts to skid, do the following:

(a) Release throttle treadle.

(b) Steer in direction of skid until

vehicle stops skidding.

(c) Depress throttle treadle slowly and

steer vehicle in a straight direction.

(10) Parking

(a) When possible, park vehicle so it

does not face into the wind.

(b) In blowing sand, cover glass surfaces

to prevent scratching.

(c) If no shelter is available, cover

radiator with canvas.

(d) Use caution while refueling to

prevent dust or sand from entering fuel tanks. Tighten filler caps

securely after refueling.

(e) Perform after operation checks.

Refer to PMCS tables 2-1 thru 2-7.

TM 08780B-10

2-594

d. Operating In Snow

(1) For operation in cold weather, refer to

paragraph 2-13.

(2) If operating in extreme cold weather, refer to

paragraph 2-37.

(3) With engine idling and vehicle stopped, shift

driveline lockup control to either AXLE LOCKUP or TRANSFER

CASE LOCKUP. Shift transfer case to LOW RANGE.

(4) Shift transmission to D (drive).

(5) Start slowly. Avoid spinning wheels when

starting to move vehicle. Downshift transmission as required.

(6) Skidding, loss of traction and loss of

steering are the chief operating problems on packed snow or icy

roads. When rear end skidding occurs, do the following

immediately:

(a) Turn front wheels in direction of the

skid.

(b) Let up on throttle treadle.

(c) Apply service brakes gradually and

intermittently until control is regained.

(7) Parking

(h) Remove all built up snow, ice, or

mud from under fenders, front wheels, rear wheels, and vehicle in

general.

(i) Drain air tanks and fuel separator.

TM 08780B-10

2-595

(j) Perform after operation checks.

Refer to PMCS tables 2-1 thru 2-7.

2-40. FORDING OPERATIONS

a. General. Your vehicle may have to operate in

different depths of water. Normally, all important vehicle

components will allow water fording up to 60 inches (1,524 mm)

in depth.

DO NOT FORD WATER DEEPER THAN 60 INCHES (1,524

MM). LIMIT SPEED TO THREE TO FOUR MILES (4.8 TO

6.4 KM) PER HOUR WHILE FORDING.

b. Preparation for Fording

(1) Tighten both fuel tank caps (1).

(2) Make sure battery filler caps (2) are secure.

(3) Make sure hydraulic reservoir filler cap (3)

is secure.

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-596

(4) Make sure cab drain plugs (4), located under

seats, are in place on both sides of the cab.

(5) Make sure flywheel pipe plug (5) is in place.

(6) Secure all loose objects on vehicle.

(7) Clean and check axle breathers for correct

operation.

c. Fording

(1) Start vehicle. Make sure engine is running

properly. If necessary, refer to paragraph 2-13 for proper starting

and engine operating instructions.

(2) With engine idling, and vehicle stopped,

shift transfer case to LOW, and transmission to (D) drive.

TM 08780B-10

2-597

(3) Find a gentle slope to enter water. Enter

water slowly, at a right angle to the shore.

(4) Maintain an even speed while fording.

Excessive speed will cause water to cover vehicle. Water spray

could enter the air intake and stall the engine.

(5) Find a gentle slope to leave water. Stop

vehicle. Shift transfer case to DIRECT.

d. After Fording

(1) If fording was in salt water, wash vehicle

with fresh water as soon as possible. Refer to paragraph 3-6.

(2) Remove cab drain plugs (4) to drain any

water that may have entered the cab.

(3) Remove flywheel pipe plug (5), allow water

to drain, then reinstall plug.

(4) Perform after operation PMCS. Refer to

PMCS tables 2-1 thru 2-7.

2-41. EMERGENCY OPERATING PROCEDURE

a. General. The following procedures allow operation

or movement of the LVS when certain systems or components of

the vehicle are damaged or fail. These procedures should only be

used when vehicle cannot be repaired on location.

b. Operation With Loss Of Air Pressure

(1) If either the red or green pointer (1 or 2)

indicates less than normal operating pressure, do the following:

TM 08780B-10

2-598

WHEN RED OR GREEN POINTER INDICATES LESS THAN

NORMAL OPERATING PRESSURE, BRAKING CAPABILITY

IS REDUCED. EXTRA CARE MUST BE USED TO AVOID A

COLLISION WHICH COULD RESULT IN SEVERE INJURY

OR DEATH.

(a) Continue operation of vehicle.

Brakes will function at a reduced capacity.

(b) Leave additional distance between

vehicles. Braking distance is greatly increased.

(c) Downshift, if necessary, when

slowing vehicle.

DO NOT USE JACOBS ENGINE BRAKE WHEN VEHICLE IS

ON SLIPPERY SURFACE. IF ENGINE BRAKE IS USED

INCORRECTLY, VEHICLE CONTROL CAN BE LOST. THIS

CAN RESULT IN SEVERE INJURY OR DEATH.

WARNING

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-599

(d) If necessary to slow vehicle, place

Jacobs engine brake HI/LOW switch (3) in LOW and place

ON/OFF switch (4) ON.

(2) If both the red pointer (1) and the green

pointer (2) indicate zero air pressure, do the following:

(a) Downshift, if necessary, to slow

vehicle.

(b) Pull vehicle over, as clear of traffic

as possible.

WHEN SPRING BRAKES ARE APPLIED, VEHICLE WILL

STOP QUICKLY. ALSO, IT CANNOT BE DRIVEN AGAIN

UNTIL MALFUNCTION IS REPAIRED AND THERE IS

ENOUGH AIR SUPPLY FOR OPERATION OF SERVICE

BRAKES.

(c) Pull air parking brake control valve

(5).

(d) Once vehicle stops, shut down

engine. Refer to paragraph 2-13 of this manual.

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-600

(e) Notify Organizational Maintenance.

c. Manually Caging Spring Brake Chambers

THIS PROCEDURE SHOULD ONLY BE USED WHEN

ENTIRE AIR SYSTEM IS INOPERATIVE. THIS

PROCEDURE PROVIDES FOR PARTIAL CAGING

SUITABLE FOR TOWING ONLY. THIS PROCEDURE IS

FOR OPERATORS. IT IS NOT INTENDED AS COMPLETE

CAGING FOR MAINTENANCE OF THE SERVICE BRAKES.

(1) Place wheel chocks (6) behind both wheels

on front axle.

NOTE

The following procedure applies to all spring brake chambers.

There are no spring brake chambers on the front axle.

(2) Remove dust cap (7) from spring chamber

(8).

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-601

IF INSIDE OF SPRING BRAKE CHAMBER (8) IS CLOGGED

WITH MUD, SAND, OR DIRT, DO NOT PROCEED WITH

SPRING CAGING OPERATION UNLESS THE CHAMBER

CAN BE CLEARED. NOTIFY ORGANIZATIONAL

MAINTENANCE IF CHAMBER CANNOT BE CLEARED.

(3) Visually inspect inside of spring brake

chamber (8) for mud, sand, or dirt.

(4) Remove nut (9) and washer (10) from side

of spring brake chamber (8). Remove caging bolt (11).

CAUTION

TM 08780B-10

2-602

BRAKE CHAMBER CONTAINS A SPRING UNDER GREAT

PRESSURE. TO PREVENT PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH,

NEVER WORK DIRECTLY BEHIND CHAMBER. IF

CAGING BOLT WILL NOT ENGAGE PROPERLY, SPRING

MAY BE BROKEN.

(5) Insert T-end of caging bolt (11) into hole in

brake chamber (8). T-end should be inserted through key-way of

the metal diaphragm (12) inside brake chamber (8). With caging

bolt inserted, rotate caging bolt 1/4 turn clockwise until "T" bolt

catches on stop inside diaphragm (12).

NOTE

If caging bolt (11) cannot be pulled directly out of spring brake

chamber (8) after it has been turned, bolt (11) is properly seated.

(6) With caging bolt (11) properly seated, hold

in position and install washer (10) and nut (9) onto caging bolt

(11). Tighten nut (9) until it contacts spring brake chamber (8)

finger tight.

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-603

(7) Turn nut (9) clockwise and cage until 2 1/2

to 3 inches of the caging bolt threads extend out of the spring brake

chamber. Brake is then caged for towing.

NOTE

Measure caging (2 1/2 inches to 3 inches) from top of nut (9) to

end of bolt (11).

(8) Repeat steps (2) thru (7) for remaining five

spring brake chambers (8).

d. Operating with Loss of Hydraulic System

NOTE

Failure of hydraulic system will stop operation of any crane,

winch or hydraulic motor on vehicle. All cranes and winches are

equipped with automatic locking mechanisms that hold cranes

and winches in the position they were in before hydraulics failed.

(1) Do not attempt to continue operation of any

crane or winch. Notify Organizational Maintenance.

(2) Do not attempt to repair hydraulic system.

INCREASED EFFORT WILL BE REQUIRED TO TURN

STEERING WHEEL IF THERE IS A FAILURE OF

HYDRAULIC STEERING SYSTEM OR THE ENGINE STOPS

RUNNING. STOP VEHICLE AS SOON AS ROAD

CONDITIONS PERMIT. OPERATING THE VEHICLE WITH

IMPAIRED STEERING COULD RESULT IN SERIOUS

INJURY OR DEATH.

(3) If failure occurs while driving, bring vehicle

to at a stop. Engage parking brake, shut down engine. Refer to

paragraph 2-13 of this manual.

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-604

(4) Notify Organizational Maintenance.

e. Emergency Shut Down Procedure

(1) Open engine compartment door (13).

ENGINE IS HOT. USE CARE TO PREVENT BURNS.

(2) Push lever (14) towards solenoid (15) as far

as it will go.

(3) Hold until engine stops.

(4) Notify Organizational Maintenance.

NOTE

Perform step (5) for LVSA1 series vehicles only.

(5) Pull and hold emergency engine stop lever

(16) until engine stops. Notify Organizational Maintenance.

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-605

f. Crane Operation after Electrical Failure (MK15A1

and MK17A1)

USE THIS PROCEDURE ONLY IN THE EVENT OF AN

EXTREME EMERGENCY. USING THE MANUAL

OVERRIDE SWITCH TO OPERATE THE MHC OVERRIDES

THE OVERLOAD SHUTDOWN CIRCUITS AND ALLOWS

THE MHC TO EXCEED THE RATED CAPACITY. FAILURE


PERSONNEL OR DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT. NOTIFY

ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE AS SOON AS

POSSIBLE TO HAVE PROBLEM CORRECTED.

NOTE

• Except where noted, emergency MHC operation is the

same for MK15A1 and MK17A1 vehicles.

• All MHC functions, except overload lockouts, will operate

normally when using MANUAL OVERRIDE switch.

• In the event of an electrical failure, crane can only be

operated manually from main control panel.

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-606

(1) Push and hold MANUAL OVERRIDE

switch (1) located on MHC main control panel (2). Place HOIST

lever (3) in DOWN position and lower load as necessary.

(2) Disconnect hook (4) from load.


switch (1). Place TELESCOPE lever (5) in the IN position until

boom (6) is fully retracted.

REEL IN CABLE AS REQUIRED SO THAT HOOK BLOCK

ASSEMBLY WILL NOT CONTACT CARGO BED SIDES OR

JACK CYLINDER. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN



switch (1). Place HOIST lever (3) in the UP position to reel in

cable (7).

NOTE

Position boom so that cable and hook block assembly are on

passenger (right) side of vehicle in line with hook block stowage

location.

(5) Push and hold MANUAL OVERRIDE switch

(1). Place SWING lever (8) to CW or CCW position as necessary

and position hook block (4) over passenger (right) side of vehicle.

Align hook block (4) with hook block stowage location.


switch (1). Place MAST lever (9) in DOWN position and lower

mast (10).

CAUTION

TM 08780B-10

2-607

NOTE

If operating a MK17A1 MHC, perform steps (7) through (9). If

operating MK15A1 MHC, proceed to step (10).


switch (1). Place BOOM lever (11) in the DOWN position and

fully lower boom (6).

(8) Connect hook block (4) to stowage ring

(12).


switch (1). Place HOIST lever (3) in UP position and remove all

slack from cable (7).

TM 08780B-10

2-608

NOTE

Perform steps (10) through (12) on MK15A1 only.


switch (1). Place HOIST lever (3) in DOWN position and lower

hook block (4) near hook block stowage hook (13).

OBSERVE HOOK BLOCK DURING LOWERING TO

ENSURE THAT HOOK BLOCK REMAINS ATTACHED TO

HOOK BLOCK STOWAGE BRACKET. FAILURE TO

COMPLY MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.

CAUTION

TM 08780B-10

2-609


switch (1). Place BOOM lever (11) in DOWN position and

HOIST lever (3) in UP position and fully lower boom (6). Ensure

that hook block (4) remains attached to hook block stowage

bracket (13).


switch (1). Place HOIST lever (3) in UP position until all slack is

removed from cable (7).

(13) Remove two pins (14) from outrigger pads

(15).


switch (1). Place LH O/R JACK lever (16) in UP position to raise

outrigger jack cylinder (17).

TM 08780B-10

2-610

(15) Place R/H O/R JACK lever (18) in UP

position to raise outrigger jack cylinder (17).

(16) Stow outrigger jack cylinder pads (15) in

stowage brackets (19).

(17) Place O/R EXT lever (20) to IN position

until outrigger beams are fully retracted.

TM 08780B-10

2-611

2-42. FRONT FLAT TOWING PROCEDURES

a. General. This paragraph provides basic towing

precautions as well as specific instructions for preparation for

towing and front flat towing of an LVS vehicle. Refer to

paragraph 2-18 for Lift and Tow procedures.

TM 08780B-10

2-612

b. Basic Flat Towing Precautions

(1) Never prepare a disabled vehicle for flat

towing until the disabled vehicle has been safely rigged to the

towing vehicle.

(2) Use of the MK48/48A1/15/15A1 Wrecker

Recovery Vehicle for flat towing is the preferred towing method.

When the MK48/48A1/15/15A1 is unavailable, flat towing may be

accomplished with a second LVS if the wrecker's heavy duty tow

bar, short and long lifting chains and air lines are made available to

the LVS.

DO NOT USE TOW STRAPS OR CROSS CHAINS TO FLAT

TOW ANY LVS UNIT. PERSONAL INJURY OR DAMAGE TO

EQUIPMENT COULD RESULT.

(3) Never rig an LVS Front Power Unit for flat

towing if it is uncoupled from its rear trailer, unless it is safely

secured to prevent tipping. An uncoupled LVS Front Power Unit

is front-heavy and unstable. In situations when only a Front Power

Unit will be recovered, rig the unit for flat towing before

uncoupling.

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-613

(4) Except in an extreme emergency, do NOT

flat tow an LVS vehicle without first disconnecting and securing

the drive line of the vehicle being towed. Refer to section e,

Preparation for Towing.

EXCEEDING THE 5 MILES PER HOUR (8 KPH) SPEED

LIMIT OR THE ONE HALF MILE (.8 KM) TOWING LIMIT

WITH DISABLED VEHICLE'S DRIVE LINE STILL

CONNECTED WILL RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE

VEHICLE'S TRANSMISSION.

(5) In emergencies when time or the tactical

situation does not permit disconnecting the drive line of the

disabled vehicle, limited flat towing can be performed. In such

instances, the disabled vehicle must not be towed more than one

half a mile (.8 km). Also, towing speed must not exceed 5 miles

per hour (8 kph).

TOWING OPERATIONS MUST ALWAYS BE CONDUCTED

AT A SPEED WHICH THE OPERATOR DETERMINES TO

BE SAFE UNDER EXISTING CONDITIONS. IN NO EVENT

SHOULD THE OPERATOR EXCEED 15 MPH (24 KPH)

WHEN TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE.

(6) After preparation for flat towing is made and

the drive train components are disconnected, do not tow at speeds

over 15 mph (24 kph).

CAUTION

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-614

c. Rigging Vehicle for Front Flat Towing

• REAR FLAT TOW IS AVAILABLE TO REPOSITION

THE DISABLED VEHICLE FOR OTHER

RECOVERY/TOWING METHODS ONLY, AND IS NOT

INTENDED TO BE USED FOR EXTENDED

RECOVERY PURPOSES, AS DAMAGE TO

EQUIPMENT COULD OCCUR.

• EQUIPMENT DAMAGE COULD OCCUR IF THE

FOLLOWING GCW (GROSS COMBINATION

WEIGHT) RATINGS ARE EXCEEDED.

GCW RATING


154,000 lbs.

(69,916 kg)

105,000 lbs.

(47,670 kg)

NOTE

Hookup for rear flat tow for repositioning purposes only is the

same as the hookup for front flat tow, except that the tow bar is

reversed and attached to the lower tow eyes of the wrecker

(1) Position rear of wrecker directly inline with

front of the disabled vehicle. Allow adequate working space.

(2) Place wrecker transmission shifter (1) in

neutral (N) and apply parking brake valve (2).

CAUTION

TM 08780B-10

2-615



(3) Remove tow bar assembly (3) from position

on top of wrecker cargo body. Remove brace (4) from side

stowage compartment.

NOTE

For flat towing, the tow bar must be fully extended.

(4) Install brace (4) on tow bar (3). Secure

brace with pins (5) and retaining pins (6).

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-616

(5) Install clevises (7) on upper tow eyes (8) of

the disabled vehicle. Secure with pins (9) and retaining pins (10).

(6) Attach tow bar (3) to clevises (7) using pins

(11) and retaining pins (12).

COUPLING A DISABLED VEHICLE FOR TOWING

REQUIRES AN EXPERIENCED OPERATOR, A GROUND

GUIDE, AND TWO ASSISTANTS TO SUPPORT TOW BAR

(3). OPERATORS MUST BACK IN SLOWLY, USING

EXTREME CARE. FULL ATTENTION MUST BE PAID TO

THE GROUND GUIDE. OPERATOR AND GROUND GUIDE

MUST BOTH AGREE ON AND UNDERSTAND TWO HAND

SIGNALS – ONE THAT MEANS BACK UP SLOWLY, AND

ONE THAT MEANS STOP.

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-617

(7) Direct two crew members to hold tow bar

(3) in position for coupling with the rear pintle hook (13).


wrecker must be backed up slowly until eye of the tow bar (3) can

be installed on the pintle hook (13).

(9) Close and lock pintle hook (13), if


TM 08780B-10

2-618

(10) Attach two short lifting chains (14) to lower


(11) Attach two long lifting chains (18) to lower

tow eyes (19) of the disabled vehicle using shackles (20) and pins

(21).

TM 08780B-10

2-619

NOTE

Chains must cross undertow bar.

(12) Cross long lifting chains (18) over each

other. Connect grab hooks of short lifting chains (14) to the

second link below the grab hook ends of the long lifting chains

(18). Install two small shackles (22) on long lifting chains (18) so

that the chain will not come apart.

TM 08780B-10

2-620



NOTE

• If the disabled vehicle's air system is inoperable, the

brakes must be manually released. Refer to paragraph 2-

40, section c.

• Ball valve (26) must be open to release disabled vehicle's

parking brakes.



wrecker. Insert air lines (23) through the front grille of the

disabled vehicle and wrap them about 2 1/2 times to prevent lines

from dragging on the ground. Connect air lines (23) to front glad

hands (25) of disabled vehicle. Service-to-service (blue-to-blue).

Emergency-to-emergency (red-to-red). Open ball valve (26).

CAUTION

TM 08780B-10

2-621

(14) Prepare disabled vehicle for flat towing.

Refer to paragraph 2-41, section e.

(15) Push wrecker TRAILER AIR SUPPLY

valve (27) and PARKING BRAKE VALVE (2) in to charge

disabled vehicle's air system.

NOTE

Do not exceed 15 mph (24 km) when flat towing a disabled

vehicle.


Place transfer case shifter (28) in LOW range. Push parking brake

valve in to release disabled vehicle's parking brakes. Disabled

vehicle is now ready to flat tow.

d. Disconnecting Vehicle After Flat Towing

(1) Place wrecker transmission shifter (1) in

neutral (N) and apply parking brake valve (2).

(2) Pull TRAILER AIR SUPPLY valve (27)

out.

TM 08780B-10

2-622

(3) Remove airlines (23) from glad hands (24)


TM 08780B-10

2-623

(4) Remove two small shackles (22) from the

long lifting chains (18).

(5) Unhook long lifting chains (18) from short

lifting chains (14). Remove pins (21), shackles (20), and long

lifting chains (18) from disabled vehicle.

(6) Remove shackles (16), pins (17), and short

lifting chains (14) from wrecker.



TM 08780B-10

2-624

(8) Direct two crew members to hold tow bar

(3) in position for uncoupling with the rear pintle hook (13).

(9) On direction of the ground guide, pull the

wrecker forward and slowly lower the tow bar (3) to the ground.


tow bar (3).

TM 08780B-10

2-625


clevises (7).


brace (4).

NOTE

Fully collapse tow bar for stowage in wrecker cargo body.

(13) Stow tow bar (3) and brace (4).

(14) Stow all towing equipment.

TM 08780B-10

2-626

e. Preparation for Towing

(1) Prepare cab controls of disabled vehicle.

(a) Shift transfer case shifter (28) to

neutral position. This is halfway between DIRECT (HIGH) and

LOW range.

(b) Place transmission shifter (29) in (N)

neutral position.

(c) Place drive line lockup control (30)

in the UNLOCK position.

TM 08780B-10

2-627

(2) Disconnect the drive lines of disabled

vehicle at two locations as shown below. To disconnect drive lines

perform the following procedures:

(a) At the No. 3 rear axle input flange (31),

install a tie down strap (32). Wrap the tie down strap (32) at least

once around the drive line (33). Tie ends of strap (32) to the

vehicle's chassis (34) as shown.

SECURE THE DRIVE LINE (33) TO THE CHASSIS BEFORE

REMOVAL OF THE 8 FLANGE BOLTS (35). THE DRIVE

LINE IS VERY HEAVY.

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-628

(b) Remove eight caps screws (35) lockwashers

(36), and nuts (37) from rear axle input flange (31).

THE DRIVE LINE (33) IS HEAVY. USE AN ASSISTANT TO

HELP HOLD DRIVE LINE (33) WHILE IT IS BEING

SECURED OUT OF THE WAY.

(c) Push upon drive line (33)until input flange

(31) separates from the axle differential flange (38).

(d) Loosen straps (32). Direct assistant to push

drive line (33) as far up and out of the way as possible. Secure

drive line (33) in a stowed position with straps (32) as shown.

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-629

(e) At the rear engine mount (39) on left side of

the front power unit, lower each end of a tie down strap (40) to the

work area beneath vehicle so that strap (40) is draped over the top

of engine mount (39).

NOTE

The front power unit's engine mount (39) serves as the tie down

point for securing of the drive line (41) to the vehicle for towing.

TM 08780B-10

2-630

(f) From the underside of the vehicle, wrap tie

down strap (40) at least once around the nose box drive line (41).

Secure tie down strap so that drive line is held in a safe position

during removal of capscrews (42).

(g) With drive line secured, remove 8 capscrews

(42), nuts (43), and lockwashers (44) from nosebox flange (45). If

necessary, move towing vehicle forward slightly for removal of the

capscrew (42) nearest bracket (46). Moving the disabled vehicle

forward slightly will rotate flange (45) and allow access to the final

capscrew.

THE DRIVE LINE (41) IS HEAVY. USE AN ASSISTANT TO

HELP HOLD DRIVE LINE (41) WHILE IT IS BEING

SECURED OUT OF THE WAY.

(h) Push upon drive line (41) until flange (47)

separates from the nose box flange (45).

(i) Thread loose end of tie down strap (40)

through the universal joint (48) of the disconnected drive line (41).

Pullback of strap (40) until drive line is drawn backwards

(retracted).

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-631

(j) Direct assistant to push drive line (41) as far

up and out of the way as possible. Secure retracted drive line to the

vehicle frame using frame post (49) next to the engine rear mount

(39).

TM 08780B-10

2-632

2-43 FLAT TOWING THE 7-TON TRUCK BY THE LVS

a. General Description. This paragraph provides basic

towing precautions as well as specific instructions and preparation

for flat towing a 7-Ton Truck with a MK48/15 Wrecker. Follow

the same procedures outlined in this manual for the LVS except for

the special procedures that are resident to the 7-Ton Truck only.

Refer to TM 10629-10 and TM 10867A-12&P for additional

information as required.

b. Basic Flat Towing Precautions

NEVER FLAT TOW 7-TON TRUCK FROM REAR.

PERSONAL INJURY, DEATH, OR DAMAGE TO

EQUIPMENT MAY RESULT.

NOTE

• Never prepare disabled vehicle for flat towing until the

disabled vehicle has been safely rigged to the towing

vehicle. Refer to section C.

• Except in an extreme emergency, do NOT flat tow a 7-

Ton Truck without first removing prop shaft between

transmission and transfer case of the vehicle being towed.

Refer to TM 10867A-12&P.

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-633

c. Rigging Vehicle For Front Flat Towing

EQUIPMENT DAMAGE COULD OCCUR IF THE

FOLLOWING GROSS COMBINATION WEIGHT (GCW)

RATINGS ARE EXCEEDED.

GCW RATING


154,000 lbs. 105,000 lbs.

(69,916 kg) (47,670 kg)

NOTE

For flat towing, the tow bar (3) must be fully extended. Do not

install the brace.

(1) Install 7-Ton Truck adapters (4) on tow eyes

(5) of the disabled vehicle. Secure with pins (6) and retaining pins

(7).

CAUTION

TM 08780B-10

2-634

(2) Attach tow bar (3) to 7-Ton Truck adapters

(4) using pins (8) and retaining pins (9).

• DO NOT POSITION HANDS NEAR PINTLE HOOK

WHILE ALIGNING TOW BAR WITH PINTLE HOOK

ON TOWING VEHICLE. PERSONAL INJURY MAY

RESULT.

• ENSURE AIR LINES ARE NOT CROSSED.

PERSONAL INJURY, DEATH, OR DAMAGE TO

EQUIPMENT MAY RESULT.

IF AIR LINES ARE EXCESSIVELY LONG, WHERE THE

SLACK WILL DRAG ON THE GROUND, ROUTE AIR LINES

LOOSELY AROUND TOW BAR TO TAKE UP EXCESS

SLACK. IF WRAPPING AIR LINE AROUND TOW BAR, BE

SURE TO LEAVE ENOUGH SLACK TO ALLOW FOR

CORNERING OF VEHICLE. DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT

MAY RESULT.

WARNING

CAUTION

TM 08780B-10

2-635

NOTE

If the disabled vehicle’s braking system is inoperable, the brakes

must be manually released. Refer to TM 10629-10. The LVS

Wrecker is not equipped with the inter-vehicular cable, however,

one can be procured as an additional authorized item for use in

place of the Emergency Tow Lights.

(3) Connect inter-vehicular cable (23) to

connector (24) on front bumper of 7-Ton Truck and connector (25)

on rear of wrecker.

(4) Raise hood of 7-Ton Truck. Refer to TM

10629-10.

(5) Disconnect connector (26) from connector

(27).

(6) Lower hood of 7-Ton Truck.

(7) Inspect brake lights, turn signals, taillights

and emergency flashers on 7-Ton Truck for proper operation.

NOTE

• Perform Steps 8 through 12 only if brake lights, turn

signals, taillights, or emergency flashers do not operate

on 7-Ton Truck when inter-vehicular cable is connected.

• If brake lights, turn signals, taillights and emergency

flashers operate properly on 7-ton Truck when inter-

vehicular cable is connected, continue on with hook up

procedures.

(8) Disconnect inter-vehicular cable (23) from


on rear of wrecker.

TM 08780B-10

2-636


10629-10.

(10) Connect connector (26) to connector (27).


d. Installation of Emergency Tow Lights

(1) Remove emergency tow lights (30) and two

brackets (31) from stowage.

(2) Install two brackets (31) in center holes of

emergency tow lights (30) with two screws (32), washers (33), and

nuts (34).

TM 08780B-10

2-637

(3) Position emergency tows lights (30) on rear

of disabled vehicle and fasten securely with straps (35).

(4) Remove tow light cable (36) from stowage

and connect to emergency tow lights (30).

(5) Route other end of tow light cable (36)

along disabled vehicle and connect to rear connector on wrecker.

PRIOR TO TOWING DISABLED VEHICLE, CHECK THAT

BRAKE LIGHTS, FLASHERS, AND TURN SIGNALS ARE

OPERATING ON EMERGENCY TOW LIGHTS IN

CONJUNCTION WITH THOSE ON TOWING VEHICLE.



WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-638

(6) Check brake lights, flashers, and turn signals

for proper operation on emergency tow lights (30).

e. Disconnecting Vehicle After Flat Towing

ENSURE THAT VEHICLES ARE ON LEVEL SURFACE

PRIOR TO DISCONNECTING TOW BAR. PERSONAL

INJURY, DEATH, OR DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT MAY

RESULT.



resident to the 7-Ton Truck only.

NOTE

• If using inter-vehicular cable, perform steps (2) through

(5).

• If using emergency tow lights, perform step (6) only.

(2) Disconnect inter-vehicular cable (23) from


on rear of wrecker.


10629-10.

(4) Connect connector (26) to connector (27).


WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-639

f. Removal of Emergency Tow Lights

(1) Remove tow light cable (36) from wrecker

and emergency tow lights (30).

(2) Stow tow light cable (36).

(3) Remove straps (35) and emergency tow

lights (30) from vehicle.

(4) Remove two nuts (34), washers (33), screws

(32), and brackets (31) from emergency tow lights (30).

(5) Stow emergency tow lights (30), two nuts

(34), washers (33), screws (32), brackets (31), and straps (35).

TM 08780B-10

2-640

g. Propeller Shaft Removal (Transfer Case to

Transmission)

PROP SHAFT IS HEAVY AND SHOULD BE HANDLED BY


NOTE

A pry bar may be necessary to hold yokes from turning during

removal.

(1) Remove four screws (37) and two bearing

straps (38) from yoke (39).

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

2-641/(2-642 blank)

(2) Remove four screws (40) and two bearing straps

(41) from yoke (42).

• WHEN REMOVING PROP SHAFT FROM YOKES,

ENSURE THAT BEARING CAPS REMAIN ON

UNIVERSAL JOINT. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY

RESULT IN LOSS OR DAMAGED TO EQUIPMENT.

• DO NOT ALLOW SLIP YOKE TO COME OFF PROP

SHAFT. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN

MISALIGNMENT OF PROP SHAFT YOKES AND

COULD CAUSE DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.

NOTE

Note position of prop shaft prior to removal to ensure proper

installation.

(3) Compress prop shaft (43) and remove from

two yokes (39 and 42).

CAUTION

TM 08780B-10

3-1

CHAPTER 3

MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS

Section I. Lubrication Instructions

3-1. LUBRICATION. For complete information on

lubricating the LVS series vehicles, refer to the lubrication

instructions in LI 2320-12/9. The lube order will show lubrication

points, explain what lubricant to use and provide the lubrication

intervals.

Section II. Troubleshooting Procedures

3-2. INTRODUCTION. Table 3-2 lists the common

malfunctions that you may find during operation or maintenance of

the vehicle or its equipment. You should perform these tests,

inspections and corrective actions in the order listed.

To quickly find the troubleshooting procedure you need, use the

Fault Symptom Index (Table 3-1). Components and symptoms are

listed alphabetically. Common malfunctions are listed

alphabetically under those components or system headings.

This manual cannot list all malfunctions that may occur. Nor can

it list all tests, inspections and corrective actions. If a malfunction

is not listed, or if listed corrective actions are not adequate, notify

the non-commissioned officer in charge (NCOIC).

Table 3 -1. Symptom Index

TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE Page

Air System

Warning buzzer and air indicator is on ............................ 3-7

Loses pressure or air indicator lights and buzzer

sounds during operation ................................................... 3-8

TM 08780B-10

3-2

Table 3 -1. Symptom Index (Continued)

Troubleshooting Procedure Page

Trailer brake does not apply when service brake

treadle or parking brake is used ....................................... 3-9

Electrical System

All electrical systems inoperative .................................... 3-6

Engine

Engine fails to crank ......................................... .............. 3-3

Engine cranks, but will not start............................... ....... 3-3

Hard to start, does not run smoothly, lacks power ........... 3-3

Low engine oil pressure ................................................... 3-4

High engine oil consumption ........................................... 3-4

Engine will not stop running ............................................ 3-4

Engine overheats .............................................................. 3-5

Hydraulic System

Cranes, winches, or A-frame operates too slow,

too fast, or with jerky movements.................................. 3-11

One or more hydraulic circuits will not operate ............ 3-12

Steering

Vehicle is hard to steer, shimmies, or wanders .............. 3-10

Vehicle steering is slow to respond or power is

intermittent ..................................................................... 3-11

Transmission

Slow or difficult engagement ........................................... 3-6

Gage indicates overheating during normal operation ...... 3-6

Unusually noisy when operating ...................................... 3-6

TM 08780B-10

3-3

Table 3 -1. Symptom Index

Troubleshooting Procedure Page

Wheels and Tires

Tires worn unevenly or excessively ............................... 3-10

Vehicle wanders or pulls to one side on level surface ..... 3-9

Wheel wobbles ................................................................. 3-9

Table 3-2. Troubleshooting

MALFUNCTION

TEST OR INSPECTION

CORRECTIVE ACTION

ENGINE

1. ENGINE FAILS TO CRANK

Step 1. Make sure transmission shifter is in neutral (N)

position.

Move selector in and out of neutral (N)

several times.

Step 2. Check for dirty, loose, or broken battery cables.

If battery connections are dirty or loose, clean and

tighten cables. Refer to paragraph 3-10.

2. ENGINE CRANKS, WILL NOT START

Step 1. Check fuel gauge of fuel level. If gauge shows

enough fuel, but engine still does not start, go to

Step 2.

TM 08780B-10

3-4

Table 3-2. Troubleshooting (Continued)

MALFUNCTION

TEST OR INSPECTION

CORRECTIVE ACTION

ENGINE (Continued)

Step 2. Check for fuel in tank.

Add fuel and prime system as needed. Refer

to paragraph 2-13, section m.

Step 3. Check air cleaner restriction indicator.

If restriction indicator reads red, air cleaner

is restricted and must be serviced. Notify


3. HARD TO START, DOES NOT RUN SMOOTHLY,

LACKS POWER

Step 1. Check air cleaner restriction indicator for red

indication.

If red, reset. Start engine and check again.

If still red, notify Organizational

Maintenance.

Step 2. Check water separator for contamination or water.

Drain fuel from sediment bowl until clean

fuel flows out. Notify Organizational

Maintenance.

Step 3. Check secondary fuel filter for damage or leaks.

Notify Organizational Maintenance.

TM 08780B-10

3-5


MALFUNCTION

TEST OR INSPECTION

CORRECTIVE ACTION

ENGINE (Continued)

Step 4. Check fuel lines and connections for leaks or

damage.

Tighten leaking connections or report

damage to Organizational Maintenance.

4. LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE

Check engine oil level on dipstick.

Adjust level as needed.

5. HIGH ENGINE OIL CONSUMPTION

Check engine for loose oil lines.

Tighten leaking connections, or report


6. ENGINE WILL NOT STOP RUNNING

Step 1. Make sure stop switch is held all the way down.

Position thumb over switch and press in a

downward direction. Apply only enough

force as needed to fully engage switch.

Repeat as needed. If engine still continues

to run, go to Step 2.

TM 08780B-10

3-6


MALFUNCTION

TEST OR INSPECTION

CORRECTIVE ACTION

ENGINE (Continued)

NOTE

Perform Step (2.1) for LVSA1 series vehicles.

Step 2. Open engine compartment door. Push lever (1)

towards solenoid (2) as far as it will go. Hold

until engine stops. Notify Organizational

Maintenance.

Step 2.1. Pull and hold emergency engine stop lever (1. 1)

until engine stops. Notify Organizational

Maintenance.

TM 08780B-10

3-7


MALFUNCTION

TEST OR INSPECTION

CORRECTIVE ACTION

ENGINE (Continued)

7. ENGINE OVERHEATS

USE EXTREME CARE TO AVOID BEING SCALDED OR

BURNED WHEN REMOVING RADIATOR CAP. USE

HEAVY RAG OR GLOVES TO PROTECT HANDS.

Step 1. Check for coolant in sight glass in radiator.

Remove radiator cap and add coolant as

needed.

Step 2. Check coolant hoses for leaks, damage, or loose

clamps.

Tighten loose clamps if needed. Report


Step 3. Check radiator for leaks or damage.

If leaking, notify Organizational

Maintenance.

Step 4. Check radiator cooling fins for dirt or debris

blocking air flow.

Remove any dirt or debris blocking air flow.

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

3-8


MALFUNCTION

TEST OR INSPECTION

CORRECTIVE ACTION

TRANSMISSION

1. UNUSUALLY NOISY WHEN OPERATING


2. TRANS TEMP GAUGE INDICATES

OVERHEATING DURING NORMAL OPERATION


3. SLOW OR DIFFICULT ENGAGEMENT


ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

1. ALL ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS INOPERATIVE

Check battery cables for looseness or corrosion.

If battery connections are dirty or loose,

clean and tighten cables. Refer to paragraph

3-10.

TM 08780B-10

3-9


MALFUNCTION

TEST OR INSPECTION

CORRECTIVE ACTION

AIR SYSTEM

1. WARNING BUZZER AND AIR INDICATOR IS ON

Step 1. Check air pressure gauge.

If gauge shows 75 psi or more, but buzzer

and light are still on, notify Organizational

Maintenance.

Step 2. Check to make sure all six air reservoir

draincocks are closed.

Close all draincocks. If buzzer and light are

still on, go to Step 3.

Step 3. Make sure TRAILER AIR SUPPLY valve is

pulled out (off position).

Pull out TRAILER AIR SUPPLY valve.

Step 4. Check for leaks at air reservoirs, hoses, lines,

fittings and connectors.

If leak is found, tighten connections and

notify Organizational Maintenance. If no

leaks are found and problem still exists, go

to Step 5.

TM 08780B-10

3-10


MALFUNCTION

TEST OR INSPECTION

CORRECTIVE ACTION

AIR SYSTEM (Continued)

Step 5. If vehicle is coupled to a trailer and

troubleshooting of vehicle does not reveal trouble

with vehicle air system, disconnect trailer.

Step 6. Check air pressure gauge again.

If gauge does not increase above 75 psi,

notify Organizational Maintenance.

2. LOSES PRESSURE OR AIR INDICATOR LIGHT

AND BUZZER SOUNDS DURING OPERATION

Step 1. Check to make sure all six air reservoir

draincocks are closed.

Close all draincocks. If problem still exists,

go to Step 2.

Step 2. Pull out TRAILER AIR SUPPLY valve. If

vehicle is coupled to a trailer, push in TRAILER

AIR SUPPLY valve.

Step 3. Accelerate engine until AIR PRESSURE gauge

indicates 120 psi (828 kPa).

Step 4. Stop engine.

TM 08780B-10

3-11


MALFUNCTION

TEST OR INSPECTION

CORRECTIVE ACTION

AIR SYSTEM (Continued)

Step 5. Fully depress service brake treadle while a crew

member listens for leaks.

If leak is found, notify Organizational

Maintenance.

If no leak is found, but buzzer and warning

light stay on, notify Organizational

Maintenance.

3. TRAILER BRAKE DOES NOT APPLY WHEN

SERVICE BRAKE TREADLE OR PARKING BRAKE IS

USED

Make sure inter-vehicular air hoses are correctly connected.

Connect hoses.

Push in TRAILER AIR SUPPLY valve (on

position).

If problems continue, notify Organizational

Maintenance.

TM 08780B-10

3-12


MALFUNCTION

TEST OR INSPECTION

CORRECTIVE ACTION

WHEELS AND TIRES

1. WHEEL WOBBLES

Step 1. Check wheel for loose, missing, or broken lug

nuts.

Tighten loose nuts and notify Organizational

Maintenance.

Step 2. Check to see if wheel is bent.

If wheel is bent, change wheel and tire

assembly. Refer to paragraph 3-8.

If wheel still wobbles, notify Organizational

Maintenance.

2. VEHICLE WANDERS OR PULLS TO ONE SIDE ON

LEVEL SURFACE

• WHILE CHANGING TIRES OR WHILE

PERFORMING TIRE MAINTENANCE, STAY OUT OF

THE TRAJECTORY AS SHOWN BY THE AREA

INDICATED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW PROPER

PROCEDURES MAY RESULT IN INJURY OR DEATH

TO PERSONNEL.

• UNDER SOME CIRCUMSTANCES, THE

TRAJECTORY MAY DEVIATE FROM ITS EXPECTED

PATH. FAILURE TO FOLLOW PROPER

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

3-13


MALFUNCTION

TEST OR INSPECTION

CORRECTIVE ACTION

WHEELS AND TIRES (Continued)


TO PERSONNEL.

• IF THE TIRE IS UNDER INFLATED OR OVER

INFLATED, OR THERE IS OBVIOUS OR

SUSPECTED DAMAGE ON THE TIRE OR WHEEL

COMPONENTS, THE TIRE MUST BE COMPLETELY

DEFLATED PER PARAGRAPH 3-4 IN THIS

MANUAL. TO DEFLATE THE TIRE, REMOVE THE

VALVE CORE FROM THE VALVE STEM AND

STAND OUT OF THE TRAJECTORY AREA BEFORE

THE WHEEL IS REMOVED FROM THE VEHICLE

OR PERSONAL INJURY MAY RESULT.

NOTE

Trajectory area as shown applies to all wheel/tire assemblies.

Step 1. Check tire pressure.

Inflate or deflate tires to proper pressure.


TM 08780B-10

3-14


MALFUNCTION

TEST OR INSPECTION

CORRECTIVE ACTION


Step 2. Make sure all tires are of the proper size and type.

If tires are not properly matched and if

more than one tire is involved, notify


If only one tire is unmatched and the spare

tire is of the correct size and type, replace

improper wheel and tire assembly with the

spare. Refer to paragraph 3-8.

If vehicle still does not steer properly, notify


3. TIRES WORN UNEVENLY OR EXCESSIVELY






TO PERSONNEL.





TO PERSONNEL.

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

3-15


MALFUNCTION

TEST OR INSPECTION

CORRECTIVE ACTION












NOTE


Step 1. Check tire for proper inflation.



Step 2. Check wheel for loose, missing, or broken lug

nuts.

Tighten loose nuts and notify Organizational

Maintenance.

TM 08780B-10

3-16


MALFUNCTION

TEST OR INSPECTION

CORRECTIVE ACTION

STEERING

1. VEHICLE IS HARD TO STEER, SHIMMIES, OR

WANDERS






TO PERSONNEL.





TO PERSONNEL.











WARNING

TM 08780B-10

3-17


MALFUNCTION

TEST OR INSPECTION

CORRECTIVE ACTION

STEERING (Continued)

NOTE


Check tires for proper inflation. Refer to Paragraph 3-4.



If vehicle still does not steer properly, notify


2. VEHICLE STEERING SLOW TO RESPOND OR

POWER IS INTERMITTENT

NOTE

On the MK15/15A1 and the MK17/17A1, the cranes must be in

the stowed position when checking hydraulic fluid level.

Hydraulic fluid must be at operating temperature.

TM 08780B-10

3-18


MALFUNCTION

TEST OR INSPECTION

CORRECTIVE ACTION

STEERING (Continued)

Step 1. Check hydraulic fluid level in sight glass on

reservoir. It should be between add and full

marks.

Add fluid as required.

Step 2. Check for loose or leaking hydraulic connections

and damaged hydraulic lines.

Tighten loose connections. If leak does not

stop, notify Organizational Maintenance.

If lines are damaged, notify Organizational

Maintenance.

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

1. CRANES, WINCHES, OR A-FRAME OPERATES

TOO SLOW, TOO FAST, OR WITH JERKY MOVEMENTS

NOTE

On the MK15/15A1 and the MK17/17A1, the cranes must be in

the stowed position when checking hydraulic fluid level.



marks.


TM 08780B-10

3-19


MALFUNCTION

TEST OR INSPECTION

CORRECTIVE ACTION

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM (Continued)






Maintenance.

2. ONE OR MORE HYDRAULIC CIRCUITS WILL

NOT OPERATE

NOTE

On the MK15 and MK17, the cranes must be in the stowed

position when checking hydraulic fluid level. Hydraulic fluid

must be at operating temperature.



marks.







Maintenance.

TM 08780B-10

3-20


MALFUNCTION

TEST OR INSPECTION

CORRECTIVE ACTION

MK15A1 AND MK17A1 CRANE SYSTEMS

1. CRANE DOES NOT OPERATE

Step 1. Check that selector valve is in the AUXILIARY

HYDRAULICS position. Make sure that valve is

fully engaged.

Pull selector valve, mounted on the right

fender of the power unit, to AUXILIARY

HYDRAULICS position.

If selector valve is in correct position, go to

Step 2.

NOTE

On the MK15A1 and MK17A1, the cranes must be in the stowed



Step 2. Check the hydraulic fluid level in sight glass on

reservoir. Fluid level should be between add and

full marks.


If fluid level is OK, go to Step 3.

TM 08780B-10

3-21


MALFUNCTION

TEST OR INSPECTION

CORRECTIVE ACTION

MK15A1 AND MK17A1 CRANE SYSTEMS (Continued)

Step 3. Ensure that hydraulic lines are securely connected

to MK48/MK48A1.

Secure hydraulic connections to

MK48/MK48A1.

If hydraulic connections are OK, go to

Step 4.

Step 4. Ensure that the MAIN POWER switch on the

crane junction box is in the ON position. This

switch functions both as a circuit breaker and

switch.

If the switch is in the OFF position, reset. If

the switch trips again, notify Organizational

Maintenance.

If the switch is in the ON position, go to

Step 5.

Step 5. Ensure that the EMERGENCY STOP switch on

the crane remote control unit is in the ON position. This switch

disables all crane functions when in the OFF position.

If the switch is in the OFF position, turn to

ON position.


Step 6.

TM 08780B-10

3-22


MALFUNCTION

TEST OR INSPECTION

CORRECTIVE ACTION


Step 6. Push in hydraulic pressure MANUAL

OVERRIDE button and attempt to extend/lower

outrigger beams/jack cylinders, using crane

controls on main control valve bank.

If outrigger beams/jack cylinders can be

extended/lowered, go to Step 7.

If outrigger beams/jack cylinders cannot be

extended/lowered, notify Organizational

Maintenance.

Step 7. Check that all crane controls on main valve bank

operate with hydraulic pressure MANUAL

OVERRIDE button pressed in.

If all crane controls operate, continue

operations using manual controls only and

notify Organizational Maintenance when

mission is completed.

If all crane controls do not operate, notify


TM 08780B-10

3-23


MALFUNCTION

TEST OR INSPECTION

CORRECTIVE ACTION


2. CRANE DOES NOT OPERATE WITH REMOTE

CONTROLS


the crane remote control unit is in the ON

position. This switch disables all crane functions

when in the OFF position.

If the switch is in the OFF position, raise

cover and move switch to ON position.


Step 2.

Step 2. Check electrical connections at the remote control

unit and at the crane. Inspect connector (both the

crane, remote control unit and harness side) for

damage; bent, corroded and unseated pins and

sockets.

If damaged connections were found, Notify


If no damage is found, go to Step 3.

Step 3. Operate the remote control unit and check if the

manual control levers move when the remote

control unit is actuated.

TM 08780B-10

3-24


MALFUNCTION

TEST OR INSPECTION

CORRECTIVE ACTION


If levers do not move, operate the crane

using manual controls only and notify

Organizational Maintenance when mission

is completed.

3. BOOM OPERATION ABNORMAL OR DOES NOT

TELESCOPE IN OR OUT

NOTE

On the MK15A1 and MK17A1, the crane must be in the stowed





full marks.



Step 2. Check that load is not over the load limit shown

on the range diagram (Para 2-16.1 or 3-23.1). The

crane overload shutdown system prevents further

lifting operations when the crane is overloaded.

If load is over maximum weight, lower load

and reduce load to correct weight.

If load is OK, go to Step 3.

TM 08780B-10

3-25


MALFUNCTION

TEST OR INSPECTION

CORRECTIVE ACTION


Step 3. Visually check boom sections for proper

lubrication, bends, or other damage.

If boom sections require lubrication,

lubricate in accordance with LI 2320-12/9A.

If damage is present, notify Organizational

Maintenance.

If boom sections are OK, go to Step 4.


and damaged hydraulic tubes or hoses.



If tubes or hoses are damaged or other

problems are evident, notify Organizational

Maintenance.

If no visual leaks are evident, go to Step 5.

Step 5. Abnormal boom operation may be caused by air

in hydraulic cylinders. To remove air, first

remove load from crane. Then raise boom above

horizontal and telescope out. Finally, lower boom

below horizontal and telescope boom in to purge

air from cylinder.

If problem persists, notify Organizational

Maintenance.

TM 08780B-10

3-26


MALFUNCTION

TEST OR INSPECTION

CORRECTIVE ACTION


4. BOOM DOES NOT RAISE OR LOWER, OR RAISES

AND LOWERS SLOWLY

Step 1. Check outside temperature. If temperature is less

than 0° F (-17° C), hydraulic oil may be thick and

not flow easily. When operating crane in

extremely cold weather, proper warm-up

procedures must be followed.

If operating crane in extremely cold

weather, refer to Para 2-36 for specific

warm-up instructions.

If operating crane in other than extreme cold

conditions, go to Step 2.


on the range diagram (Para 2-17 or 3-26).








TM 08780B-10

3-27


MALFUNCTION

TEST OR INSPECTION

CORRECTIVE ACTION




Maintenance.

5. HOIST OPERATION JERKY, OR DOES NOT LIFT

OR LOWER LOAD












on the range diagram (Para 2-17 or 3-26).




TM 08780B-10

3-28


MALFUNCTION

TEST OR INSPECTION

CORRECTIVE ACTION


Step 3. Check if hoist cable is tangled or binding on hoist

drum.

If hoist cable is tangled or binding, refer to

Malfunction 6, Hoist Does Not Spool Cable

Properly.

If hoist cable is OK, go to Step 4.







Maintenance.

6. HOIST DOES NOT SPOOL CABLE PROPERLY

Step 1. Lower load to the ground as soon as a

mis-spooled condition is observed.

Step 2. Raise the boom to the maximum angle, telescope

out to maximum length and lower the hook to just

above ground level. At this point there should be

approximately five wraps of cable remaining on

the drum.

TM 08780B-10

3-29


MALFUNCTION

TEST OR INSPECTION

CORRECTIVE ACTION


Step 3. Inspect the entire length of hoist cable and note

any obvious kinks. If kinks are noted, position the

crane as necessary to inspect the hoist cable for

damaged wires. Refer to hoist cable criteria in

PMCS Table.

If cable is still serviceable, return the crane

to the position described in Step 2.

If cable is unserviceable, notify


DO NOT ATTEMPT TO HOIST UP CABLE UNTIL TOLD TO

DO SO. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE

TO CABLE OR EQUIPMENT.

Step 4. Inspect the cable remaining on the hoist drum for

any looseness or gaps between wraps. If gaps

exist, lower crane boom to gain access to hoist

drum. Using a hammer, gently tap the cable

wraps back into close contact.

NOTE

If possible, perform Step 5 without changing the boom length or

angle. If necessary, reconfigure the crane as little as possible to

attach the load. The load is attached only for the purpose of

providing weight to straighten the cable while respooling.

CAUTION

TM 08780B-10

3-30


MALFUNCTION

TEST OR INSPECTION

CORRECTIVE ACTION


Step 5. Attach a load, not exceeding 6,500 lbs. (2,948.4

kg.), to crane. Position the load where crane

boom can be extended to maximum length and

raised to maximum angle. Extend the boom to

maximum length and raise to maximum angle.

DO NOT ALLOW THE HOIST CABLE TO BECOME

COMPLETELY UNLOADED (SLACK). FAILURE TO

COMPLY MAY RESULT IN "BIRDNESTING" CABLE AND


Step 6. Lift the load slowly to maximum height while

observing the cable spooling.

If mis-spooling occurs, immediately lower

the load and repeat up to 12 times. If the

cable continues to mis-spool badly, notify


If cable spools properly, lift the load and

lower it 12 times. Then, repeat the process

with no load attached. If mis-spooling

occurs without a load, notify Organizational

Maintenance.

CAUTION

TM 08780B-10

3-31


MALFUNCTION

TEST OR INSPECTION

CORRECTIVE ACTION


7. MAST, OUTRIGGERS OR STABILIZERS EXTEND

OR RETRACT SLOW OR ABNORMAL

















Maintenance.

NOTE


position when checking hydraulic fluid level. Hydraulic oil must

be at operating temperature.

TM 08780B-10

3-32


MALFUNCTION

TEST OR INSPECTION

CORRECTIVE ACTION




full marks.


If fluid level is OK, notify Organizational

Maintenance.

8. SWING OPERATION SLOW OR JERKY IN ONE OR

BOTH DIRECTIONS, OR DOES NOT SWING IN EITHER

DIRECTION

Step 1. Check if truck and crane are level. The tilt alarm

will sound if the truck/crane is more than 4.5° out

of level. Ensure TILT ALARM switch is in the

ON position.

If TILT ALARM sounds, reposition truck

on level surface.

If TILT ALARM is silent, go to Step 2.

NOTE




TM 08780B-10

3-33


MALFUNCTION

TEST OR INSPECTION

CORRECTIVE ACTION



reservoir. Fluid level should be between add and full marks.









Maintenance.

9. OVERLOAD SHUTDOWN SYSTEM DOES NOT

OPERATE PROPERLY

NOTE

The following tests and inspections should be performed in the

event of any of the following:

• Boom up and down, telescope out and hoist up functions

are disabled.

• Intermittent cut-out of the above listed functions (with

crane unloaded).

TM 08780B-10

3-34


MALFUNCTION

TEST OR INSPECTION

CORRECTIVE ACTION


• Cut-out of the above listed functions too early or too late

(with crane loaded).

Step 1. Ensure that the MAIN POWER switch on the

crane junction box is in the ON position. This

switch functions both as a circuit breaker and

switch.

If the switch is in the OFF position, reset. If

the switch trips again, notify Organizational

Maintenance.


Step 2.


the crane remote control unit is in the ON

position. This switch disables all crane functions

when in the OFF position.

If the switch is in the OFF position, raise

cover and move switch to ON position.


Step 3.

NEVER ATTEMPT CRANE OPERATIONS OR LIFTING

WITH CRANE MAST NOT FULLY ERECTED. OPERATING

THE CRANE WITH THE CRANE MAST NOT FULLY

CAUTION

TM 08780B-10

3-35


MALFUNCTION

TEST OR INSPECTION

CORRECTIVE ACTION


ERECTED EVEN SLIGHTLY WILL DISRUPT THE

OVERLOAD SHUTDOWN SYSTEM. FAILURE TO COMPLY

MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT AND INJURY

TO PERSONNEL.

Step 3. Is the crane mast in the fully erected position?

If the mast is not fully erected, raise mast.

Refer to paragraph 2-17 or 2-24 in this

manual.

If the mast is fully erected, go to Step 4.

Step 4. Move the MAIN POWER switch to the OFF

position. Wait approximately 30 seconds and

move the MAIN POWER switch back to the ON

position. This action will reset the Overload

Shutdown System. Wait approximately 30 more

seconds for the system to complete a self test and

then try to operate the crane.

If the crane operates normally, the problem

has been corrected.

If the problem remains, go to Step 5.

Step 5. Check for proper spooling of the hoist cable. It is

essential for the correct operation of the Overload

Shutdown System to have the hoist cable spooled

properly. The Overload Shutdown System cannot

TM 08780B-10

3-36


MALFUNCTION

TEST OR INSPECTION

CORRECTIVE ACTION


accurately determine the amount of

extended cable if the cable is not spooled

evenly or "birdnested".

If the hoist cable is not spooled properly,

refer to Malfunction 6, Hoist Does Not

Spool Cable Properly.

If the hoist cable is OK, notify


NEVER ATTEMPT CRANE OPERATIONS OR LIFTING

WITH CRANE MAST NOT FULLY ERECTED. OPERATING

THE CRANE WITH THE CRANE MAST NOT FULLY

ERECTED EVEN SLIGHTLY WILL DISRUPT THE

OVERLOAD SHUTDOWN SYSTEM. FAILURE TO COMPLY

MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT AND INJURY

TO PERSONNEL.

Step 3. Is the crane mast in the fully erected position?

If the mast is not fully erected, raise mast.

Refer to paragraph 2-17 or 2-24 in this

manual.

If the mast is fully erected, go to Step 4.

CAUTION

TM 08780B-10

3-37


MALFUNCTION

TEST OR INSPECTION

CORRECTIVE ACTION


Step 4. Move the MAIN POWER switch to the OFF

position. Wait approximately 30 seconds and

move the MAIN POWER switch back to the ON

position. This action will reset the Overload

Shutdown System. Wait approximately 30 more

seconds for the system to complete a self test and

then try to operate the crane.

If the crane operates normally, the problem

has been corrected.

If the problem remains, go to Step 5.

Step 5. Check for proper spooling of the hoist cable. It is

essential for the correct operation of the Overload

Shutdown System to have the hoist cable spooled

properly. The Overload Shutdown System cannot

accurately determine the amount of extended

cable if the cable is not spooled evenly or

“birdnested”.

If the hoist cable is not spooled properly,

refer to Malfunction 6, Hoist Does Not

Spool Cable Properly.

If the hoist cable is OK, notify


TM 08780B-10

3-38

3-3. INTRODUCTION. The crew is responsible for the

preventive maintenance checks and services (PMCS) listed in

tables 2-1 thru 2-5 within this manual. Certain other maintenance

services that the crew is responsible for are covered in this section.

3-4. TIRE INFLATION

• FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH THESE PROCEDURES

MAY RESULT IN FAULTY POSITIONING OF THE

TIRE AND/OR RIM PARTS AND CAUSE THE

ASSEMBLY TO BURST WITH EXPLOSIVE FORCE,

SUFFICIENT TO CAUSE SERIOUS PHYSICAL

INJURY OR DEATH.

• NEVER MOUNT OR USE DAMAGED TIRES OR

RIMS.

• BEFORE CHECKING TIRE PRESSURE, PERFORM

STEPS (1 AND 2) TO CHECK TIRE PRESSURE

PROPERLY, OR PRESSURE READINGS WILL BE IN-

ACCURATE AND INJURY OR DEATH MAY RESULT.

a. Tire Gauging

(1) Remove tire inflation hose and gauge

assembly (1) from stowage compartment.






TO PERSONNEL.

WARNING

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

3-39





TO PERSONNEL.

• NEVER INFLATE A TIRE WITHOUT CHECKING TO

ENSURE THAT THE FLANGE AND LOCK RING IS

STILL PROPERLY SEATED AND THE LOCK RING IS

PROPERLY SEATED IN THE LOCK RING GROOVE.

ENSURE THAT THE FLANGE, LOCK RING AND

LOCK RING GROOVE ARE NOT DAMAGED. THE

LOCK RING AND FLANGE MAY BLOW OFF

DURING INFLATION/DEFLATION RESULTING IN

SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

• WHEN INFLATING TIRES MOUNTED ON THE

VEHICLE, ALL PERSONNEL MUST REMAIN OUT

OF THE TRAJECTORY OF THE LOCK RING AND

FLANGE AS SHOWN BY THE AREAS INDICATED.

FAILURE TO FOLLOW PROPER PROCEDURES MAY

RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO

PERSONNEL.

• IF TIRE IS UNDER INFLATED OR OVER




DEFLATED BY REMOVING THE VALVE CORE

FROM THE VALVE STEM AND STAND OUT OF THE

TRAJECTORY AREA OR PERSONAL INJURY OR

DEATH MAY RESULT.

• IF THE TIRE HAS BEEN RUN FLAT, OR IS OVER

OR UNDER INFLATED WHEN TIRE PRESSURE

MEASURED AND OPERATING TERRAIN IS

COMPARED TO TABLE 3-3, OR IF WHEEL/TIRE

ASSEMBLY HAS OBVIOUS OR SUSPECTED

DAMAGE, IT IS NOT SAFE TO ADJUST TIRE

TM 08780B-10

3-40

PRESSURE. COMPLETELY DEFLATE THE TIRE

AND REMOVE THE TIRE FROM THE AXLE.

FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE PROCEDURES MAY

RESULT IN SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY OR

DEATH.

NOTE

Tire gauge air chuck (2) must clamp securely with no leaks or air

pressure gauge readings will be inaccurate.

(2) Remove tire valve caps, snap tire gauge air

chuck (2) on to tire valve (3) by pulling back on sleeve (4). Read

tire pressure on gauge dial (5) and compare to Table 3-3.

(3) Inflate tire as needed. Refer to section b.

(4) Reinstall tire valve caps.

(5) Stow inflation hose and gauge assembly (1).

TM 08780B-10

3-41

Table 3-3. Unsafe Inflation Pressures

MK48 Tires

Are:

MK14,15, 16

and 17 Tires

Are:

MK48 Tires

Are:

MK14,15,16

and 17 Tires

Are: Over inflated.

Tire pressure

measured is

25% or more

above standard

pressure.

Do not adjust

pressure if

above pressure

shown below.

Over inflated.

Tire pressure

measured is

25% or more

above standard

pressure.

Do not adjust

pressure if

above pressure

shown below.

Under inflated.

Tire pressure

measured is

80% or less

than the

standard tire

pressure.

Do not adjust

pressure if

below pressure

shown below.

Under inflated.

Tire pressure

measured is

80% or less

than the

standard tire

pressure.

Do not adjust

pressure if

below pressure

shown below. ON ROAD 75 psi

(517 kPa)

138 psi

(948 kPa)

48 psi

(331 kPa)

88 psi

(607 kPa) OFF ROAD 56 psi

(386 kPa)

56 psi

(386 kPa)

36 psi

(248 kPa)

36 psi

(248 kPa) EMERGENCY

(Sand, Mud,

and Snow)

38 psi

(262 kPa)

38 psi

(262 kPa)

24 psi

(165 kPa)

24 psi

(165 kPa)

b. Tire Inflation

BEFORE CHECKING TIRE PRESSURE, PERFORM STEPS

(1 THRU 3.2) TO CHECK TIRE PRESSURE PROPERLY, OR

PRESSURE READINGS WILL BE INACCURATE AND

INJURY OR DEATH MAY RESULT.

(1) Start engine and apply parking brake. Make

sure air reservoir pressure is higher than recommended tire

pressure by checking primary and secondary air pressure gauges

on instrument panel.

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

3-42

WHEN WORKING AT ARTICULATION JOINT, MAKE SURE

TRANSMISSION IS IN NEUTRAL AND THE PARKING

BRAKE IS APPLIED. THIS WILL PREVENT THE

ARTICULATION JOINT FROM MOVING IF THE

STEERING WHEEL IS ACCIDENTALLY MOVED WHILE

THE ENGINE IS RUNNING.

(2) Pull back on coupling sleeve (6) and insert

hose nipple (7) into coupling. Release sleeve (6).






TO PERSONNEL.

WARNING

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

3-43





TO PERSONNEL.

• NEVER INFLATE A TIRE WITHOUT CHECKING TO

ENSURE THAT THE FLANGE AND LOCK RING IS

STILL PROPERLY SEATED AND THE LOCK RING IS

PROPERLY SEATED IN THE LOCK RING GROOVE.

ENSURE THAT THE FLANGE, LOCK RING AND

LOCK RING GROOVE ARE NOT DAMAGED. THE

LOCK RING AND FLANGE MAY BLOW OFF

DURING INFLATION/DEFLATION RESULTING IN

SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

• WHEN INFLATING TIRES MOUNTED ON THE

VEHICLE, ALL PERSONNEL MUST REMAIN OUT

OF THE TRAJECTORY OF THE LOCK RING AND

FLANGE AS SHOWN BY THE AREAS INDICATED.

FAILURE TO FOLLOW PROPER PROCEDURES MAY

RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO

PERSONNEL.

• IF TIRE IS UNDER INFLATED OR OVER




DEFLATED BY REMOVING THE VALVE CORE

FROM THE VALVE STEM AND STAND OUT OF THE


DEATH MAY RESULT.

• IF THE TIRE HAS BEEN RUN FLAT, OR IS OVER

OR UNDER INFLATED WHEN TIRE PRESSURE

MEASURED AND OPERATING TERRAIN IS

COMPARED TO TABLE 3-3, OR IF WHEEL/TIRE

ASSEMBLY HAS OBVIOUS OR SUSPECTED

DAMAGE, IT IS NOT SAFE TO ADJUST TIRE

TM 08780B-10

3-44

PRESSURE. COMPLETELY DEFLATE THE TIRE

AND REMOVE THE TIRE FROM THE AXLE.

FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE PROCEDURES MAY

RESULT IN SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY OR

DEATH.

(3) Remove tire valve cap. Snap air chuck (2)

onto tire valve (3) by pulling back on sleeve (4). Immediately step

out of the trajectory area, read tire pressure on gauge dial (5) and

compare to Table 3-3.

(3.1) If tire pressure is under inflated or over

inflated or if the wheel or tire has obvious damage or is suspected

of damage, remove valve core (9) from valve stem (3). When tire

is completely deflated, remove from vehicle and take to Unit

Maintenance for disassembly and repair and install spare tire on

vehicle.

(3.2) If tire does not have obvious damage or is

not suspected of damage, stand out of trajectory and inflate or

deflate by depressing lever (8) until proper pressure is attained.

Refer to tire pressure chart in PMCS table.

(4) When tire inflation operation is completed,

grasp end of hose at nipple (7) and pull back on sleeve (6).

(5) Install tire valve caps.

(6) Stow hose and gauge assembly (1).

TM 08780B-10

3-45

3-5. DRAINING AIR RESERVOIRS

a. General. There are seven air reservoirs on all LVS

models that must be drained at the end of each day's operation.

One is located at the front of the cab and two more are located at

the rear of the cab. The two remaining reservoirs are mounted

along the left and right frame rails of each trailer. Each tank is

provided with drain locks.

b. Service

(1) Drain quick-build-up reservoir (1) by first

reaching through grille, then pressing and holding stem (6) up.

Allow all air and moisture to drain, then release stem (6).

TM 08780B-10

3-46

(2) Drain air reservoirs (2 and 3) by opening

drain cock (7), located at the end of each tank. Allow all air and

moisture to drain, then close cock.

(3) Drain remaining air reservoirs (4 and 5) by

opening drain cock (8), located in the center of each tank. Allow

all air and moisture to drain, then close cock.

(4) Make sure all drain cocks are closed tightly.

3-6. CLEANING THE VEHICLE

a. Exterior

DO NOT WIPE DIRT OFF VEHICLE WHEN VEHICLE IS

DRY. DIRT, STONES, OR DEBRIS CAN SCRATCH PAINT

OFF THE VEHICLE.

(1) Wash vehicle often with cool or warm

water. Do not use strong detergent or abrasives.

CAUTION

TM 08780B-10

3-47

(2) While cleaning vehicle, look closely for rust

or corrosion, bare metal, or other damage. Report damage to


b. Interior

(1) Wipe loose dust and dirt from cab interior.

(2) Clean seats and seat belts using a mild

solution of warm water and soap. Never use solvents or abrasives.

(3) Wipe seats and seat belts dry.

3-7. PURGING AIR FROM HYDRAULIC JACK

a. Preparation

NOTE

Purging of air from the hydraulic jack should be accomplished

upon first receipt of the vehicle, whenever the jack hose is

replaced with a new hose and whenever jerking motion is

observed during jacking. This jerking motion is caused by air

trapped in the hydraulic fluid.

(1) Pump jack (1) up until cylinder (2) is fully

extended. For jack operating instructions, refer to paragraph 3-8,

section c.

TM 08780B-10

3-48

b. Purging

(1) Turn jack (1) upside down and push on the

base plate with the help of assistant for additional weight.

(2) Purging is completed when hydraulic jack

has been pushed completely down.

3-8. CHANGING WHEEL AND TIRE ASSEMBLY

a. General

USE CAUTION WHEN LIFTING OR HANDLING WHEEL

AND TIRE ASSEMBLY. IT IS VERY HEAVY AND CAN

CAUSE INJURY IF DROPPED OR IMPROPERLY LIFTED.

(1) In case of flat, stop the truck on level surface

where there is no hazard to other traffic or to crew members

changing tire.

(2) Spare wheel and tire assembly is provided

on the MK48/48A1 Power Unit. A tire hoist is provided to raise

and lower the spare wheel and tire assembly from its stowed

position.

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

3-49

(3) When changing tires, do not substitute other

types or sizes of tires unless all tires on truck can be converted.

Keep all tires the same.

(4) Tire changing requires two people. One

person must operate the hoist while the other person guides the tire

up or down.

b. Using The Spare Tire Hoist

(1) Assembling tire hoist.

(a) Remove arm assembly (1) and

column (2) from left side of tire carrier.

(b) Remove winch column assembly (3)

from right side of tire carrier.

NOTE

• To provide enough room to lower spare tire, the front

power unit cannot be articulated to the right.

• An extension tube is required to remove sand tires or the

rear extended pintle when mounted on spare tire mount.

TM 08780B-10

3-50

(c) Apply a small amount of grease on

base (4) and insert column (2) into base (4).

(d) Remove extension tube (5) from

compartment (6) if required.

(e) Slide extension tube (5) over column

(2) if required. Secure extension tube with pin (7) and clip (8).

(f) Slide winch column (3) over

extension tube (5) or column (2). Secure winch column with pin

(9) and clip (10).

(g) Slide arm assembly (1) over winch

column (3) as shown. Secure arm assembly with pin (11) and clip

(12).

(h) Remove rear extended pintle if stowed on

top of spare tire. Refer to paragraph 2-26, section d.

(i) Rotate crank handle (13) counterclockwise

several turns to slacken cable.

TM 08780B-10

3-51

(j) Remove hook (14) from crank bolt. Then

guide cable and hook into groove in pulley (15). Attach hook (14)

to tire hoist bracket (16).

(k) Insert pin (17) and clip (18).

(2) Removing spare tire and wheel.

DO NOT STAND ON SPARE TIRE WHILE REMOVING LUG

NUTS. TIRE MAY TILT, RESULTING IN PERSONAL

INJURY.

(a) Using lug wrench and bar, remove

three lug nuts (19).

• DO NOT GET BETWEEN SPARE TIRE AND

VEHICLE WHILE LIFTING TIRE. THE TIRE IS

HEAVY AND COULD CAUSE PERSONAL INJURY.

WARNING

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

3-52

• MAKE SURE YOU HAVE GOOD FOOTING WHEN

OPERATING HOIST. THE TIRE MAY SWING FREE

AND KNOCK YOU OFF THE TRUCK.

NOTE

A cargo strap attached to the tire may aid in guiding and

securing the tire assembly during removal.

(b) While turning crank handle (13)

clockwise, carefully raise tire off carrier while helper guides it.

ORDER ALL PERSONNEL CLEAR OF THE WORK AREA

UNTIL LOWERING OPERATIONS ARE COMPLETED.

(c) Swing tire hoist outward and start

lowering tire. Try to keep the tire tilted so that the tread-will

contact ground first. This will enable you to remove tire hoist

bracket (16) and roll tire away.

(d) Lower tire to ground and remove

hook (14) from hoist bracket (16).

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

3-53

(e) Remove three lug nuts (20) and tire

hoist bracket (16). Leave the cable payed out to lift flat tire into its

stowed position.

c. Jacking Procedures

(1) Set parking brakes and place two wheel

chocks opposite the tire to be changed.

THE HYDRAULIC JACK IS INTENDED ONLY FOR

LIFTING THE TRUCK, NOT FOR SUPPORTING THE

VEHICLE WHILE PERFORMING MAINTENANCE. DO

NOT GET UNDER THE TRUCK AFTER IT IS RAISED

UNLESS IT IS PROPERLY SUPPORTED WITH BLOCKS OR

JACK STANDS. FAILURE TO OBSERVE THIS WARNING

CAN RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH.

(2) Adjust hydraulic jack (21) for proper lifting

height by rotating finger (22) up or down.

(3) Place extended tube (23) over cylinder (24).

This will give the additional height needed to reach frame rail.

NOTE

The LVS hydraulic jack must be positioned on the leaf spring

nearest the tire being removed. Properly positioned, the jack will

lift the tire completely off the ground.

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

3-54

(4) Place hydraulic jack (21) on solid level

ground between tires. If necessary, use a jack base plate (25) for

good footing.

MAKE SURE LIP OF HYDRAULIC JACK (21) IS UNDER

LEAF SPRING. TO PREVENT PARTS DAMAGE, DO NOT

USE TOP OF HYDRAULIC JACK (21) TO RAISE TIRE.

(5) Position lip of hydraulic jack (21) under leaf

spring. Hydraulic jack (21) must be as close to axle as possible.

Use the following diagram for proper jacking locations.

NOTE

Two hydraulic jacks can be operated by one pump.

(6) Remove four plugs (26 and 27). Connect

hose (28) to jack (21) and hydraulic pump (29).

CAUTION

TM 08780B-10

3-55

(7) Open valve (30) at hose (28) by turning

handle counterclockwise until it stops.

(8) Close valve (31) by turning handle

clockwise until it stops.

(9) Raise jack (21) by pumping handle (32)

until the tire raises slightly.

d. Tire Removal and Installation

• IF THE TIRE HAS BEEN DRIVEN UNDER

INFLATED OR OVER INFLATED, OR THERE IS

OBVIOUS OR SUSPECTED DAMAGE ON THE TIRE

OR WHEEL COMPONENTS, THE TIRE MUST BE

COMPLETELY DEFLATED. TO DEFLATE THE

TIRE, REMOVE THE VALVE CORE FROM THE

VALVE STEM AND STAND OUT OF THE


DEATH MAY RESULT.




WARNING

TM 08780B-10

3-56



TO PERSONNEL.

NOTE

Trajectory as shown applies to all wheel/tire assemblies.

(1) Check replacement tire for proper air

pressure.

NOTE

All lug nuts on the left side of truck have left-hand threads.

Rotate nuts right to loosen, left to tighten. All lug nuts on the

right side of the truck have right-hand threads. Rotate nuts left

to loosen, right to tighten.

(1.1) Take tire pressure reading on tire to be

changed and compare reading to Table 3-4. If tire is under inflated

or over inflated, or there is obvious or suspected damage to the tire

or wheel components, completely deflate tire before removing

from vehicle. Refer to paragraph 3-4 in this manual.

(2) Loosen all lug nuts on the wheel to be

removed. Then raise the axle until the tire clears the ground.

TM 08780B-10

3-57

Table 3-4. Unsafe Inflation Pressures

MK48

Tires Are:

MK14, 15,

16 and 17

Tires Are:

MK48

Tires Are:

MK14, 15,

16 and 17

Tires Are:

Over

inflated.

Tire

pressure

measured is

25% or

more above

standard

pressure.

Do not

adjust

pressure if

above

pressure

shown

below.

Over

inflated.

Tire

pressure

measured is

25% or

more above

standard

pressure.

Do not

adjust

pressure if

above

pressure

shown

below.

Under

inflated.

Tire

pressure

measured is

80% or less

than the

standard

tire

pressure.

Do not

adjust

pressure if

below

pressure

shown

below.

Under

inflated.

Tire

pressure

measured is

80% or less

than the

standard

tire

pressure.

Do not

adjust

pressure if

below

pressure

shown

below.

ON ROAD 75 psi

(517 kPa)

138 psi

(948 kPa)

48 psi(331

kPa)

88 psi

(607 kPa)

OFF ROAD 56 psi

(386 kPa)

56 psi

(386 kPa

36 psi

(248 kPa)

36 psi

(248 kPa)

EMERGENCY

(Sand, Mud

and Snow)

38 psi

(262 kPa)

38 psi

(262 kPa)

24 psi

(165 kPa)

24 psi

(165 kPa)

(3) Remove lug nuts from wheel and remove

wheel and tire assembly from hub.

(4) Mount spare wheel and tire assembly on hub

and install lug nuts. Run nuts up snugly, but do not complete

tightening yet.

TM 08780B-10

3-58

WHEN RETURNING AXLE TO THE GROUND, ENSURE

PERSONNEL ARE OUT OF THE TRAJECTORY AS SHOWN

BY THE AREA INDICATED. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY

RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.

(5) Lower truck by slowly rotating valve (31)

counterclockwise until tire just contacts ground, then close valve

(31).

(6) Alternately tighten lug nuts as shown. After

tightening lug nuts, turn valve (31) counterclockwise to lower jack

(21) completely.

NOTE

As soon as possible, take vehicle to Organizational Maintenance

and have lug nuts tightened to 650-750 foot-pounds (881.4-1,017

N*m).

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

3-59

e. Mounting Tire On Carrier

(1) Install tire hoist bracket (16) on wheel so

that bracket eye is towards deep side of wheel and location arrow

(33) is pointing at valve stem (34) as shown.

(2) Install three lug nuts (20) and tighten

securely.

(3) Attach cable hook (14) to hoist bracket (16).

NOTE

A cargo strap attached to the tire may aid in guiding and

securing the tire assembly during installation.

(4) Rotate crank handle (13) clockwise to raise

tire. Have helper guide tire while lifting it.

TM 08780B-10

3-60

(5) Swing tire into mounting position over

carrier. Position valve stem (35) so that it will fit into notch (36)

when tire is lowered.

(6) Lower tire onto carrier and install three lug

nuts (19). Tighten nuts securely with lug wrench and bar.

(7) Stow extended pintle. Refer to paragraph 2-

32, section d.

f. Disassembly And Stowage Of Tire Hoist

(1) Rotate crank handle (13) counterclockwise

to slacken cable. Remove hook (14) from tire hoist bracket (16).

(2) Remove clip (18) and pin (17). Rotate crank

handle (13) clockwise to wind up cable. Attach hook (14) on

crank bolt and slightly tighten cable.

TM 08780B-10

3-61

(3) Remove clip (12) and pin (11). Slide arm

assembly (1) off column (3).

(4) Remove clips (8 and 10) and pins (7 and 9).

Remove winch column (3) and extension tube (5), if used, from

column (2).

(5) Remove column (2) from base (4).

TM 08780B-10

3-62

(6) Mount winch column assembly (3) to right

side of tire carrier. Secure with clips.

(7) Mount column (2) on left side of the tire

carrier and secure with clips.

(8) Mount arm assembly (1) on column (2) and

secure with clips.

(9) Stow extension tube (5).

TM 08780B-10

3-63

3-9. FUEL TANK STRAINER SERVICE

a. Strainer Removal

NOTE

Perform fuel tank strainer maintenance on both left and right

fuel tanks.

(1) Park vehicle and turn engine off.

TM 08780B-10

3-64

FUEL IS FLAMMABLE AND CAN EXPLODE EASILY. TO

AVOID SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH, KEEP FUEL AWAY

FROM OPEN FIRE AND KEEP FIRE EXTINGUISHER

WITHIN EASY REACH WHEN WORKING WITH FUEL. DO

NOT WORK ON FUEL WHEN ENGINE IS HOT. FUEL CAN

BE IGNITED BY HOT ENGINE.

(2) Wipe dirt from filler cap (1) and unscrew

from tank.

(3) Pull strainer (2) out of fuel tank.

(4) Reach inside fuel tank and turn retainer (3)

sideways so that strainer (2) may be removed.

(5) Remove chain (4) from retainer (3). Pull

chain (4) through slot in strainer (2).

b. Cleaning And Inspection

(1) Wash strainer (2) in solvent (item 20,

Appendix D) and allow to air dry.

(2) Clean inside of filler cap (1).

(3) Inspect strainer (2) for any damage that

would allow unwanted material to enter tank.

(4) Check to see that gasket in filler cap (1) is in

good condition and will seal fuel tank properly.

c. Strainer Installation

(1) Place chain (4) through slot in strainer (2).

Install chain (4) on retainer (3) so that it is secure in the loop.

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

3-65

(2) Insert retainer (3) and strainer (2) into fuel

tank.

(3) Screw filler cap (1) on tank and tighten.

3-10. BATTERY SERVICE

a. Disconnecting Batteries

BATTERY BOX COVER IS NOT HINGED. TO PREVENT

PARTS DAMAGE, RAISE IT ONE INCH AND PULL

OUTWARD.

(1) Remove battery box cover (1) and set out of

the way.

CAUTION

TM 08780B-10

3-66

• LEAD-ACID BATTERIES CONTAIN SULFURIC ACID

WHICH CAN CAUSE SEVERE BURNS. AVOID

CONTACT WITH SKIN, EYES, OR CLOTHING.

WEAR SAFETY GOGGLES AND GLOVES. IF

BATTERY ELECTROLYTE IS SPILLED, TAKE

IMMEDIATE ACTION TO STOP ITS CORROSIVE

(BURNING) EFFECTS.

• WHEN INSPECTING BATTERY, NEVER SMOKE OR

EXPOSE BATTERY TO SPARKS OR FLAMES. THE

GAS MIXTURE IN EACH CELL OF THE BATTERY,

WHICH ESCAPES THROUGH HOLES IN THE VENT

PLUGS, CAN IGNITE CAUSING AN INTERNAL

EXPLOSION OF BATTERY.

• WHEN WORKING AROUND BATTERIES, ALWAYS

WEAR EYE PROTECTION (FACE SHIELD), ACID

RESISTANT RUBBER APRON AND GLOVES.

• WHEN SERVICING BATTERIES, DO NOT WEAR

WATCHES, RINGS, OR OTHER JEWELRY.

• WHENEVER DISCONNECTING BATTERY CABLES,

ALWAYS DISCONNECT GROUND TERMINAL

FIRST. WHEN RECONNECTING, ALWAYS

CONNECT GROUND CABLES LAST.

NOTE

Tag and mark all cables and wires before removing. This will

aid in the installation of cables.

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

3-67

(2) Remove locknut (2), lockwasher (3), cables

(4 and 5) and lockwasher (6) from battery stud (7). Discard

locknut (2) and lockwashers (3 and 6).

(3) Repeat step (2) for remaining battery cables

(8) thru (14).

b. Servicing Batteries And Cables

(1) Using a wire brush, clean corrosion and

deposits from all battery studs (7). Wipe battery off.

(2) Clean the terminal ends of cables (4), (5),

and (8) thru (14).

(3) Remove all battery caps (15) from each

battery.

TM 08780B-10

3-68

(4) Look inside each battery cell (16) for proper

electrolyte level. Electrolyte level should be to the bottom of the

split ring within the cell.

(5) If electrolyte level is below split ring, add

distilled water until the electrolyte level is at the split ring.

(6) Install all battery caps (15) snugly. DO NOT

over tighten.

(7) Slightly wet the tops of each battery with

water. Apply a light coat of baking soda to the battery tops. This

will neutralize any electrolyte on the battery.

(8) Allow the baking soda to work on the

batteries. When soda stops foaming, wipe battery top clean and

dry.

(9) If battery cables require neutralizing, wet

cable ends and apply soda. Wipe clean and dry.

c. Connecting Batteries

NOTE

Wires a and b are to be connected with cables (4 and 5). Wire c

is to be connected with cable (14).

(1) Install new lockwasher (6), cables (5 and 4),

new lockwasher (3) and new locknut (2). Tighten locknut (2)

securely. DO NOT over tighten.

TM 08780B-10

3-69

(2) Repeat step (1) for cables (8) thru (14). Use

new lockwashers and locknuts.

(3) Install battery box cover (1). Start engine to

check operation of batteries. Refer to paragraph 2-13, section b.

3-11. BATTERY SERVICE (MK48A1 VEHICLES ONLY)

a. Disconnecting Batteries

NOTE

Battery box cover is not hinged. To prevent parts damage, raise

it one inch and pull outward.

(1) Remove battery box cover (1) and set out of

the way.

• LEAD-ACID BATTERIES CONTAIN SULFURIC ACID

WHICH CAN CAUSE SEVERE BURNS. AVOID

CONTACT WITH SKIN, EYES, OR CLOTHING.

WARNING

TM 08780B-10

3-70

WEAR SAFETY GOGGLES AND GLOVES. IF

BATTERY ELECTROLYTE IS SPILLED, TAKE

IMMEDIATE ACTION TO STOP ITS CORROSIVE

(BURNING) EFFECTS.

• WHEN INSPECTING BATTERY, NEVER SMOKE OR

EXPOSE BATTERY TO SPARKS OR FLAMES. THE

GAS MIXTURE IN EACH CELL OF THE BATTERY,

WHICH ESCAPES THROUGH HOLES IN THE VENT

PLUGS, CAN IGNITE CAUSING AN INTERNAL

EXPLOSION OF BATTERY.

• WHEN WORKING AROUND BATTERIES, ALWAYS

WEAR EYE PROTECTION (FACE SHIELD), ACID

RESISTANT RUBBER APRON AND GLOVES.

• WHEN SERVICING BATTERIES, DO NOT WEAR

WATCHES, RINGS, OR OTHER JEWELRY.

• WHENEVER DISCONNECTING BATTERY CABLES,

ALWAYS DISCONNECT GROUND TERMINALS

FIRST. WHEN RECONNECTING, ALWAYS

CONNECT GROUND CABLES LAST.

NOTE

Tag and mark all cables and wires before removing. This will

aid in the installation of cables.

(2) Loosen nut (2) and remove terminal (3)

from battery stud (4) on battery (5).

TM 08780B-10

3-71

(3) Repeat step (2) for remaining terminals (6)

through (12).

b. Servicing Batteries and Cables

(1) Using a wire brush, clean corrosion and

deposits from all battery studs (4). Wipe battery off.

(2) Clean the terminal ends (3) and (6) through

(12) of cables. Remove all corrosion and deposits with wire brush.

(3) Remove all battery caps (13) from each

battery.

(4) Look inside each battery cell (14) for proper

electrolyte level. Electrolyte level should be approximately 1/8 in.

(3.2 mm) below the split ring within the cell.

TM 08780B-10

3-72

(5) If electrolyte level is low, add distilled water

until the electrolyte level is approximately 1/8 in. (3.2 mm) below

the split ring,

(6) Install all battery caps (13) snugly. DO

NOT over tighten.

(7) Slightly wet the tops of each battery with

water. Apply a light coat of baking soda to the battery tops. This

will neutralize any electrolyte on the battery.

(8) Allow the baking soda to work on the

batteries. When soda stops foaming, wipe battery top clean and

dry.

(9) If battery cables require neutralizing, wet

cable ends and apply soda. Wipe clean and dry.

c. Connecting Batteries

Use two wrenches when tightening nuts on terminal to prevent

damage to battery terminals. DO NOT over tighten.

(1) Install terminal (12) on battery stud (15) and

tighten nut (2) to 84-96 inch-pounds (9.5-10.8 N*m).

(2) Repeat step (1) for remaining terminals (7

through 11) and then (3) and (4).

(3) Install battery box cover (1). Start engine to

check operation of batteries. Refer to paragraph 2-13, section b.

CAUTION

TM 08780B-10

3-73

3-12. FIFTH WHEEL AND FIFTH WHEEL RAMP

SERVICE

a. Cleaning and Inspection

(1) Every three months, or more frequently

depending on operating conditions, steam clean top and underside

of fifth wheel.

(2) Check fifth wheel and ramps for cracks or

damaged parts. If damage is found, notify Organizational

Maintenance.

(3) Check primary release handle (1), secondary

release handle (2) and their linkage for proper operation. Handles

and linkage should work freely without binding.

(4) Check coupling jaws (3) for wear and

damage. If wear or damage is found, notify Organizational

Maintenance. Operate handles (1 and 2) to insure coupling jaws

engage and disengage properly.

TM 08780B-10

3-74

b. Lubrication

(1) From beneath the fifth wheel, lubricate all

linkage pivot points, springs and sliding parts of primary release

(1), secondary release (2) and coupling jaws (3). Refer to LI 2320-

12/9 for type of lubricant.

(2) Work all moving parts to insure proper

lubrication.

(3) Grease all lubricating fittings on fifth wheel

rocker, bolt and mount. Refer to LI 2320-12/9 for type of lubricant

and lubrication locations.

(4) Coat entire fifth wheel (4) with grease,

filling all grooves. Refer to LI 2320-12/9 for type of lubricant.

(5) Coat ramps (5) over-all with grease. Refer

to LI 2320-12/9 for type of lubricant.

TM 08780B-10

A-1/(A-2 blank)

APPENDIX A

REFERENCES

A -1. SCOPE. This appendix lists all forms, field manuals,

technical manuals and miscellaneous publications referenced in

this manual.

A -2. FORMS

Recommended Changes for Technical Publications

(5600) ........................................................... NAVMC Form 10772

Quality Deficiency Report ..................................................... SF 368

A-3. TECHNICAL MANUALS

Ground Equipment Record Procedures ..................... TM 4700-15/1

MK64 MOD 4 Mount ...................................... TM 08686A-13&P/1

Motor Vehicle Drivers Handbook for Ammunition,

Explosives, and Hazardous Material

.........................................NAVSEA SWO-20-AF-ABK-010

A-4. MISCELLANEOUS PUBLICATIONS

Lubrication Instructions ............................................... LI 2320-12/9

TM 08780B-10

B-1

APPENDIX B

COMPONENTS OF END ITEM AND

BASIC ISSUE ITEMS LISTS

Section I. Introduction

B-1. SCOPE. This appendix lists components of end item (COEI)

and basic issue items (BII) for the LVS series vehicles. The lists are

intended to help you inventory items required for safe and efficient

operation.

B-2. GENERAL. The Components of End Item list and Basic Issue

Items lists are divided into the following sections:

a. Section II. Components of End Item. COEI is not

applicable to this manual.

b. Section III. Basic Issue Items. These are the minimum

essential items required to operate the LVS series vehicles and to

perform emergency repairs. Although shipped separately packaged, BII

must be with the vehicle during operation and whenever it is transferred

between property accounts. The illustrations will assist you with hard-

to-identify items. This manual is your authority to request/requisition

replacement BII, based on TOE/MTOE authorization of the end item.

B-3. EXPLANATION OF COLUMNS. The following gives an

explanation of columns found in the tabular listings:

a. Column (1)-Illustration Number (Illus Number). This

column indicates the number of the illustration in which the item is

shown.

b. Column (2)-National Stock Number. Indicates the

National Stock Number assigned to the item and will be used for

requisitioning purposes.

c. Column (3)-Description. Indicates the Federal item

name and, if required, a minimum description to identify and locate the

item. The last line for each item indicates the FSCM (in parentheses)

followed by the part number. If item needed differs for different models

of this equipment, the model is shown under the 'Usable On Code'

TM 08780B-10

B-2

heading in this column. If no code is entered in this column, item is used

on all models. These codes are identified as:

Code Used On Code for A1 Series Used On

A3X MK48 BOY MK48A1

A5L MK14 BOZ MK14A1

A5N MK15 B1D MK15A1

A5M MK16 B1G MK16A1

A5K MK17 B1L MK17A1

d. Column (4)-Unit of Measure (U/M). Indicates the

measure used in performing the actual operational/maintenance function.

This measure is expressed by a two-character alphabetical abbreviation

(e.g., ea, in., pr).

e. Column (5)-Quantity Required (Qty Rqr). Indicates the

quantity of the item authorized to be used with/on the equipment.

TM 08780B-10

B-3

BASIC ISSUE ITEMS MK48/48A1

(1)

Illus

No

.

(2)

National Stock

No.

(3)

Description Usable

FSCM & Part No. On Code

(4)

U/M

(5)

Qty

Rqr

1 5110-00-293-2336 Axe, single bit A3X, B0Y

(19207) 6150925

(On pioneer tool

bracket)

EA 1

2 2540-00-670-2459 Bag, pamphlet A3X, B0Y

(19207) 11676920

(Cab map

compartment)

EA 1

3 2540-00-409-8891 Bracket, tool A3X, B0Y

(96906) MS53053-1

(On engine access

door)

EA 1

4 4210-00-889-2221 Fire extinguisher A3X B0Y

(33525) 900E915

(Wall of cab)

EA 1

TM 08780B-10

B-4

BASIC ISSUE ITEMS MK48/48A1 (Continued)

(1)

Illus

No.

(2)

National Stock

No.

(3)

Description Usable


(4)

U/M

(5)

Qty

Rqr

5 6150-01-180-6035 Harness assembly, A3X, B0Y

Work lamp

(45152) 1719770U

(Compartment on

right fender)

EA 1

6 6545-00-922-1200 First aid kit A3X, B0Y

General purpose

(19207) 11677011

EA 1

7 5120-00-288-6574 Pick, handle A3X, B0Y

(19207) 11677021

(On pioneer tool

bracket)

EA 1

8 5120-00-243-2395 Pick A3X, B0Y

(19207) 11677022

(On pioneer tool

bracket)

EA 1

TM 08780B-10

B-5


(1)

Illus

No.

(2)

National Stock

No.

(3)

Description Usable


(4)

U/M

(5)

Qty

Rqr

9 4030-00-542-3185 Shackle, lifting A3X, B0Y

(81348) RRC271

(Front tow eyes

and on frame rail

behind cab)

EA 4

10 5120-00-293-3336 Shovel, hand A3X, B0Y

(19207) 11655784

(On pioneer tool

bracket)

EA 1

TM 08780B-10

B-6


(1)

Illus

No.

(2)

National Stock

No.

(3)

Description Usable


(4)

U/M

(5)

Qty

Rqr

1 5340-01-350-0872 Base plate, jack/ A5L, B0Z

landing legs

(45152) 1731070

(Right stowage

compartment)

EA 2

2 6150-01-022-6004 Cable and plug A5L, B0Z

assy

(19207) 11682336-1

(Left stowage

compartment)

EA 1

3 4210-00-808-4544 Fire extinguisher A5L, B0Z

(03670) 25201

(Bracket on left

stowage

compartment)

EA 1

4 4930-00-288-1511 Flex adaptor, A5L, B0Z

grease

(19207) 6300333

(Right stowage

compartment)

EA 1

5 4930-00-253-2478 Grease gun A5L, B0Z

(11083) 8F9866

(Right stowage

compartment)

EA 1

TM 08780B-10

B-7


(1)

Illus

No.

(2)

National Stock

No.

(3)

Description Usable


(4)

U/M

(5)

Qty

Rqr

6 5340-01-209-7841 Handle A51-, B0Z

(45152) 1347720

(Left stowage

compartment)

EA 1

7 5120-01-242-7218 Handle, sliding T A5L, B0Z

(45152) 1505380

(Left stowage

compartment)

EA 1

8 5120-01-233-9508 Handle, wrench A5L, B0Z

(45152) 1049TR

(Right stowage

compartment)

EA 1

9 4910-01-185-9650 Hose, tire inflation A5L, B0Z

(45152) 1431160U

(Left stowage

compartment)

EA 1

10 5120-01-179-8248 Jack, hydraulic A5L, B0Z

(0WPY8) 3J224820

(Right stowage

compartment)

EA 1

TM 08780B-10

B-8


(1)

Illus

No.

(2)

National Stock

No.

(3)

Description Usable


(4)

U/M

(5)

Qty

Rqr

11 3990-01-187-6984 Kit, tie down A5L, B0Z

(45152) 1459300

(Right stowage

compartment)

consists of: (12 & 13)

EA 1

12 2540-01-247-0255 T-hooks

(45152) 2CR35

EA 24

13 ISO/ANSI locks

(45152) 2CR36

EA 8

14 9905-00-148-9546 Kit, warning A5L, B0Z

(19207) 11669000

(Left stowage

compartment)

SE 1

15 5340-00-912-4087 Padlock set A5L, B0Z

w/chains

(96906) MS21313-161

(Left and right stowage

compartments)

SE 1

TM 08780B-10

B-9


(1)

Illus

No.

(2)

National Stock

No.

(3)

Description Usable


(4)

U/M

(5)

Qty

Rqr

16 5120-01-179-8249 Pump, hydraulic A5L, B0Z

(0WPY8) 3P290820

(Right stowage compartment)

(Includes 17)

Refer to TM 9-2320-297-24P

for repair parts.

EA 1

17 4720-01-396-5206 Hose, nonmetallic, A5L, B0Z

(10 FT) (0WPY8) 51392370

EA 1

18 5120-01-367-3722 Screwdriver, blade A5L, B0Z

(55719) SSD-48

(Left stowage compartment)

EA 1

19 5120-01-110-3531 Screwdriver, A5L, B0Z

Phillips

(55719) SSDP-82


EA 1

20 4930-00-542-3185 Shackle, lifting A5L, B0Z

(81348) RRC27

(Rear tow eye)

EA 2

21 5120-01-242-8164 Socket, thin wall A5L, B0Z

1 1/8 inch

(45152) 1505370


EA 1

TM 08780B-10

B-10


(1)

Illus

No.

(2)

National Stock

No.

(3)

Description Usable


(4)

U/M

(5)

Qty

Rqr

22 5340-01-089-4997 Strap, cargo A5L, B0Z

7000 lbs.

(19207) 11669588

(Left stowage

compartment)

EA 12

23 5340-01-267-6790 Strap, tie down A5L, B0Z

(45152) 1492600

(Right stowage

compartment)

EA 2

24 5120-00-423-6728 Wrench, adjustable A5L, B0Z

15 inch

(72368) AC115

(Left stowage

compartment)

EA 1

TM 08780B-10

B-11


(1)

Illus

No.

(2)

National Stock

No.

(3)

Description Usable


(4)

U/M

(5)

Qty

Rqr

25 5120-00-224-3154 Wrench, box A5L, B0Z

1/2 x 9/16 inch

(58536) A-A-1345

(Left stowage

compartment)

EA 1

26 5120-01-070-8386 Wrench, wheel nut A5L, B0Z

(45152) 1048TR

(Right stowage

compartment)

EA 1

27 5120-01-246-0243 Wrench, open & A5L, B0Z

box 1 1/8 inch

(8Z799) BXOE-36

(Left stowage

compartment)

EA 1

TM 08780B-10

B-12


(1)

Illus

No.

(2)

National Stock

No.

(3)

Description Usable


(4)

U/M

(5)

Qty

Rqr

1 5120-00-224-1372 Bar, pinch 36 inch A5N, B1D

(19204) TDAX1A

(Rear bed stowage

compartment-right

side)

EA 1

2 4910-01-365-9304 Bar, tow-light duty A5N, B1D

(19204) 59678

(On top of rear bed

stowage compartment)

EA 1

3 5120-00-224-1390 Bar, Tank A5N, B1D

(80244)

GGG-B-101TY2CLlSZ4

(Rear bed stowage

compartment-right side)

EA 1

4 5120-00-242-0762 Bar, wrecking A5N, B1D

(80244)

GGG-B-101TY5CL1STASZ5

(Rear bed stowage


EA 1

TM 08780B-10

B-13


(1)

Illus

No.

(2)

National Stock

No.

(3)

Description Usable


(4)

U/M

(5)

Qty

Rqr

5 5340-01-350-0872 Base plate, jack/ A5N, BID

landing legs

(45152) 1731070

(Right and left

rear stowage

compartments)

EA 2

6 8415-00-250-2531 Bib, welders A5N, BID

(81348) KKC450

(Rear bed stowage

compartment-left

side)

EA 1

7 3940-00-202-2200 Block, snatch 15 ton A5N, BID

(81349)

MIL-B-11837

(Forward stowage

compartment, right

side)

EA 1

TM 08780B-10

B-14


(1)

Illus

No.

(2)

National Stock

No.

(3)

Description Usable


(4)

U/M

(5)

Qty

Rqr

8 2590-01-222-5437 Cable, tow lights A5N, B1D

(45152) 1462320

(Right rear stowage

compartment)

EA 1

9 6150-01-022-6004 Cable and plug assy A5N, B1D

(19207) 11682336-1

(Right front stowage

compartment)

EA 1

10 4730-01-184-2106 Coupling assy, A5N, B1D

quick disconnect

(45152) 1451180U

(Rear bed stowage

compartment-right

side)

EA 1


quick disconnect

(45152) 1451190U

(Rear bed stowage

compartment-right

side)

EA 1

TM 08780B-10

B-15


(1)

Illus

No.

(2)

National Stock

No.

(3)

Description Usable


(4)

U/M

(5)

Qty

Rqr


quick disconnect

(45152) 1451200U

(Rear bed stowage

compartment-right

side)

EA 1


quick disconnect

(45152) 1451210U

(Rear bed stowage

compartment-right

side)

EA 1

14 5120-00-293-0665 Bar, wrecking A5N, B1D

(80244) GGG-

B-101-TY5CL1STASZ4

(Rear bed stowage


EA 1

15 5110-00-224-7055 Cutter, bolt A5N, B1D

(80244)

GGG-C-704TY2CL1

(Rear bed stowage

compartment-left

side)

EA 1

TM 08780B-10

B-16


(1)

Illus

No.

(2)

National Stock

No.

(3)

Description Usable


(4)

U/M

(5)

Qty

Rqr

16 5130-01-339-8720 Drill motor, A5N, B1D

hydraulic

(54252) DL09150

(Rear bed stowage

compartment-right

side)

EA 1

17 6220-01-217-8316 Emergency tow A5N, B1D

lights

(45152) 1462290U

(Right rear stowage

compartment)

EA 1

18 4210-00-808-4544 Fire extinguisher A5N, B1D

(03670) 25201

(Bracket left rear

of vehicle)

EA 1

19 4930-00-288-1511 Flex adapter, A5N, B1D

grease gun

(19207) 6300333

(Right rear stowage

compartment)

EA 1

20 4930-00-253-2478 Grease gun A5N, B1D

(11083) 8F9866

(Right rear stowage

compartment)

EA 1

17

18

19

20

TM 08780B-10

B-17


(1)

Illus

No.

(2)

National Stock

No.

(3)

Description Usable


(4)

U/M

(5)

Qty

Rqr

21 5120-00-900-6103 Hammer, sledge A5N, B1D

3 lb.

(80244)

GGG-H-86TY10CL2

(Rear bed stowage

compartment-left

side)

EA 1

22 5120-00-265-7462 Hammer, sledge A5N, B1D

6 lb.

(90172) 41796

(Rear bed stowage

compartment-right

side)

EA 1

23 5340-01-209-7841 Handle A5N, B1D

(45152) 1347720

(Right rear stowage

compartment)

EA 1

24 5120-01-242-7218 Handle, sliding T A5N, B1D

(45152) 1505380

(Right rear stowage

compartment)

EA 1

23

21 24

22

TM 08780B-10

B-18


(1)

Illus

No.

(2)

National Stock

No.

(3)

Description Usable


(4)

U/M

(5)

Qty

Rqr

25 5120-01-233-9508 Handle, wheel nut A5N, BlD

(45152) 1049TR

(Right rear stowage

compartment)

EA 1

26 4720-00-289-4258 Hose, acetylene A5N, B1D

50 ft.

(81348) ZZ-H-461

(Rear bed stowage

compartment-right

side)

EA 1

27 4720-01-184-2092 Hose assembly A5N, B1D

(45152) 1432160U


compartment)

EA 1

28 4720-01-184-2093 Hose assembly A5N, B1D

(45152) 1432170U


compartment)

EA 1

25 26

27 28

TM 08780B-10

B-19


(1)

Illus

No.

(2)

National Stock

No.

(3)

Description Usable


(4)

U/M

(5)

Qty

Rqr

29 4720-00-289-4254 Hose, oxygen A5N, B1D

50 ft.

(81348) ZZ-H-461

(Rear bed stowage

compartment-right

side)

EA 1

30 4720-01-262-4920 Hose, quick A5N, B1D

disconnect 20 ft.

(0WPY8) 51705340


compartment)

EA 1

31 4910-01-185-9650 Hose, tire inflation A5N, B1D

(45152) 1431160U


compartment)

EA 1

32 5120-01-179-8248 Jack, hydraulic A5N, B1D

(0WPY8) 3J224820

(Left & right

rear stowage

compartments)

EA 2

31

29 30

32

TM 08780B-10

B-20


(1)

Illus

No.

(2)

National Stock

No.

(3)

Description Usable


(4)

U/M

(5)

Qty

Rqr

33 3990-01-186-3983 Kit, tie down, A5N, B1D

(45152) 1459310

(Left front stowage

compartment)

consists of: (34 thru 40)

EA 1

34 2540-01-113-9285 T-hooks

(45152) 2CR35

EA 8

35 ISO/ANSI locks

(45152) 2CR36

EA 8

36 Tiedown straps

(7Y710) 64001000

EA 4

37 Tiedown straps, 20 in.

(7Y710) 64001200

EA 9

38 Tiedown straps, 30 in.

(7Y710) 64001300

EA 9

39 Chain, 2 ft.

(7Y710) 25000700

EA 2

40 Socket tray

(7Y710) 26000700

EA 1

33

34

35

40

39

36

37 38

TM 08780B-10

B-21


(1)

Illus

No.

(2)

National Stock

No.

(3)

Description Usable


(4)

U/M

(5)

Qty

Rqr

41 9905-00-148-9540 Kit, warning, hwy A5N, B1D

(19207) 11669000


compartment)

SE 1

42 5340-00-838-5267 Padlock set A5N, B1D

(96906) MS21313-123

(All stowage

compartments)

SE 1

43 5120-01-179-8249 Pump, hydraulic A5N, B1D

(0WPY8) 3P290820

(Right rear stowage

compartment)

Includes 36.1

Refer to TM 08780B-24P for

repair parts.

EA 1

44 4720-01-396-5206 Hose, nonmetallic, A5N, B1D

10 ft.

(0WPY8) 5139370

EA 1

45 5120-00-197-9473 Punch, 17 inch A5N, B1D

(81348) GGG-T-00563

(Rear bed stowage

compartment-left

side)

EA 1

41

43 44

42

45

TM 08780B-10

B-22


(1)

Illus

No.

(2)

National Stock

No.

(3)

Description Usable


(4)

U/M

(5)

Qty

Rqr

46 4820-00-285-6067 Regulator, acetylene A5N, B1D

(17941) RVT8011

(Rear bed stowage

compartment-left

side)

EA 1

47 4820-00-641-3519 Regulator, oxygen A5N, B1D

(81349) MIL-R-13877

(Rear bed stowage

compartment-left

side)

EA 1

48 3695-01-191-6754 Saw, chain, A5N, B1D

hydraulic

(54252) CS06

(Rear bed stowage

compartment-right

side)

EA 1

49 5120-01-367-3722 Screwdriver, blade A5N, B1D

(55719) SDD48

(Rear bed stowage

compartment-right

side)

EA 1

46

47

49

48

TM 08780B-10

B-23


(1)

Illus

No.

(2)

National Stock

No.

(3)

Description Usable


(4)

U/M

(5)

Qty

Rqr

50 5120-01-110-3531 Screwdriver, A5N, B1D

Phillips

(55719) SSDP-82

Rear bed stowage

compartment-right

side)

EA 1

51 3439-00-270-6047 Set, cleaner A5N, B1D

welding

(81349) MIL-C-17223

(Rear bed stowage

compartment-left

side)

EA 1

52 5133-00-293-0983 Set, drill bit H.D. A5N, B1D

(19203) 800434

(Rear bed stowage

compartment-right

side) consists of: (53 - 81)

EA 1

53 5133-00-227-9646 Drill, twist 1/16 in. A5N, B1D

(13130) 917-1-16

EA 1


(13130) 917-5-64

EA 1


(13130) 917-3-32

EA 1


(13130) 917-7-64

EA 1

57 5133-00-227-9650 Drill twist 1/8 in. A5N, B1D

(13130) 917-1-8

EA 1

58 5133-00-227-9651 Drill, twist 9/64 A5N, B1D

(13130) 917-9-64

EA 1


(13130) 917-5-32

EA 1

TM 08780B-10

B-24


(1)

Illus

No.

(2)

National Stock

No.

(3)

Description Usable


(4)

U/M

(5)

Qty

Rqr


(13130) 917-11-64

EA 1


(13130) 917-3-16

EA 1


(13130) 917-13-64

EA 1


(13130) 917-7-32

EA 1

64 5133-00-243-9611 Drill, twist 15/64 in A5N, B1D

(13130) 917-15-64

EA 1


(13130) 917-1-4

EA 1


(13130) 917-17-64

EA 1


(13130) 917-9-32

EA 1


(13130) 917-19-64

EA 1


(13130) 917-5-16

EA 1


(13130) 917-21-64

EA 1


(13130) 917-11-32

EA 1

72 5133-00-227-9665 Drill, twist 23/64 in. A5N, BlD

(13130) 917-23-64

EA 1

TM 08780B-10

B-25


(1)

Illus

No.

(2)

National Stock

No.

(3)

Description Usable


(4)

U/M

(5)

Qty

Rqr


(13130) 917-3-8

EA 1


(13130) 917-25-64

EA 1


(13130) 917-13-32

EA 1


(13130) 917-27-64

EA 1


(13130) 917-7-16

EA 1


(13130) 917-29-64

EA 1


(13130) 917-1-2

EA 1


(13130) 917-15-32

EA 1


(13130) 917-31-64

EA 1

82 5120-01-179-8244 Set, impact socket A5N, B1D

1 1/4-2 1/2 inch

(45152) 1429870

(Rear bed stowage


consists of: (83 - 93)

EA 1

83 5130-00-227-5050 Socket impact, A5N, B1D

1 1/4 inch (55719) 1M403

EA 1


1 3/8 inch (55719) 1M443

EA 1

TM 08780B-10

B-26


(1)

Illus

No.

(2)

National Stock

No.

(3)

Description Usable


(4)

U/M

(5)

Qty

Rqr

85 5130-00-236-3979 Socket impact A5N, B1D

1 1/2 inch (55719) 1M483B

EA 1


1 5/8 inch (55719) 1M523A

EA 1

87 5130-00-684-0918 Socket impact, A5N. B1D

1 3/4 inch (55719) 1M563

EA 1


1 7/8 inch (55719) 1M603B

EA 1


2 inch (55719) 1M643

EA 1

90 Socket impact, A5N, B1D

2 1/8 inch (55719) 1M683

EA 1


2 1/4 inch (55719) 1M723

EA 1


2 3/8 inch (55719) 1M763

EA 1

93 5130-01-189-6358 Socket impact A5N, B1D

2 1/2 inch (55719) 1M803

EA 1

50 51

52

(53-81)

82

(83-93)

TM 08780B-10

B-27


(1)

Illus

No.

(2)

National Stock

No.

(3)

Description Usable


(4)

U/M

(5)

Qty

Rqr

94 5120-01-179-8245 Set, impact socket A5N, B1D

1/2-1 1/8 inch

(45152) 1429880

(Rear bed stowage



EA 1

95 5130-01-348-9210 Impact socket A5N, B1D

1/2 inch

(55719) 1M160

EA 1


9/16 inch

(55719) 1M180

EA 1


5/8 inch

(55719) 1M200

EA 1


11/16 inch

(55719)1M220

EA 1

99 5130-01-348-9260 Impact socket A5N B1D

3/4 inch

(55719) 1M240

EA 1


1 3/16 inch

(55719) 1M260

EA 1


7/8 inch

(755719) 1 M280

EA 1


15/16 inch

(55719) 1M300

EA 1

TM 08780B-10

B-28


(1)

Illus

No.

(2)

National Stock

No.

(3)

Description Usable


(4)

U/M

(5)

Qty

Rqr


1 inch

(55719) 1M320

EA 1


1 1/16 inch

(55719) 1M340

EA 1


1 1/8 inch

(55719) 1M360

EA 1

106 5180-00-754-0661 Set, tool welding A5N, B1D

(50980)

SC5180-95-N39

(Rear bed stowage

compartment-left side)

(Refer to SC5180-95-N39)

EA 1

107 3433-00-294-6743 Set, torch A5N, B1D

(81349) MIL-T-13880

(Rear bed stowage

compartment-left side)

(Refer to mfg packing

list for inventory)

EA 1

108 4030-00-542-3185 Shackle, lifting A5N, B1D

(81348) RRC271

(Rear tow eyes)

EA 2

94

(95-105) 106

107

108

TM 08780B-10

B-29


(1)

Illus

No.

(2)

National Stock

No.

(3)

Description Usable


(4)

U/M

(5)

Qty

Rqr

109 4240-00-540-0623 Shield, face A5N, B1D

(81348) GGG-H-211

(Rear bed stowage

compartment-left

side)

EA 1

110 8415-00-164-0513 Sleeves, welder A5N, B1D

(81348) KK-C-450

(Rear bed stowage

compartment-left

side)

PR 1

111 1670-01-188-4909 Sling, lifting A5N, B1D

(45152) 1429920

(Left front stowage

compartment)

EA 1

109

110

111

TM 08780B-10

B-30


(1)

Illus

No.

(2)

National Stock

No.

(3)

Description Usable


(4)

U/M

(5)

Qty

Rqr

112 5120-01-242-8164 Socket, thin wall A5N, B1D

1 1/8 inch

(45152) 1505370

(Right rear stowage

compartment)

EA 1

113 8120-00-766-1607 Strap, cargo, A5N, B1D

7,000 lbs.

(19207) 11669588

(Left front stowage

compartment)

EA 4

112

113

TM 08780B-10

B-31


(1)

Illus

No.

(2)

National Stock

No.

(3)

Description Usable


(4)

U/M

(5)

Qty

Rqr

114 5340-01-267-6790 Strap, tie down A5N, B1D

(45152) 1492600

(Right rear stowage

compartment)

EA 3

115 8120-00-268-3360 Tank, acetylene A5N, B1D

torch

(81349) MIL-C-3701

(Front bed stowage

compartment-left

corner)

EA 1

116 8120-00-357-7992 Tank, oxygen A5N, B1D

tank

(81349) MIL-C-12661

(Front bed stowage

compartment-right corner)

EA 1

114

115

116

TM 08780B-10

B-32 Change 1


(1)

Illus

No.

(2)

National Stock

No.

(3)

Description Usable


(4)

U/M

(5)

Qty

Rqr

TM 08780B-10

B-33


(1)

Illus

No.

(2)

National Stock

No.

(3)

Description Usable


(4)

U/M

(5)

Qty

Rqr

117

118

119

120

121

122

123

124

125

125a

3805-01-184-4497

2540-01-305-5628

5340-01-227-3521

4010-01-308-6105

4010-01-308-6105

4010-01-315-7325

4010-01-318-4626

4030-00-542-3185

5340-01-315-3377

2510-01-568-7223

Tow assy, wrecker A5N, B1D

(45152) 1379530U

(Front and rear bed

stowage compartments)

consists of: (118-135)

Tow bar assy A5N, B1D

(45152) 1448250U

Clevis, tow bar A5N, B1D

(45152) 1448300

Chain sling, lifting A5N, B1D

(80535) 00044-9983

Chain sling, lifting A5N, B1D

(80535) 00044-9984

Chain sling, lift/tow A5N, B1D

(45152) 1451910

Chain sling, A-frame A5N, B1D

Supt. (80535) 00044-9972

Shackle, lifting A5N, B1D

Beam, pivot A5N, B1D

(45152) 1591450U

Adapter, LVS to A5N, B1D

LVSR

(45152) 3699844

EA

EA

EA

EA

EA

EA

EA

EA

EA

EA

1

1

2

2

2

2

2

2

1

1

TM 08780B-10

B-34 Change 1


(1)

Illus

No.

(2)

National Stock

No.

(3)

Description Usable


(4)

U/M

(5)

Qty

Rqr

126

127

127a

128

129

130

131

132

133

134

135

136

2540-01-217-8312

4010-01-315-2200

4010-01-498-1903

4030-01-315-2201

5360-01-316-1298

5340-01-316-7925

5340-01-235-7664

5340-01-315-2321

5315-01-315-4285

5315-00-243-1167

5340-01-315-3448

Spade assy, tow A5N, B1D

(45152) 1444560U

Cable assy, towing A5N, B1D

(45152) 1591680

Cable assy, towing A5N, B1D

(7W073) 7197012-3

Hook, Grab A5N, B1D

(45152) 1591690

Stop, roll A5N, B1D

(45152) 1591930

Pad assy, scuff A5N, B1D

(45152) 1650650U

Strap, A-frame A5N, B1D

(45152) 1474620

Bracket, lift A5N, B1D

(45152) 1633050

Block, snatch A5N, B1D

(3W708) 663424028

Pin A5N, B1D

(45152) 1591710

Pin, cotter A5N, B1D

(45152) 1753HX

Bar, Spreader A5N, B1D

(45152) 1478270

EA

EA

EA

EA

EA

EA

EA

EA

EA

EA

EA

EA

1

1

1

2

2

1

1

1

1

1

2

1

TM 08780B-10

B-35


(1)

Illus

No.

(2)

National Stock

No.

(3)

Description Usable


(4)

U/M

(5)

Qty

Rqr

137 Shackle, Lifting A5N, B1D

1342190

consisting of: 138, 139, and 140

EA 2

138 Pin, Hd Winch Mtg A5N, B1D

1377810

EA 2

139 Adapter, Tow Bar A5N, B1D

Weldment

3205644

EA 2

140 Pin, Snapper

3364032

EA 2

137

138

140

139

TM 08780B-10

B-36


(1)

Illus

No.

(2)

National Stock

No.

(3)

Description Usable


(4)

U/M

(5)

Qty

Rqr

141 5120-00-243-9072 Vise, 5 inch A5N, B1D

(81348) GGG-V-410

(Front bed stowage

compartment)

EA 1

142 5120-00-423-6728 Wrench, adjustable A5N, B1D

15 inch

(72368) AC 115

(Rear bed stowage

compartment-right

side)

EA 1


24 inch

(72368) AC 124

(Rear bed stowage

compartment-left

side)

EA 1


18 inch

(55719) D718

(Rear bed stowage

compartment-left

side)

EA 1

141

142

143 144

TM 08780B-10

B-37


(1)

Illus

No.

(2)

National Stock

No.

(3)

Description Usable


(4)

U/M

(5)

Qty

Rqr

145 5120-00-224-3154 Wrench box, A5N, B1D

1/2 x 9/16 inch

(58536) A-A-1345

(Rear bed stowage

compartment-left

side)

EA 1

146 5130-01-181-6991 Wrench, hydraulic A5N, B1D

impact 1 inch drive

(54252) IW16150

(Rear bed stowage

compartment-right

side)

EA 1

147 5130-01-181-6992 Wrench, hydraulic A5N, B1D

impact 1/2 inch drive

(54252) 1W09810AA

(Rear bed stowage

compartment-right

side)

EA 1

148 Adapter, socket A5N, B1D

(54252) 05117

EA 1

145

147

148

146

TM 08780B-10

B-38


(1)

Illus

No.

(2)

National Stock

No.

(3)

Description Usable


(4)

U/M

(5)

Qty

Rqr

149 5120-01-246-0243 Wrench, open and A5N, B1D

box 1 1/8 inch

(45152) 1505390

(Right rear stowage

compartment)

EA 1

150 5120-00-277-1462 Wrench, pipe 24 inch A5N, B1D

(19204) TKCX1D

(Rear bed stowage

compartment-left

side)

EA 1

151 5120-01-070-8386 Wrench, wheel nut A5N, B1D

(45152) 1048TR

(Right rear stowage

compartment)

EA 1

152 8415-00-268-7859 Welder's Gloves A5N, B1D

(58536) A-A-50022

(Rear bed stowage

compartment-right

side)

PR 1

149

150

151 152

TM 08780B-10

B-39


(1)

Illus

No.

(2)

National Stock

No.

(3)

Description Usable


(4)

U/M

(5)

Qty

Rqr

1 5120-00-224-1390 Bar, tank A5M, B1G

(80244)

GGG-B-101TY2CL1SZ4

(Right frame rail)

EA 1

2 5120-00-242-0762 Bar, wrecking A5M, B1G

(80244)

GGG-B-101TY5CL1STASZ5


EA 1

3 5340-01-350-0872 Base plate, jack/ A5M, B1G

landing legs

(45152) 1731070

(Left and right stowage

compartments)

EA 2

4 3940-00-202-2200 Block, snatch A5M, B1G

15 ton

(81349) MIL-B-11837

(On top of right

stowage compartment)

EA 1

TM 08780B-10

B-40


(1)

Illus

No.

(2)

National Stock

No.

(3)

Description Usable


(4)

U/M

(5)

Qty

Rqr

5 6150-01-022-6004 Cable and plug A5M, B1G

assy

(19207) 11682336-1

(Right stowage

compartment)

EA 1

6 6110-01-269-5234 Control, station A5M, B1G

winch

(45152) 1524500U

(Top left stowage

compartment)

EA 1

7 5110-00-224-7055 Cutter, bolt A5M, B1G

(80244)

GGG-C-740TY2CL1

(Left stowage

compartment)

EA 1

TM 08780B-10

B-41


(1)

Illus

No.

(2)

National Stock

No.

(3)

Description Usable


(4)

U/M

(5)

Qty

Rqr

8 4930-00-288-1511 Flex adapter, A5M, B1G

grease gun

(19207) 6300333

(Right stowage

compartment)

EA 1

9 4930-00-253-2478 Grease gun A5M, B1G

(11083) 8F9866

(Right stowage

compartment)

EA 1

10 5120-00-900-6103 Hammer, sledge A5M, B1G

3 lb.

(80244)

GGG-H-86TY10CL2

(Left stowage

compartment)

EA 1

11 5120-00-265-7462 Hammer, sledge A5M, B1G

6 lb.

(90172) 41796

(Left stowage

compartment)

EA 1

TM 08780B-10

B-42

BASIC ISSUE ITEMS MK1616A1 (Continued)

(1)

Illus

No.

(2)

National Stock

No.

(3)

Description Usable


(4)

U/M

(5)

Qty

Rqr

12 5340-01-209-7841 Handle A5M, B1G

(45152) 1347720

(Left stowage

compartment)

EA 1

13 5120-01-242-7218 Handle, sliding T A5M, B1G

(45152) 1505380

(Left stowage

compartment)

EA 1

14 5120-01-233-9508 Handle, wheel nut A5M, B1G

(45152) 1049TR

(Right stowage

compartment)

EA 1

15 4720-01-262-4920 Hose, quick A5M, B1G

disconnect 20 ft.

(0WPYB) 51705340

(Left stowage

compartment)

EA 1

TM 08780B-10

B-43


(1)

Illus

No.

(2)

National Stock

No.

(3)

Description Usable


(4)

U/M

(5)

Qty

Rqr

16 4910-01-185-9650 Hose, tire inflation A5M, B1G

(45152) 1431160U

(Right stowage

compartment)

EA 1

17 5120-01-179-8248 Jack, hydraulic A5M, B1G

(0WPY8) 3J224820

(Left & right


EA 2

18 9905-01-148-9546 Kit, warning A5M, BlG

(19207) 11669000

(Left stowage

compartment)

EA 1

TM 08780B-10

B-44


(1)

Illus

No.

(2)

National Stock

No.

(3)

Description Usable


(4)

U/M

(5)

Qty

Rqr

19 5340-00-912-4087 Padlock set w/o A5M, B1G

chain

(96906) MS21313-161

(Left and right


SE 1

20 5120-01-179-8249 Pump, hydraulic A5M, B1G

(0WPY8) 3P290820

(Right stowage

compartment)

Includes 20.1.

Refer to TM 08780B-24P

for repair parts.

EA 1

21 4720-01-396-5206 Hose, nonmetallic, A5M, B1G

10 ft (0WPYB) 51392370

EA 1

22 5120-01-367-3722 Screwdriver, blade A5M, B1G

(55719) SSD-48

(Left stowage

compartment)

EA 1

23 5120-01-110-3531 Screwdriver, A5M, B1G

Phillips

(55719) SSDP-82

(Left stowage

compartment)

EA 1

22

23

19 21

20

TM 08780B-10

B-45


(1)

Illus

No.

(2)

National Stock

No.

(3)

Description Usable


(4)

U/M

(5)

Qty

Rqr

24 4030-00-542-3185 Shackle, lifting A5M, B1G

(81348) RRC-271

(Rear tow eyes)

EA 2

25 5120-01-242-8164 Socket, thin wall A5M, B1G

1 1/8 inch

(45152) 1505370

(Left stowage

compartment)

EA 1

26 Strap, tiedown A5M, B1G

(45152) 1443000

(Left stowage

compartment)

EA 4

24

26

25

TM 08780B-10

B-46


(1)

Illus

No.

(2)

National Stock

No.

(3)

Description Usable


(4)

U/M

(5)

Qty

Rqr

27 5340-01-267-6790 Strap, tiedown A5M, B1G

(45152) 1492600

(Left & right


EA 3

28 5120-00-423-6728 Wrench, adjustable A5M, B1G

15 inch

(72368) AC115

(Left stowage

compartment)

EA 1

29 5120-00-449-8084 Wrench, adjustable A5M, B1G

24 inch

(72368) AC124

(Left stowage

compartment)

EA 1

27

28

29

TM 08780B-10

B-47


(1)

Illus

No.

(2)

National Stock

No.

(3)

Description Usable


(4)

U/M

(5)

Qty

Rqr

30 5120-00-224-3154 Wrench, box A5M, B1G

1/2 x 9/16

(58536) A-A-1345

(Left stowage

compartment)

EA 1

31 5120-01-246-0243 Wrench, open & A5M, B1G

box – 1 1/8 inch

(8Z799) BXOE-36

(Left stowage

compartment)

EA 1

32 5120-01-070-8386 Wrench, wheel nut A5M, B1G

(45152) 1048TR

(Right stowage

compartment)

EA 1

33 5995-00-772-8813 Inter-vehicular A5M, B1G

cable

(19207) 7728813

EA 1

30 31

33

32

TM 08780B-10

B-48


(1)

Illus

No.

(2)

National Stock

No.

(3)

Description Usable


(4)

U/M

(5)

Qty

Rqr

34

38 39 37

36

35

43

42

44

52

53

50

48

45

51

49

47

46

40

41

TM 08780B-10

B-49


(1)

Illus

No.

(2)

National Stock

No.

(3)

Description Usable


(4)

U/M

(5)

Qty

Rqr

34 2590-01-363-8718 Trailer kit A5M, B1G

(45152) 1544000U

consists of 4 (35 - 53)

EA 1

35 Plate, cable guide

(45152) 1518010U

EA 1

36 Weldment, cable guide

(45152) 1516870W

EA 1

37 Pin assy

(45152) 1517860W

EA 1

38 5315-00-298-1481 Cotter pin

(96906) MS24665-357

EA 1

39 4010-01-237-7544 Chain

(80835) 031-0424

(Bulk issue)

(2 x 12"/1 x 10"/1 x 8")

IN 12

40 Pin, quick release

(45152) 1765940

EA 1

41 5305-00-068-0515 Capscrew

(96906) MS90726-8

EA 2

42 5310-00-088-1251 Locknut

(96906) MS51922-1

EA 2

43 5310-00-582-5965 Lockwasher

(96906) MS35338-44

EA 4

44 Ramp assy, Auxiliary

(45152) 1516820U

EA 2

45 Weldment, Auxiliary ramp

(45152) 1516830W

EA 1

46 Pin assy

(45152) 1476010

EA 1

TM 08780B-10

B-50


(1)

Illus

No.

(2)

National Stock

No.

(3)

Description Usable


(4)

U/M

(5)

Qty

Rqr

47 Cotter pin

(96906) MS24665-357

EA 1

48 Pin, quick release

(45152) 2036040

EA 1

49 Capscrew

(96906) MS90726-8

EA 1

50 Locknut

(96906) MS51922-1

EA 1

51 Lockwasher

(96906) MS35338-44

EA 2

52 Pin

(45152) 1517020W

EA 1

53

Pin, quick release

(45152) 2036040

EA 1

TM 08780B-10

B-51


(1)

Illus

No.

(2)

National Stock

No.

(3)

Description Usable


(4)

U/M

(5)

Qty

Rqr

1 5340-01-350-0872 Base plate, jack/ A5K, B1l

landing legs

(45152) 1731070

(Right rear stowage

compartment)

EA 2

2 6150-01-022-6004 Cable and plug assy A5K, B1l

(19207) 11682336-1


compartment)

EA 1

3 4210-00-808-4544 Fire extinguisher A5K, B1l

(03670) 25201

(Bracket right rear

of vehicle)

EA 1

4 4930-00-288-1511 Flex adaptor, A5K, B1l

grease gun

(19207) 6300333

(Right rear stowage

compartment)

EA 1

5 4930-00-253-2478 Grease gun A5K, B1l

(11083) 8F9866

(Right rear stowage

compartment)

EA 2

TM 08780B-10

B-52


(1)

Illus

No.

(2)

National Stock

No.

(3)

Description Usable


(4)

U/M

(5)

Qty

Rqr

6 5340-01-209-7841 Handle A5K, B1l

(45152) 1347720

(Left rear stowage

compartment)

EA 1

7 5120-01-242-7218 Handle, sliding T A5K, B1l

(45152) 1505380

(Left front stowage

compartment)

EA 1

8 5120-01-233-9508 Handle, wheel nut A5K, B1l

(45152) 1049TR

(Right rear stowage

compartment)

EA 1

9 4910-01-185-9650 Hose, tire inflation A5K, B1l

(45152) 1431160U


compartment)

EA 1

10 5120-01-179-8248 Jack, hydraulic A5K, B1l

(0WPY8) 3J224820

(Right rear stowage

compartment)

EA 1

TM 08780B-10

B-53


(1)

Illus

No.

(2)

National Stock

No.

(3)

Description Usable


(4)

U/M

(5)

Qty

Rqr

11 5340-01-209-8782 Kit, tie down A5K, B1l

(77241) A157473

(left rear stowage

compartment)


EA 1

12 5340-01-219-0164 Seat straps, 12 inches long

(7Y710) 64200003

EA 8

13 Ratchet strap, 2" x 27'

(7Y710) 64200001-001

EA 1

14 ISO/ANSI locks

(45152) 2CR36

EA 8

15 2540-01-113-9285 T-hooks

(45152) 2CR35

EA 20

16 Ratchet straps 2” x 15’

(7Y710) R64200001-002

EA 2

11

14

15

13

12 16

TM 08780B-10

B-54


(1)

Illus

No.

(2)

National Stock

No.

(3)

Description Usable


(4)

U/M

(5)

Qty

Rqr

17 9905-00-148-9546 Kit, warning, hwy A5K, B1l

(19207) 11669000


compartment)

EA 1

18 5340-00-682-1505 Padlock set A5K, B1l

(96906) MS21313-161

(Left and right


EA 1

19 5120-01-179-8249 Pump, hydraulic A5K, B1l

(0WPYB) 3P290820

(Right rear stowage

compartment) (Includes 15.1)

Refer to TM 08780B-24P for

repair parts.

EA 1

20 4720-01-396-5206 Hose, nonmetallic, A5K, B1l

10 ft (0WPY8) 51392370

EA 1

21 5120-01-367-3722 Screwdriver, blade A5K, B1l

(55719) SSD-48

(Left front stowage

compartment)

EA 1

22 5120-01-110-3531 Screwdriver, Phillips A5K, B1l

(55719) SSDP-82

(Left front stowage

compartment)

EA 1

17 18

21

22

20

19

TM 08780B-10

B-55


(1)

Illus

No.

(2)

National Stock

No.

(3)

Description Usable


(4)

U/M

(5)

Qty

Rqr

23 4030-00-542-3185 Shackle, lifting A5K, B1l

(81348) RRC271

(Rear tow eyes)

EA 2

24 5120-01-242-8164 Socket, thin wall A5K, B1l

1 1/8 inch

(45152) 1505370

(Left front stowage

compartment)

EA 1

25 5340-01-089-4997 Strap, cargo A5K, B1l

7,000 lbs.

(81337) 51C6716

(Left rear stowage

compartment)

EA 8

26 5340-01-267-6790 Strap, tie down A5K, B1l

(45152) 1492600

(Right rear stowage

compartment)

EA 2

23

25

24 26

TM 08780B-10

B-56


(1)

Illus

No.

(2)

National Stock

No.

(3)

Description Usable


(4)

U/M

(5)

Qty

Rqr

27 5120-00-423-6728 Wrench, adjustable A5K, B1l

15 inch

(72368) AC115

(Left front stowage

compartment)

EA 1

28 5120-00-224-3154 Wrench, box A5K, B1l

1/2 x 9/16 inch

(58536) A-A-1345

(Left front stowage

compartment)

EA 1

29 5120-01-246-0243 Wrench, open and A5K, B1l

box 1 1/8 inch

(8Z799) BXOE-36

(Left front stowage

compartment)

EA 1

30 5120-01-070-8386 Wrench, wheel nut A5K, B1l

1048TR

(Right rear stowage

compartment)

EA 1

27

29

28

30

TM 08780B-10

C-1/(C-2 blank)

APPENDIX C

ADDITIONAL AUTHORIZATION LIST

Additional Authorization List (AAL) is not applicable to this

manual.

TM 08780B-10

D-1

APPENDIX D

EXPENDABLE/DURABLE SUPPLIES LIST


D-1. SCOPE. This appendix lists expendable/durable supplies

you will need to operate and maintain the LVS series vehicles.

D-2. EXPLANATION OF COLUMNS

a. Column(1)-Item Number. This number is assigned

to the entry in the listing and is referenced in the narrative

instructions to identify the material (e.g., "Use cleaning compound,

item 5, App. D").

b. Column (2)-Level. This column identifies the

lowest level of maintenance that requires the listed item.

C - Operator/Crew

O - Organizational Maintenance

c. Column(3)-National Stock Number. This is the

National Stock Number assigned to the item; use it to request or

requisition the item.

d. Column(4)-Description. Indicates the Federal item

name and, if required, a description to identify the item. The last

line for each item indicates the Federal Supply Code for

Manufacturer (FSCM) in parentheses followed by the part number.

e. Column(5)-Unit of Measure (U/M). Indicates the

measure used in performing the actual maintenance function. This

measure is expressed by a two-character alphabetical abbreviation

(e.g., ea, in, pr). if the unit of measure differs from the unit of

issue, requisition the lowest unit of issue that will satisfy your

requirements.

TM 08780B-10

D-2

Section II. Expendable/Durable Supplies List

EXPENDABLE/DURABLE SUPPLIES LIST

(1)

Item

No.

(2)

Level

(3)

National Stock

No.

(4)

Description

(5)

U/M

1 C Anti-Freeze, Coolant AFC

Ethylene Glycol

MIL-A-11755

1 Gallon Can

55 Gallon Drum

Gal.

Gal.

2 C Anti-Freeze, Coolant AFC

Ethylene Glycol

MIL-A-46153

1 Gallon Can

55 Gallon Drum

Gal.

Gal.

3 C Grease, Aircraft

MIL-G-23827B

4 C Grease, General Purpose

NLG1#2

MIL-G-23549C

5 C Grease, General Purpose

NLG1#2

MIL-G-10924C

5.1 C Grease, Automotive and

Artillery

MIL-G-1 0924F

6 C Oil, Fuel, Diesel DF-1

Winter

(81348) VV-F-800

9140-00-286-5294 Bulk Gal.

9140-00-286-5295 5 Gallon Can Gal.

9140-00-286-5296 55 Gallon Drum, 16 Gauge Gal.

9140-00-286-5297 55 Gallon Drum, 18 Gauge

Gal.

TM 08780B-10

D-3

EXPENDABLE/DURABLE SUPPLIES LIST (Continued)

(1)

Item

No.

(2)

Level

(3)

National Stock

No.

(4)

Description

(5)

U/M

7 C Oil, Fuel, Diesel DF-2

Regular

(81348) W-F-800

9140-00-286-5286 Bulk Gal.

9140-00-286-5287 5 Gallon Can Gal.



Gal.

8 C Oil, Fuel, Diesel DF-A

(Arctic)

9150-00-286-5283 Bulk Gal.

9150-00-286-5282 5 Gallon Drum Gal.



Gal.

9 C Oil, Gear 85/140 API

GL-5 SAE BSW/140

MIL-L-2105C

1 Quart Can Qt.

5 Gallon Drum Gal.

55 Gallon Drum

Gal.

10 C Oil, Gear 80/90 API

GL-S SAE 80W/90

MIL-L-2105C

1 Quart Can Qt.

5 Gallon Drum Gal.

55 Gallon Drum

Gal.

11 C Oil, Gear 75 SAE 75W

MIL-L-2105C

1 Quart Can Qt.

5 Gallon Drum Gal.

55 Gallon Drum

Gal.

TM 08780B-10

D-4


(1)

Item

No.

(2)

Level

(3)

National Stock

No.

(4)

Description

(5)

U/M

12 C Oil, Lubricating,

Engine, OE/HDO 10

C-3 Trans Fluid,

SAE 10W

MIL-L2104D

1 Quart Can Qt.

5 Gallon Drum Gal.

55 Gallon Drum, 16 Gauge Gal.

55 Gallon Drum, 18 Gauge

Gal.

13 C Oil, Lubricating, Engine,

OE/HDO-10 API CD-SF,

SAE 10W MIL-L-2104D

1 Quart Can Qt.

5 Gallon Drum Gal.



Bulk

Gal.


OE/HDO-30 API CD-SF,

SAE 30 MIL-L-2104D

1 Quart Can Qt.

5 Gallon Drum Gal.



Bulk

Gal.


OE/HDO 50 API, SE-CC,

SAE 50 MIL-L-2104C

1 Quart Can Qt.

5 Gallon Drum Gal.



Bulk Gal.

TM 08780B-10

D-5/(D-6 blank)


(1)

Item

No.

(2)

Level

(3)

National Stock

No.

(4)

Description

(5)

U/M

16 C Oil, Lubricating, Engine

API CD-SF, SAE

10W-30 MIL-L-46152B

1 Quart Can Qt.

5 Gallon Drum Gal.



Bulk

Gal.

17 C Oil, Lubricating, Engine

OEA MIL-L-46167

1 Quart Can Qt.

5 Gallon Drum Gal.


55 Gallon Drum, 18 Gauge

Gal.

18 C Oil, Lubricating, Exposed

Gear, CW (VV-L-751)

9150-00-234-5197 5 Pound Can Lb.

9150-00-261-7891 35 Pound Pail

Lb.

19 C Sodium Bicarbonate

Lb.

20 C Solvent, Dry cleaning

(P-D-680)

Lb.

1 Quart Can Qt.

1 Gallon Can Gal.

5 Gallon Drum Gal.



TM 08780B-10

E-1

APPENDIX E

STOWAGE AND SIGN GUIDE


E-1. SCOPE. This appendix shows stowage locations for

equipment, metal signs, decals, and stencils that must be in place

on the LVS vehicle.

E-2. GENERAL. The illustrations on the following pages show

the stowage locations for equipment, metal signs, decals, and

stencils used on the MK48, MK14, MK15, MK16, MK17, and all

A1 series vehicles. Most of the decals and stencils contain ,

cautions or information you need to operate the vehicle safely.

Stowage and sign guide is divided into the following sections:

a. Section II. Stowage. This section contains

information for the stowage locations of required Basic Issue Items

(BII) on each vehicle.

b. Section III. Sign Guide. This section shows the

locations of the metal signs, decals and stencils required for each

vehicle. Signs outlined with boxes on the chart are decals, applied

in locations shown to read from angle shown. Signs not outlined

with boxes are stencils. Sign outlined with dotted box is metal

stamped.

TM 08780B-10

E-2

Section II. Stowage MK48

STOWAGE MK48

TM 08780B-10

E-3

STOWAGE MK48 (Continued)

NO. ITEM QUANTITY 1 Axe, single bit 1 2 Bag, pamphlet 1 3 Bracket, tool 1 4 Fire extinguisher 1 5 Harness assembly work lamp 1 6 Kit, first aid 1 7 Pick, handle 1 8 Pick 1 9 Shackle, lifting 4 10

Shovel, hand 1

TM 08780B-10

E-4

STOWAGE MK14

TM 08780B-10

E-5


NO. ITEM QUANTITY

1 Base plate, jack 2

2 Cable and plug assy 1

3 Fire extinguisher 1

4 Flex adaptor, grease 1

5 Grease gun 1

6 Handle 1

7 Handle, sliding T 1

8 Handle, wrench 1

9 Hose, tire inflation 1

10 Jack, hydraulic 1

12 Kit, tie down 1

13 Kit, warning 1

14 Padlock w/chains 1

15 Pump, hydraulic 1

16 Screwdriver, blade 1

17 Screwdriver, Phillips 1

18 Shackle, lifting 2

19 Socket, thin wall 1 1/8 inch 1

21 Strap, cargo 7,000 lbs 12

22 Strap, tie down 2

23 Wrench, adjustable 15 inch 1

24 Wrench, box 9/16 1

25 Wrench, wheel nut 1

26

Wrench, open & box 1 1/8 inch 1

TM 08780B-10

E-6

STOWAGE MK15

TM 08780B-10

E-7


NO. ITEM QUANTITY

1 Bar, pinch 36 inch 1

2 Bar, tow-light duty 1

3 Bar, Tank 1

4 Bar, wrecking 1


6 Bib, welders 1

7 Block, snatch 15 ton 1


9.1 Control, remote assy crane* 1

9.2 Control, remote assy winch* 1

10 Coupling assy, quick disconnect 1




14 Crowbar 1

15 Cutter, bolt 1

16 Drill motor, hydraulic 1


18 Flex adapter, grease gun 1

19 Grease gun 1

20 Hammer, sledge 3 lb 1

21 Hammer, sledge 6 lb. 1

22 Handle 1


24 Handle, wheel nut 1

25 Hose, acetylene 50 ft. 1

26 Hose assembly 1

27 Hose assembly 1

27.1 Hose, non-metallic 10 ft. 1

28 Hose, oxygen 50 ft. 1

29 Hose, quick disconnect 20 ft. 1



33 Kit, tie down 1

34 Kit, warning, hwy 1

34.1 Outrigger jack pads 2


TM 08780B-10

E-8


TM 08780B-10

E-9


NO. ITEM QUANTITY

35 Padlock set 1


37 Punch, 17 inch 1

38 Regulator, acetylene 1

39 Regulator, oxygen 1

40 Saw, chain hydraulic 1



43 Set, cleaner welding 1

44 Set, drill bit H.D. 1

45 Set, impact socket 1 1/4-2 1/2 inch 1

46 Set, impact socket 1/2-1 1/8 inch 1

47 Set, tool welding 1

48 Set, torch 1


50 Shield, face 1

51 Sleeves, welder 1

52 Sling, lifting 1


55 Strap, cargo 7,000 lbs. 4


57 Tank, acetylene torch 1

58 Tank, oxygen torch 1

59 Tow assy, wrecker 1

60 Vise, 6 inch 1




64 Wrench box, 9/16 inch 1

65 Wrench, hydraulic impact 1 inch drive 1

66 Wrench, hydraulic impact 1/2 inch drive 1

67 Wrench, open and box 1 1/8 inch 1

68 Wrench, pipe 24 inch 1


70 Welder's Gloves 1

TM 08780B-10

E-10

STOWAGE MK16

TM 08780B-10

E-11


NO. ITEM QUANTITY

1 Bar, tank 1

2 Bar, wrecking 1


4 Block, snatch 15 ton 1


6.1 Cable, intervehicular 1

7 Control, remote assembly 1

8 Cutter, bolt 1

9 Flex adapter, grease gun 1

10 Grease gun 1



13 Handle 1



15.1 Hose, 10 ft. 1

16 Hose, quick disconnect 20 ft. 1



20 Kit, warning 1

21 Padlock set w/o chain 1






28 Strap, tiedown 4

29 Strap, tiedown 3



32 Wrench, box 9/16 inch 1

33 Wrench, open & box 1 1/8 inch 1


TM 08780B-10

E-12

STOWAGE MK17

TM 08780B-10

E-13


NO. ITEM QUANTITY



2.1 Control, remote assy crane* 1


4 Flex adaptor, grease gun 1

5 Grease gun 2

6 Handle 1



8.1 Hose, 10 ft. 1



12 Kit, tie down 1

13 Kit, warning, hwy 1

13.1 Outrigger jack pads (Located under stowage

box)*

2

14 Padlock set 1






21 Strap, cargo 7,000 lbs. 8



24 Wrench, box 9/16 inch 1

25 Wrench, open and box 1 1/8 inch 1



TM 08780B-10

E-14

Section III. Sign Guide MK48

TM 08780B-10

E-15

SIGN GUIDE MK48 (Continued)

TM 08780B-10

E-16


TM 08780B-10

E-17


TM 08780B-10

E-18

SIGN GUIDE MK48A1 (LVSA1 Series Vehicles Only)

TM 08780B-10

E-19


TM 08780B-10

E-20


(Continued)

TM 08780B-10

E-21


(Continued)

TM 08780B-10

E-22


(Continued)

TM 08780B-10

E-23


(Continued)

TM 08780B-10

E-24


(Continued)

TM 08780B-10

E-25


(Continued)

TM 08780B-10

E-26

SIGN GUIDE MK14

* LVSA1 Series Vehicles Only

TM 08780B-10

E-27

SIGN GUIDE MK15

TM 08780B-10

E-28


TM 08780B-10

E-29


TM 08780B-10

E-30


(Continued)

TM 08780B-10

E-31

SIGN GUIDE MK16

TM 08780B-10

E-32


TM 08780B-10

E-33


TM 08780B-10

E-34

SIGN GUIDE MK17

TM 08780B-10

E-35/(E-36 blank)


TM 08780B-10

Index 1

INDEX

Subject Page

A

Abbreviations ............................................................................... 1-2

A-Frame Towing Operations, MK15 ....................................... 2-273

Air Reservoirs, Drain ................................................................. 3-45

Air System, Principles of Operation .......................................... 1-29

Auxiliary Hydraulics for Tool Usage ...................................... 2-417

Auxiliary Hydraulics for Additional Crane Usage .................. 2-427

B

Basic Issue Items..........................................................................B-1

Battery Service ........................................................................... 3-65

Battery Service (MK48A1 Series Vehicles Only) ..................... 3-69

C

Cargo Cover Kit, MK17/17A1 ................................................ 2-519

Cargo Side Panels, MK17/17A1 .............................................. 2-510

Cargo Tie Down ....................................................................... 2-551

Container Loading ................................................................... 2-537

Cleaning the Vehicle .................................................................. 3-46

Controls and Indicators

MK48/48A1 ..................................................................... 2-1

MK14/14A1 ................................................................... 2-21

MK15/15A1 ................................................................... 2-24

MK16/16A1 .................................................... ...............2-40

MK17/17A1 ................................................................... 2-44

Special Purpose Kits ...................................................... 2-56

Crane Operation

MK15 ........................................................................... 2-216

MK17 ........................................................................... 2-454

TM 08780B-10

Index 2

INDEX (Continued)

Subject Page

D

Data, Equipment ........................................................................ 1-15

Description

General ............................................................................. 1-3

MK48/48A1/14/14A1 ...................................................... 1-4

MK48/48A1/15/15A1 ...................................................... 1-6

MK48/48A1/16/16A1 ...................................................... 1-9

MK48/48A1/17/17A1 .................................................... 1-11

Difference between Models ....................................................... 1-14

Draining Air Reservoir .............................................................. 3-45

Driveline, Principles of Operation ............................................. 1-33

E

Electrical System Principles of Operation ................................. 1-30

Emergency Operating Procedures ............................................ 2-597

Equipment Data ......................................................................... 1-15

Equipment Description ................................................................ 1-3

Extended and Standard Pintle .................................................. 2-568

F

Fifth Wheel and Ramp Service .................................................. 3-73

Flat Towing 7-Ton Truck by the LVA .................................... 2-632

Fluid Leakage............................................................................. 2-63

Fording ..................................................................................... 2-595

Fuel Tank Strainer Service......................................................... 3-63

G

General

Equipment Description ................................................................ 1-3

General Information ..................................................................... 1-1

Maintenance Procedures ............................................................ 3-38

TM 08780B-10

Index 3

INDEX (Continued)

Subject Page

H

Hydraulic System, Principles of Operation ............................... 1-31

I

Indicators

MK48/48A1 ..................................................................... 2-1

MK14/14A1 ................................................................... 2-21

MK15/15A1 ................................................................... 2-24

MK16/16A1 ................................................................... 2-40

MK17/17A1 ................................................................... 2-44

ISO/ANSI Container Loading.................................................. 2-537

K

Kit, Special Purpose

Machine Gun Mount ................................................................ 2-577

Run Flat and Sand Tire Kits..................................................... 2-555

Rear Body Tow Kit .................................................................. 2-557

L

Leakage, Fluid............................................................................ 2-63

Lift Towing the 7-Ton Truck by the LVS Wrecker ................. 2-382

Lighting .................................................................................... 2-196

Loading Procedures, ISO/ANSI Containers ............................ 2-537

Lubrication ................................................................................... 3-1

M

Maintenance Forms and Records ................................................. 1-1

Maintenance Procedures

Battery Service ............................................................... 3-65

Changing Wheel and Tire Assembly ............................. 3-48

Cleaning Vehicle ............................................................ 3-46

Draining Air Reservoirs ................................................. 3-45

Fifth Wheel Service ....................................................... 3-73

Fuel Tank Strainer.......................................................... 3-63

Tire Inflation .................................................................. 3-38

TM 08780B-10

Index 4

INDEX (Continued)

Subject Page

M

MK48/48A1 Operating Procedures ......................................... 2-170

MK15 Crane Operation............................................................ 2-216

MK15/15A1 A-Frame Lift and Tow Operations ..................... 2-273

MK15/15A1 Winch Operation ................................................ 2-396

MK15 Auxiliary Hydraulics for Tool Usage ........................... 2-417

MK15 Auxiliary Hydraulics for Additional Crane Usage ....... 2-427

MK15A1 Material Handling (MHC) Crane Operations .......... 2-248

MK16/16A1 Fifth Wheel Operation ........................................ 2-437

MK16 Winch Operation .......................................................... 2-447

MK17 Crane Operation............................................................ 2-455

MK17 Cargo Side Panel Operation ......................................... 2-510

MK17 Cargo Cover Kit ........................................................... 2-519

MK17A1 Material Handling (MHC) Crane Operation ........... 2-485

M870/870A1 Trailer Kit Operation ......................................... 2-582

O

Operations

Cold Weather ............................................................... 2-584

Emergency ................................................................... 2-597

Fording ......................................................................... 2-595

Hot Weather ................................................................. 2-587

Lights ........................................................................... 2-192

Normal Conditions ....................................................... 2-170

Rough or Unusual Terrain ........................................... 2-590

Towing ......................................................................... 2-611

P

Power Unit and Trailer Separation .......................................... 2-196

Platform, Machine Gun ............................................................ 2-577

Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) ............ 2-64

Purging Air From Hydraulic Jack .............................................. 3-47

TM 08780B-10

Index 5/(Index 6 blank)

INDEX (Continued)

Subject Page

R

Rear Body Tow Unit ................................................................ 2-557

Records, Maintenance .................................................................. 1-1

Reference Information ................................................................. 1-2

S

Seat Controls .......................................................... ......................2-4

Separation, Trailer.................................................................... 2-196

Special Purpose Kits

Machine Gun Mount .................................................... 2-577

Run Flat and Sand Tire Kits......................................... 2-555

Rear Body Tow Unit .................................................... 2-557

Starting Procedures .................................................................. 2-170

Steering System - Principles of Operation ................................. 2-32

Stowage and Sign Guide .............................................................. E-1

Strainer, Fuel Tank..................................................................... 3-63

Supplies, Durable Materials ........................................................ D-1

T

Technical Principles of Operation ............................................. 1-24

Tire Assembly, Changing .......................................................... 3-48

Tire Inflation .............................................................................. 3-38

Towing Procedures .................................................................. 2-611

W

Warranty Information .................................................................. 1-1

Winch Operation

MK16 ........................................................................... 2-447

MK15 ................................................. ..........................2-396

Wrecker Operation ................................................................... 2-273

tm 08780b-10

Documents

blank page

b blank i

blank tm

marine corps use

title blank

blank department

marine corps washington

marine corps ard